A320 Generic Training CCOM PDF

A318/A319/A320/A321
CABIN CREW
OPERATING MANUAL

The content of this document is the property of Airbus. It is supplied in confidence and commercial
security on its contents must be maintained. It must not be used for any purpose other than that for
which it is supplied, nor may information contained in it be disclosed to unauthorized persons. It must
not be reproduced in whole or in part without permission in writing from the owners of the copyright.
© AIRBUS 2005. All rights reserved.

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Use of this « generic A320 » CCOM
The purpose of this “generic A320” CCOM is to provide operators with the
generic A320 features and guidelines.
The intended purpose of this manual is to only assist operators in developing
their own manual.
It is the operator’s responsibility to ensure that their cabin crew operating

manual complies with the regulations of their National Aviation Authorities.
Note: The emergency equipment described in this “generic A320” CCOM may
not be representative of the emergency equipment onboard the operator’s
aircraft.
INTRODUCTION 00.000
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS JAN 08/08
00.010 GENERAL INTRODUCTION

-- GENERAL GUIDELINES 1
-- FOREWORD 2
-- COMMENTS AND ENQUIRY 3
-- GENERAL 4
-- PRESENTATION 5
-- PAGINATION 7
-- REVISION/UPDATING 9
-- CUSTOMIZATION 10
00.030 AIRCRAFT ALLOCATION TABLE
00.040 LIST OF SECTIONS
00.050 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

-- ABBREVIATIONS 1
00.060 UNITS CONVERSION TABLE

-- UNITS CONVERSION TABLE 1
00.070 LIST OF MODIFICATIONS
TR1 A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET CCOM Page 1 of 1

INTRODUCTION 00.010
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GENERAL INTRODUCTION OCT 27/07
GENERAL GUIDELINES
ALL
R (1)
The content of this A320 CCOM is basic and is not representative of a specific
airline version or customized configuration.
This CCOM provides only generic A320 features and guidelines and can be used
to assist the operators in developing their own Cabin Crew Operating Manual.
Should any deviation appear between the information provided in this CCOM,
and that published in the applicable AFM, MMEL, FCOM, AMM,IPC the latter
shall prevail at all time.
This CCOM will not be updated.

INTRODUCTION 00.010
FOREWORD
ALL
R (2) (3)
The CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL (CCOM) provides descriptive

information on the standard version of the aircraft, operating instructions and
Function Recovery Procedures (FRP) guidelines for items and/or equipment
managed by the cabin crew, and operating instructions for normal and/or
emergency/abnormal operations.
"Standard aircraft" signifies the aircraft as delivered by Airbus Industrie, with all
applicable Service Bulletins (SBs) embedded. All airline-specific equipment can
be added via the Customer Originated Change (COC) procedure.
In keeping with the philosophy of the FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL
(FCOM), only information unique to this particular aircraft configuration is included.
In case of conflict between this CCOM and the FCOM or the regulations of the
Approved Authorities’ Procedures, the FCOM and the regulations of the Approved
Authorities’ Procedures will apply.

INTRODUCTION 00.010
COMMENTS AND ENQUIRY
ALL
All manual holders and users are encouraged to forward any questions and
suggestions regarding the Cabin Crew Operating Manual (CCOM) to :
AIRBUS
BP 33
1 ROND-POINT MAURICE BELLONTE
31707 BLAGNAC CEDEX - FRANCE
TELEFAX : 33 (0) 561.93.29.68
TELEX : TLSBI7X
ATTN. : FLIGHT OPERATIONS SUPPORT - STLS4

INTRODUCTION 00.010
GENERAL
ALL
The CCOM must address the unique requirements dictated by its use in a cabin
environment and, possibly, by the conditions associated with abnormal or
emergency situations. Some subjects are also included in the FCOM, but each
manual is specific to the applicable crew.
The CCOM content and format shall also satisfy the requirements for use as a
reference document during cabin crew training.
The CCOM will be available in the following electronic formats :
-- Extensible Markup Language (XML, World Wide Web specifications).
-- Portable Document Format (PDF, open Adobe specification).
The CCOM is delivered on CD-ROM, or online using Airbus On Line Services
(AOLS).
In addition to the above two formats, a CCOM "Starter Pack" will be designed to
translate the "XML" format to Publishing formats.
No paper versions will be made available.
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS AND NOTES
WARNING : An operating procedure, technique, etc., which may result in

injury or loss of life, if not carefully followed.
CAUTION : An operating procedure, technique, etc., which may result in

damage to equipment, if not carefully followed.
NOTE : An operating procedure, technique, etc., considered essential

to emphasize.

INTRODUCTION 00.010
PRESENTATION
ALL
R (2) (4)
The CCOM is made up of one volume, which is divided into 10 chapters. Each
chapter is divided into pre-defined sections. Optional sections can be added to
address, airline-specific requirements (Ex : airline requests...).
Each section is made up of Documentary Units (DU), which are information
segments containing technical data. Each DU is assigned an effectivity.
Chapter 00 : INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides general information about the manual.
Chapter 01: AIRCRAFT GENERAL
This chapter presents an overview of the aircraft.
Chapter 02 : CABIN INTERIOR
This chapter provides descriptive and operational information on cabin
equipment and systems.
Chapter O3 : CIDS AND COMMUNICATION
This chapter provides descriptive and operational information on the
communication systems and on the CIDS, in particular.
Chapter O4 : CABIN INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEMS
entertainment equipment and systems.
Chapter O5 : EVACUATION DEVICES
evacuation equipment and systems.
Chapter 06 : OXYGEN
This chapter provides descriptive and operational information on the oxygen
equipment and systems.
Chapter 07 : EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
EMERGENCY equipment and systems.
Chapter 08 : STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES (SOPs)
This chapter provides normal procedures for standard aircraft operations by
the cabin crew.
SOPs consist of inspections, cabin preparations and normal procedures.
Chapter 09 : ABNORMAL/EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
This chapter provides Abnormal/Emergency procedures to be applied by cabin
crews in case of a failure.

INTRODUCTION 00.010
Chapter 10 : CABIN CREW BULLETINS (CCB)

This chapter contains Cabin Crew Bulletins (CCB), which supplement the
information and procedures given in the different CCOM sections. Each CCB
will be managed like a section of the previous chapters.
For chapters 02, 03, 04, whenever possible, a Function Recovery Procedures
(FRP) section will be included at the end of the descriptive section. This section
should assist the cabin crew in resetting/reactivating cabin systems or functions.

INTRODUCTION 00.010
PAGINATION
ALL
FORMAT
The "PDF" CCOM is designed with the following paper layout :

-- Page format and size : A5 (148,5 mm x 210 mm), or "Double A5" (210 x 297
mm).
-- Orientation : Portrait
-- Left-Hand/Right-Hand.
-- Standard character type and size : Helvetica, 9 points.
The PDF CCOM page is composed of the following three zones :
-- A header,
-- A footer,
-- A body.
HEADER
The header is composed of the following three parts :

-- The left side : Includes the manual’s title, the applicable aircraft program, and
the applicable logo (company logo, or Airbus logo by default).
-- The middle : Indicates the title of the current chapter at the top of the zone,
and the title of the current section at the bottom of the zone.
-- The right side : Provides the sections’s identification and revision date.
HEADER
INTRODUCTION 00.040
CABIN CREW
OPERATION MANUAL LIST OF SECTIONS JAN 09/03
NOC 00010 00201 0001

INTRODUCTION 00.010
FOOTER
The footer contains such remaining Operating Manual identification data, not
included in the header, as : The extracted Document IDENT, and page numbering
information (that is, the current page number and the total number of pages).
EXAMPLE : FLEET CCOM
AFR A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET CCOM PAGE 1 OF 5
NOC 00010 00202 0001

INTRODUCTION 00.010
REVISION/UPDATING
ALL
REVISION
For the CCOM, there will no longer be General Revisions, Intermediate Revisions,
or Temporary Revisions, since it is revised on a continuous, as needed, basis.
The revision IDENT indicated the manual’s date of the assembly.
A section is always revised in its entirety, and the changes are indicated in the
List Of Section (LOS). Each section is identified by the date of its last revision.
Changes made during a revision are identified by a "revision" mark in the
left-hand margin.
The revision mark is an "R" with one or more numerical indexes on the same
line. The numerical index refers to the corresponding index of the highlight page,
located at the end of the section. The "R" is located in front of the modified object.
The lines, which indicates effectivity changes, neither have indexes nor "Rs".
UPDATING
In the List Of Sections (LOS), each line (section) will have :

-- Section identifiers : Chapter (2 digits), and section (3 digits).
-- The following codes to describe the update :
Blank = No change
N = New section
R = Revised section
D = Deleted section
-- The revision date.

INTRODUCTION 00.010
LIST OF MODIFICATIONS (LOM)
The List of Modifications Table (LOM) lists the product’s applicable Factory
Modifications and Service Bulletins, along with their various cross-references. SBs
appear when embodied on at least one aircraft within the fleet. The LOM
contains the following information :
. Codes describing the update :
-- N = New criteria for this revision
-- R = Revision : SB change for an existing Change Identification Number
(CIN), validity change, or title change for the criteria.
. Date corresponding to the revision date for which the criteria was incorporated.
. Validity information is optional, and is expressed the same format as on the
manual’s technical pages (MSN, or Registration Number). Grouping is applied
in the case of an MSN, or FSN.
DU EFFECTIVITY
Each DU is assigned an effectivity :

-- Effectivity can either be expressed in terms of MSN, or registration number
(tail number), depending on the customer’s preference. However, MSN is the
default.
-- On the PDF CCOM, the effectivity appears above the DU (if different from the
previous one), and within a grey background.

INTRODUCTION 00.010
HIGHLIGHTS
(1) New item ’GENERAL GUIDELINES’ for ’ALL’
(2) Update of the description to be in accordance with the A380 CCOM.
(3) Text previously indicated that: "The CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
(CCOM) provides descriptive information on the standard version of the
aircraft, operating instructions and Fault System Management (FSM)
guidelines". This has been corrected to read: "The CABIN CREW
OPERATING MANUAL (CCOM) provides descriptive information on the
standard version of the aircraft, operating instructions and Function
Recovery Procedures (FRP) guidelines".
(4) Text previously indicated that: "For chapters 02, 03, 04, whenever
possible, a Fault System Management (FSM) section will be included at
the end of the descriptive section." This has been corrected to read: "For
chapters 02, 03, 04, whenever possible, a Function Recovery Procedures
(FRP) section will be included at the end of the descriptive section."
TR1 A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET CCOM Highlights 1 of 1

INTRODUCTION 00.040
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL LIST OF SECTIONS JAN 08/08
Section Date Section Date

00.010 OCT 27/07 04.060 SEP 13/07
00.030 SEP 13/07 04.070 SEP 13/07
00.040 R JAN 08/08 04.080 R JAN 08/08
00.050 OCT 27/07 04.090 SEP 13/07
00.055 D 04.100 SEP 13/07
00.060 SEP 13/07
00.070 R JAN 08/08 05.010 SEP 13/07
05.020 OCT 27/07
01.010 SEP 13/07 05.030 SEP 13/07
01.020 SEP 13/07 05.040 SEP 13/07
01.030 SEP 13/07
01.040 SEP 13/07 06.010 SEP 13/07
01.050 SEP 13/07 06.020 SEP 13/07
01.060 SEP 13/07 06.030 SEP 13/07
01.070 SEP 13/07 06.040 SEP 13/07
01.080 SEP 13/07
07.010 R JAN 08/08
02.010 SEP 13/07 07.020 SEP 13/07
02.030 SEP 13/07 07.030 SEP 13/07
02.040 SEP 13/07
02.050 SEP 13/07 08.010 SEP 13/07
02.060 R JAN 08/08 08.015 SEP 13/07
02.070 OCT 27/07 08.020 SEP 13/07
02.080 SEP 13/07 08.030 SEP 13/07
02.090 R JAN 08/08 08.040 SEP 13/07
02.100 SEP 13/07 08.045 SEP 13/07
02.110 OCT 27/07 08.050 SEP 13/07
02.120 R JAN 08/08 08.060 SEP 13/07
02.140 R JAN 08/08 08.070 SEP 13/07
08.080 SEP 13/07
03.010 R JAN 08/08 08.090 SEP 13/07
03.020 SEP 13/07 08.100 SEP 13/07
03.030 SEP 13/07 08.110 SEP 13/07
03.040 SEP 13/07 08.120 SEP 13/07
03.050 SEP 13/07
03.060 SEP 13/07 09.010 SEP 13/07
03.070 SEP 13/07 09.020 SEP 13/07
03.080 SEP 13/07 09.025 SEP 13/07
03.090 SEP 13/07 09.030 R JAN 08/08
09.040 SEP 13/07
04.010 SEP 13/07 09.050 SEP 13/07
04.020 SEP 13/07 09.055 SEP 13/07
04.030 SEP 13/07 09.070 SEP 13/07
04.040 SEP 13/07
04.050 SEP 13/07

INTRODUCTION 00.050
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS OCT 27/07
ALL
R (1)
ABBREVIATIONS
ABBREVIATION TERM
AA Airworthiness Authorities
AAP Additional Attendant Panel
AAT Aircraft Allocation Table
ABN Abnormal
ABV Above
AC Alternating Current
A/C, AC Aircraft
ACARS Aircraft Communication Addressing and Reporting
System
ACP Area Call Panel (Cabin)
ACU Airshow Control Unit
ADB Area Distribution Box
ADIRS Air Data and Inertial Reference System
ADS Automatic Dependent Surveillance
ADV Advisory
AEVC Avionic Equipment ventilation Computer
AIDS Aircraft Integrated Data System
AIP Attendant Indication Panel
ALT Altitude
ALTN Alternate
AMM Aircraft Maintenance Manual
AMU Audio Management Unit
ANT Antenna
APU Auxiliary Power Unit
ARINC Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
ARN Aircraft Registration Number
ARPT Airport
A/S Airspeed
ASAP As Soon As Possible
ASP Audio Selector Panel
ATC Air Traffic Control

INTRODUCTION 00.050
ABBREVIATION TERM
ATR Audio Tape Reproducer
ATSU Air Traffic Service Unit
ATT Attitude
AVOD Audio/Video on Demand
AVNCS Avionics
AWY Airway
BARO Barometric
BAT Battery
B/C, BC Business Class
BCL Battery Charge Limiter
BFE Buyer Furnished Equipment
BGM Boarding Music
BITE Built-In Test Equipment
BMC Bleed Monitoring Computer
BRK Brake
BRT Bright
BTL Bottle
CAB Cabin
CAPT Captain
CAM Cabin Assignment Module
CAT Category
CAS Cabin Attendant Seat
CAUT Caution
C/B Circuit Breaker
CBMU Circuit Braker Monitoring Unit
CC Cabin Crew
CCB Cabin Crew Bulletin
CCL CIDS Caution Light
CCOM Cabin Crew Operating Manual
CCR Credit Card Reader
CCS Cabin Communication System
CDR Compact Disc Reproducer
CECAM Centralized Cabin Monitoring

INTRODUCTION 00.050
ABBREVIATION TERM
CDU Control and Display Unit
CFDS Centralized Fault Display System
CG Center of Gravity
CHA Channel
CHG Change
CHK Check
CIDS Cabin intercommunication Data System
CIN Change Idendification Number
CIP Cabin Interface Plug
CKPT Cockpit
C/L Check List
CLB Climb
CLG Ceiling
CLR Clear
CLSD Closed
CM Crewmember
CMC Central Maintenance Computer
CMD Command
CMS Central Maintenance System
CMT Cabin Management Terminal
CNTOR Contactor
COC Customer Originated Changes
COMP Compartment
CPTR Computer
COM Communication
CONT Continuous
CPCU Cabin Pressure Control Unit
CRC Continuous Repetitive Chime
CRG Cargo
CRS Course
CRSD Crew Rest Smoke Detection
CRZ Cruise
CSTR Constraint
CSU Cassette Stowage Unit

INTRODUCTION 00.050
ABBREVIATION TERM
CTL Control
CTL PNL Control Panel
CTLR Controller
CTR Center
CTU Cabin Telecommunication Unit
CVR Cockpit Voice Recorder
CWS Central Warning System
Db Decibel
DCC Digital Cockpit Controller
DEG Degree
DES Descent
DEST Destination
DET Detection
DEU Decoder/Encoder unit
DFDR Digital Flight Data Recorder
DIM Dimming
DIR Direction
DISC Disconnect
DISCH Discharge
DISPL Display
DIST Distance
DSCS Door Slide Control System
DSU Data Server Unit
DU Display Unit
DVD Digital Versatile Disc
E/C Economy Class

ECAM Electronic Centralized Aircraft Monitoring
ECAS Emergency Crew Alerting System
EEPMS Emergency Escape Path Marking System
ECS Environmental Control System
EIS Electronic Instruments System
ELEC Electricity
ELEV Elevator, Elevation

INTRODUCTION 00.050
ABBREVIATION TERM
EMER Emergency
EMER EXIT R Emergency Exit Right (overwing)
ENG Engine
EOD Explosive Ordnance Disposal
EPSU Emergency Power Supply Unit
EVAC Evacuation
F/A First Aid
FAIL Failure
FAP Forward Attendant Panel
FAR Federal Aviation Regulations
F/C, FC First Class
FCOM Flight Crew Operating Manual
FCU Flush Contol Unit
FDAU Flight Data Acquisition Unit
FDB Floor Disconnect Box
FDIU Flight Data Interface Unit
FES Fire Extinguishing System
FF Fast Forward
FL Flight Level
FLT Flight
F/O First Officer
FPEEPMS Floor-Proximity Emergency Escape Path-Marking System
FRP Function Recovery Procedure
FRQ Frequency
FS Full Size (trolley)
FSM Fault System Management
FSN Fleet Serial Number
FT Foot, Feet
FT/MN Feet per Minute
FWC Flight Warning Computer
FWD Forward
FWS Flight Warning System
G5 Galley 5

INTRODUCTION 00.050
ABBREVIATION TERM
GEN Generator
GND Ground
GRVTY Gravity
GS Ground Speed
HI High
HP High Pressure
HPV High Pressure Valve
HZ Hertz
HS Handset
ICAO International Civil Aviation organization
IDENT Identification
IFE In Flight Entertainment
IFEC In Flight Entertainment Center
IGN Ignition
IMM Immediate
IND Indication
INOP Inoperative
INT Interphone
INTENS Intensity
IPRAM Integrated Prerecorded Announcement
IR Inertial Reference
IRS Inertial Reference System
ISPSS In-Seat Power Supply System
JAR Joint Aviation Requirements

JB Junction Box
KG kilogram
KT Knot
LAV Lavatory
LAV34 Lavatory 34
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LD Lower Deck
LDG Landing

INTRODUCTION 00.050
ABBREVIATION TERM
LD LAV Lower Deck Lavatory
LED Light Emitting Diode
L/G Landing Gear
LGCIU Landing Gear Control Interface unit
LIM Limitation
LH Left Hand
LO Low
LOM List Of Modifications
LONG Longitude
LOS List Of Sections
LP Low Pressure
LRBL Least Risk Bomb Location
LRU Line Replaceable Unit
LSU Lavatory Service Unit
LT Light
LVL Level
MAINT Maintenance
MAN Manual
MB Milibar
MCDU Multipurpose Control and Display Unit
MD Main Deck
MECH Mechanic, Mechanical
MED Medium
MEL Minimum Equipment List
MIC Microphone
MIN Minimum
MKR Marker (radio) Beacon
MLW Maximum Design Landing Weight
MMEL Master Minimum Equipment List
MMO Mach Max Operating Speed
MN Minute
MRT Manual Release Tool
MSA Minimum Safe Altitude
MSG Message

INTRODUCTION 00.050
ABBREVIATION TERM
MSU Minimum Safe Altitude
MSU Media Server Unit
MSL Mean Sea Level
MTOW Maximum design TakeOff Weight
MWP Manual Warning Panel
MZFW Maximum design Zero Fuel Weight
N/A Not Applicable

NATS North American Telephone System
NAV Navigation
ND Navigation Display
NLG Nose Landing Gear
NM Nautical Mile
NORM Normal
NS No Smoking
NTPD Normal Temperature Pressure Dry
NTS Non Textile Surface
O2 oxygen
OAT Outside Air Temperature
OBRM On Board Replaceable Module
OCCPD Occupied
OFF/R Off Reset
OFST Offset
OHSC Overhead Stowage Compartment
OL Outboard Left
O/P Output
OPP Opposite
OPS Operations
OPT Optional
OR Outboard Right
OVBD Overboard
OVHD Overhead
OVHT Overheat
OVRD Override

INTRODUCTION 00.050
ABBREVIATION TERM
OVSPD Overspeed
OXY Oxygen
PA Passenger Address
PAT Primary Access Terminal
PAX Passenger
pb, PB Pushbutton
pb sw Pushbutton Switch
PBE Portable Breathing Equipment
PCB Passenger Call Button
PCU Passenger Control Unit
PDF Portable Document Format
PED Portable Electronic Devices
PERF Performance
PES Passenger Entertainment System
PIM Programming and Indication Modul
P/N Part Number
PNL Panel
POS Position
POXIP Passenger Oxygen Indication Panel
PR Pressure
PRAM Prerecorded Announcement and Music
PREV Previous
PROC Procedure
PRV Pressure Regulation Valve
PSI Pound per Square Inch
PSIU Passenger Service Information Unit
PSP Pre-selected Passenger
PSU Passenger Service Unit
PT Point
PTP Programming and Test Panel
PTT Push To Talk
PURS Purser
PWR Power

INTRODUCTION 00.050
ABBREVIATION TERM
QCCU Quantity Calculation and Control Unit
QT Quart (US)
QTY Quantity
RA Radio Altitude
RAD Radio
RADVR Random Access Digital Video Reproducer
RC Repetitive Chime
RCDR Recorder
RCL Recall
RCP Radio Control Panel
RCVR Receiver
REG Regulation
REL Release
REV Reverse
REW Rewind
RH Right Hand
R/L Reading Light
RQRD Required
RS Reset Restore
RSVR Reservoir
RTE Route
RTS Return To Seat
RVC Remote Volume Control
RWY Runway
SAT Static Air Temperature

SB Service Bulletin
SC Single Chime
SCU System Control Unit
SDCU Smoke Detection Control Unit
SEB Seat Electronic Box
SEL Selector, Select
SELCAL Selective Calling System
SEU Seat Electronit Unit
SFE Seller Finished Equipment

INTRODUCTION 00.050
ABBREVIATION TERM
S/N Serial Number
SPD Speed
S/R Seat Row
SSC Single Stroke Chime
STAT Static
STBY Standby
STD Standard
STS Status
SVCE INTPH Service Interphone
SW Switch
SYS System
TBC To Be Confirmed
TBD To Be Determined
T/C,TC Tourist Class
TCAS Traffic-Collision Alert System Avoidance System
TEL Telephone
TEMP Temperature
TK Tank
TMR Timer
T.O. Take Off
TU Tapping Unit
TSM Trouble Shooting Manual
TTL Taxi, Takeoff and Landing
UP Upper
USB Universal Serial Bus
UTC Universal Coordinated Time
VC Ventilation controller
VCC Video Control Center
VCP Video Cassette Player
VCR Video Cassette recorder
VCU Video Control Unit
VENT Ventilation
VHF Very High Frequency

INTRODUCTION 00.050
ABBREVIATION TERM
VIB Vibration
VOL Volume
VLV Valve
VOD Video On Demand
VTR Video Tape Reproducer
WARN Warning
WBM Weight and Balance Manual
WDB Wall Disconnect Box
WDO Window
WSHLD Windshield
WT Weight
WWP Update of the standard operating procedure to be in
accordance with the A380 CCOM.
Water Waste Page
XML Extensible Markup Language

XMTR Transmitter
YC, Y/C Economy Class
Z Zone

INTRODUCTION 00.050
HIGHLIGHTS
(1) Addition of the abbreviation FRP.

INTRODUCTION 00.060
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL UNITS CONVERSION TABLE SEP 13/07
ALL
UNITS CONVERSION TABLE
DESIGNA- METRIC TO US US TO METRIC

TION
1 millimeter (mm) = 0.0394 inch 1 inch (in) = 25.4 millimeter (mm)
(in) 1 foot (ft) = .3048 meter (m)
1 meter (m) = 3.281 feet (ft) 1 yard (yd) = .914 meter (m)
LENGTH 1 meter (m) = 1.094 yard (yd) 1 nautical mile (nm) = 1.852
1 kilometer (km) = .540 nautical kilometer (km)
mile (nm)
1 meter/second (m/s) = 3.281 1 foot/second (ft/s) = .03048
feet/second (ft/s) meter/second (m/s)
SPEED 1 kilometer/hour (km/h) = .540 1 knot (kt) = 1.852 kilometer/hour
knot (kt) (km/h)
1 gram (g) = 0.353 ounce (oz) 1 ounce (oz) = 28.35 grams (g)
1 kilogram (kg) = 2.2046 pounds 1 pound (lb) = .4536 kilogram (kg)
WEIGHT (lb) 1 pound (lb) = 0.0004536 ton (t)
1 ton (t) = 2 204.6 pounds (lb)
1 Newton (N) = .2248 pounds (lb) 1 pound (lb) = 4.448 Newtons (N)
FORCE 1 deca Newton (daN) = 2.248 1 pound (lb) = .448 deca Newton
pounds (lb) (daN)
PRESSURE 1 BAR = 14.505 pounds per 1 pound per square inch (P.S.I.)
square inch (P.S.I.) = .0689 bar
1 millibar (mbar) = 1 hpa = .0145 1 P.S.I. = 68.92 millibars (mbar)
P.S.I. = 68.92 hpa
VOLUME 1 liter (l) = .2642 US Gallons 1 US Gallon = 3.785 liters (l)
1 cubic meter (m3) = 264.2 US 1 US Gallon = 0.03785 cubic
Gallons meter (m3)
1 liter (l) = 1.0568 Qt 1 Qt = 0.94625 liter (l)
1 cubic meter (m3) = 1056.8 Qts 1 Qt = 0.000946 cubic meter (m3)
MOMEN- 1 meter x deca Newton (m. daN) 1 pound x inch (lb. in) = .0113
TUM = 88.50 pound x inch (lb. in) meter x deca Newton (m. DaN)
TEMPERA- t (˚C) = 5/9 {t (˚F) - 32} t (˚F) = t (˚C) x 1.8 + 32
TURE

INTRODUCTION 00.070
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL LIST OF MODIFICATIONS JAN 08/08
Rev. MOD MP Title

SB Validity
SEP 13/07 20017 K0011 WATER/WASTE - DEFINE A320 BASIC
.. .... SYSTEM
ALL
SEP 13/07 20018 P0006 DOORS - PAX DOORS - EMERGENCY EXIT
.. .... AND CARGO COMPARTMENT DOORS -
DEFINE DOORS OF THE BASIC AIRCRAFT -
ALL
SEP 13/07 20019 K0008 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS- DEFINE
.. .... STANDARD CABIN INTERIOR-
ALL
SEP 13/07 20047 P0040 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - FLIGHT
.. .... COMPARTMENT - INSTALL A 4TH
OCCUPANT SEAT -
ALL
SEP 13/07 20151 P0160 OXYGEN - FLIGHT CREW OXYGEN - INSTALL
.. .... A 115 CU/FT STEEL OXYGEN CYLINDER -
ALL
SEP 13/07 20233 K0151 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS-PAX
.. .... COMPARTMENT- INSTALL SLIDE RAFTS
(AIRCRUISER).
ALL
SEP 13/07 20953 P1363 FIRE PROTECTION - COCKPIT - INSTALL A
.. .... MAIP PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER (SFE)
-
ALL
SEP 13/07 22941 P2493 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - COCKPIT
.. .... SEATS - INTRODUCE TYPE A340 SEATS
ALL
SEP 13/07 23008 P2652 POWER PLANT - IAE - INSTALL DERATED
.. .... V2500-A5 ON A320 A/C
ALL

INTRODUCTION 00.070
Rev. MOD MP Title

SB Validity
SEP 13/07 28231 K5564 E/F-FWD/AFT CARGO COMPARTMENT-
.. .... -INTRODUCE A MINIMUM PROVISION FOR
CLS MECHANISED BULK LOADING
SYS(A320)
ALL
SEP 13/07 30339 K6746 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS-ELEC SERVICE
.. .... SUPPLY-DEFINE A PC POWER SYSTEM
PROVIDING 110V/60HZ - VENDOR KID
ALL
SEP 13/07 30470 K6807 EQPT/FURNISHINGS - MISCELLANEOUS
.. .... EMER EQPT - INSTALL SEXTANT ELT WITH
CONTROL PANEL IN COCKPIT AND
PROGRAMMING DONGLE
ALL
SEP 13/07 30865 P6886 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS-COCKPIT-
.. .... INTRODUCE FLASHLIGHTS P/N
MZ112-00-000
ALL
SEP 13/07 32015 K7727 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS -
.. .... MISCELLANEOUS EMERGENCY EQPT -
INSTALL AN HONEYWELL ELT WITH
CONTROL PANEL IN COCKPIT
ALL
SEP 13/07 32088 K7755 EQUIPMENT FURNISHINGS-CURTAINS AND
.. .... PARTITIONS-MODIFIED INTRUSION AND
PENETRATION RESISTANT COCKPIT DOOR
ALL
SEP 13/07 32090 K7790 DOORS-PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FIXED
.. .... INTERIOR DOORS-INSTALL ELECTRICAL
COCKPIT DOOR RELEASE SYSTEM
ALL
SEP 13/07 33062 K8370 COMMUNICATION - INSTALL PES AUDIO
.. .... (MATSUSHITA) INCL. PRAM FOR ANZ01
VERSION
ALL

INTRODUCTION 00.070
Rev. MOD MP Title

SB Validity
.. .... COMPARTMENT - INSTALL A TWO CLASS
CABIN LAYOUT FOR ANZ01 VERSION
ALL
SEP 13/07 33064 K8371 COMMUNICATION - PES (VIDEO) - INSTALL
.. .... PES VIDEO (MATSUSHITA) FOR ANZ01
VERSION
ALL
SEP 13/07 33065 P8115 OXYGEN-FLT CREW PORTABLE DIVICES-
.. .... INST. 2ND PROTECT.BREATHING EQPT.(BFE)
ESSEX P/N MR-10036N IN COCKPIT ON AFT
RH WALL
ALL
SEP 13/07 33069 K8419 COMMUNICATION - CIDS - DEFINE
.. .... INTERCOMMUNICATION DATA SYSTEM
(CIDS) FOR ANZ01 VERSION
ALL
.. .... COMPT.SEATS - INTRODUCE AN IN SEAT
POWER SUPPLY SYST. (ISPSS)110VAC,
VENDOR GENERAL DYNAMICS
ALL
SEP 13/07 34062 K9150 E/F-PAX COMPARTMENT-INSTALL A TWO
.. .... CLASS 114 PAX CABIN LAYOUT
CONFIGURATION FOR DRK01 VERSION
ALL

AIRCRAFT GENERAL 01.000
01.010 AIRCRAFT PRESENTATION

-- GENERALITES 1
01.020 AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS

-- DIMENSIONS 1
01.030 PERFORMANCE
-- PERFORMANCE 1
01.040 PRESSURIZATION
-- UNPRESSURIZED COMPARTMENTS 1
01.050 FLIGHT CONTROLS

-- GENERAL 1
01.060 LANDING GEARS

-- LANDING GEARS 1
01.070 CARGO COMPARTMENTS

-- CARGO COMPARTMENTS 1
-- CARGO DOORS 2
01.080 CABIN DOORS

-- CABIN DOORS 1

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL AIRCRAFT PRESENTATION SEP 13/07
GENERALITES
ALL
-- General : The A320 is a short to medium range, single-aisle, subsonic, civil

transport aircraft.
-- Engines : The aircraft has two high bypass, turbofan engines, mounted
underneath the wings.
-- Cockpit : The cockpit is arranged for a two-member crew. It also has a place
for one observer (plus optionally an additional one).
-- Cabin :
. The passenger seating layout may be varied to suit operating
requirements, up to a certified maximum of 180 seats.
. Any combination of cabin crew seats may be provided, with a minimum of
4 imperative seats.
CAUTION
-- AS WITH THE FLIGHT CREW PROCEDURES, A TRIPPED CIRCUIT
BREAKER MUST NOT BE RE-ENGAGED IN FLIGHT.
-- ON GROUND, THE CABIN CREW MAY RE-ENGAGE THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER, IF THE ACTION IS COORDINATED WITH MAINTENANCE
AND THE CAUSE OF THE TRIPPING IS IDENTIFIED.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS SEP 13/07
DIMENSIONS
ALL
The overall cabin length of the A320 is 27,51 meters (90 feet, 3 inches).

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS SEP 13/07
AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS
34,1m
111ft 10in
12,45m
40ft 10in
7,59m
24ft 11in
11,51m
37ft 9in
37,57m
123ft 3in
3,95m 5,75m
12ft 11in 18ft 10in
38ft 7in
11.76m
5,07m 12,64m
16ft 7in 41ft 6in NOC 01020 02243 0001

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL PERFORMANCE SEP 13/07
PERFORMANCE
ALL
The design weights of the A320 are as follows :

- MAX operating altitude: between 39 000 feet and 41 100 feet depending on
aircraft certification
- MAX design speeds (VMO/MMO): 350 kt ; 0.82 M

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL PRESSURIZATION SEP 13/07
UNPRESSURIZED COMPARTMENTS
ALL
UNPRESSURIZED COMPARTMENTS
NOSE GEAR MAIN GEAR TAIL CONE

BAY BAY
UNPRESSURIZED AREAS
NOC 01040 00205 0001

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL FLIGHT CONTROLS SEP 13/07
GENERAL
ALL
The fly-by-wire control system was designed and certificated to render the new
generation of aircraft safer, more cost effective, and more pleasant to fly, or ride
in, than a conventional aircraft.
BASIC PRINCIPLE
All flight control surfaces are :

-- Electrically controlled,
-- Hydraulically activated.
The stabilizer and rudder can also be controlled mechanically.
The pilots use the sidesticks to fly the aircraft in pitch and roll (and in yaw,
indirectly, through turn coordination).
Computers interpret pilot inputs and move the flight control surfaces, as
necessary, to carry out these orders.
However, regardless of the pilot’s inputs, computers prevent :
-- Excessive maneuvers,
-- Flight outside the safe-flight envelope.
FLIGHT CONTROL BASIC PRINCIPLE
FEEDBACK
A/P
COMPUTER COMPUTER
ORDER
SIDE F/CTL
STICK COMPUTER
FEEDBACK
SURFACE RESPONSE
PILOT’S INPUT
NOC 01050 00206 0001

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL FLIGHT CONTROLS SEP 13/07
FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES
FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES
RUDDER
SLATS
ELEVATOR
AILERON
FLAPS
TRIMMABLE HORIZONTAL
STABILIZER
SPOILERS
NOC 01050 02059 0001

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL LANDING GEARS SEP 13/07
LANDING GEARS
ALL
The landing gear of the A320 is comprised of :

-- Two main landing gear assemblies, mounted in the wings, and retracting
sideways into the fuselage ;
-- A nose landing gear, mounted under the nose, and retracting forwards into the
fuselage.
LANDING GEARS
NOSE GEAR
MAIN LANDING
GEAR
NOC 01060 02244 0001

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CARGO COMPARTMENTS SEP 13/07
CARGO COMPARTMENTS
ALL
Three cargo compartments are installed in the A320’s lower deck.
CARGO COMPARTMENTS
FWD AFT BULK

CARGO CARGO CARGO
COMPARTMENT COMPARTMENT COMPARTMENT
NOC 01070 02245 0001
FORWARD AFT BULK

7500 lb 10000 lb 3300 lb
3402 kg 4536 kg 1497 kg
The forward and aft cargo compartments are designed to carry containers and
pallets.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CARGO COMPARTMENTS SEP 13/07
CARGO DOORS
ALL
There are three cargo compartment doors on the lower right side of the
fuselage, below the cabin floor.
CARGO DOORS
BULK CARGO AFT CARGO FWD CARGO

DOOR DOOR DOOR
NOC 01070 02247 0001
The forward (FWD) and AFT cargo doors open outward and upward, and can
only be opened from the outside. They are hydraulically operated and
mechanically locked.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN DOORS SEP 13/07
CABIN DOORS
ALL
The A320 is equipped with :

-- 4 Type "I" passenger/crew doors (2 on each side).
-- 4 Type "III" emergency exits (2 on each side).
-- 2 cockpit window exits (1 on each side).
-- 4 avionic compartment access doors.
CABIN DOORS
COCKPIT TYPE III

WINDOW EMERGENCY
EXIT DOOR 1 EXIT DOOR 2
AVIONIC TYPE I
COMPARTMENT PASSENGER/CREW
ACCESS DOORS DOORS
NOC 01080 02248 0001
DESIGNATION DIMENSIONS DIMENSIONS HEIGHT FROM

(height x (height x GROUND
width) in width) in FLOOR
meters meters (meters)
LH RH
Door 1 (Type"I") 1,85 x 0,81 1,85 x 0,81 3,400
Door 2 (Type "I") 1,85 x 0,81 1,85 x 0,81 3,400

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN DOORS SEP 13/07
DESIGNATION DIMENSIONS DIMENSIONS HEIGHT FROM

(height x (height x GROUND
width) in width) in FLOOR
meters meters (meters)
LH RH
Emergency exit (Type""III") 1,02 x 0,51 1,02 x 0,51 3,790
. The passenger crew doors located in the FWD, and AFT sections of the cabin
are Type "I" exits. They are normally used to embark/disembark passengers,
and to service the aircraft.
. The cabin emergency exits are oversized, Type "III" exits, located over the
wing. These doors are always in the ARMED position. In emergency
situations, opening the doors from the inside leads to automatic deployment of
the emergency escape slide, due to the fact that the doors are always in
ARMED mode.
. All doors are operated by interior and exterior handles. They are equipped
with an evacuation device, and become emergency exits in the event of an
evacuation.
. The cockpit window exits are sliding windows. They can only be opened from
the inside.
. Four inward opening, manually operated, hinged doors give external access to
the avionics compartments. These doors are in the lower fuselage, around the
nose landing gear bay.

CABIN INTERIOR 02.000
02.010 FLIGHT DECK

-- GENERAL ARRANGEMENT 1
-- SEAT LAYOUT 2
-- COCKPIT SEATS 3
-- COCKPIT SEATS 5
-- COCKPIT SEATS 6
02.030 CABIN LAYOUT

-- MAIN DECK 1
-- LOWER DECK 3
-- PASSENGER SEATS 5
02.040 STOWAGE COMPARTMENTS

-- STOWAGE COMPARTMENTS 1
02.050 CABIN CREW STATIONS

-- LOCATION 1
-- PURSER STATION FWD DOOR LH 4
-- REAR ATTENDANT STATIONS RH 5
-- REAR ATTENDANT STATIONS LH 6
-- CABIN ATTENDANT SEATS 7
02.060 CONTROL PANELS

-- FORWARD ATTENDANT PANEL 1
-- INDICATION OF CABIN STATUS AND SELECTION OF 4
SYSTEM PAGES
-- AUTOMATIC ACTIVATION OF SYSTEM PAGES AND 5
SYSTEM INFO PAGE
-- AFT ATTENDANT PANEL 6
02.070 CABIN LIGHTING SYSTEM

-- GENERAL 1
-- GENERAL ILLUMINATION 2
-- SYSTEM OPERATION FROM THE FAP 3
-- SYSTEM OPERATION FROM THE AAP 4

-- ENTRY AREA LIGHTING CONTROL FORM THE FAP 6

-- ENTRY AREA LIGHTING CONTROL FROM THE AAP 7
-- CABIN ZONE LIGHTING CONTROL FROM THE FAP 8
-- CABIN ZONE LIGHTING CONTROL FROM THE AAP 9
-- LAVATORY LIGHTING 10
-- PASSENGER READING LIGHTS 12
-- CABIN ATTENDANT WORK LIGHTS 14
-- EMERGENCY LIGHTS 17
-- ESCAPE SLIDES EMERGENCY LIGHTS 22
02.080 CIRCUIT BREAKER (PANELS)

-- VU PANEL LOCATION 1
-- C/B DESCRIPTION 2
02.090 AIR CONDITIONING

-- GENERAL 1
-- COCKPIT AIR CONDITIONING 2
-- CABIN AIR CONDITIONING 3
-- PASSENGER INDIVIDUAL AIR OUTLETS 5
-- GALLEY VENTILATION 6
-- LAVATORY VENTILATION 7
-- TEMPERATURE CONTROL FROM COCKPIT 9
-- TEMPERATURE CONTROL FROM CABIN 10
-- FAP FAILURE MESSAGES 11
02.100 WATER AND WASTE

-- SYSTEM FUNCTIONS AND COMPONENTS 1
-- WATER 6
02.110 LAVATORIES
-- LOCATION OF LAVATORIES A,D AND E 1
-- LAVATORY DOOR TYPES 2
-- LAVATORY DOOR OPERATION 5
-- INTERIOR 10

-- LAVATORY SERVICE UNIT (LSU) 12

-- LAVATORY SMOKE DETECTION 14
-- WASTE-BIN FIRE EXTINGUISHER 18
-- NURSING TABLE 20
-- TOILET AND WASHROOM FUNCTION 22
-- LAVATORY 31
-- RESTART AN INOPERATIVE TOILET 33
02.120 DOORS AND EXITS

-- DOORS AND EXITS IN THE CABIN 1
-- LOCATION OF THE DOORS AND EXITS 2
-- CABIN DOOR DESCRIPTION 3
-- CABIN DOOR OPERATION 9
-- EMERGENCY EXIT DESCRIPTION 12
-- EMERGENCY EXIT OPERATION 15
-- SLIDE ARMING SYSTEM 16
-- DOORS AND SLIDES COCKPIT CONTROL SYSTEM 17
-- DOORS AND SLIDES CONTROL FROM THE CABIN 22
02.140 GALLEYS
-- GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT GALLEYS 1
-- GALLEY LOCATION AND EQUIPMENT 2
-- LATCHES 4
-- ADDITIONAL WORKTABLE 7
-- TROLLEYS 11
-- ELECTRICAL PANEL 18
-- GALLEY COOLING 20
-- WATER TAP 23
-- WATER SHUT-OFF VALVE 24
-- WASTEWATER DRAINING 26
-- BOILER 28
-- COFFEE MAKER 31
-- OVEN CONTROL MODULE 35

-- OVEN 39
-- STEAM OVEN 43
-- HOT CUP 51

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL FLIGHT DECK SEP 13/07
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
ALL
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
NOC 02010 00060 0001
The cockpit is designed for maximum comfort and convenience, providing various
types of equipment and stowage possibilities.
In addition, the cockpit is thermally and acoustically insulated.

ALL
SEAT LAYOUT
SEAT LAYOUT
SIDESTICK SIDESTICK
BRIEFCASE BRIEFCASE
SIDE SIDE
CONSOLE CONSOLE
(LH) CAPT F/O (RH)
RIGHT
COAT
REAR
STOWAGE
PANEL
FOURTH OCCUPANT COCKPIT DOOR THIRD OCCUPANT

FOLDING SEAT FOLDING SEAT
(if installed)
NOC 02010 01696 0001
The cockpit is designed to accommodate two crewmembers, plus one or two

other occupants (depending on the aircraft configuration).
The two pilot seats are column-mounted.
The third and fourth occupant (if installed) seats are folding seats.
These seats are suitable for use during takeoff and landing.

COCKPIT SEATS
ALL

CAPTAIN SEAT
HEAD REST
ASSIST
ARMREST HARNESS
LIFE VEST
SEAT BACK COMPARTMENT
LIFE VEST
SEAT BACK ASSIST
ARMREST
CHECK A
HARNESS CONTROL WINDOW
HANDLE A
LUMBAR REST CROTCH STRAP
CONTROL KNOBS
LIFE VEST UNLOCK
SEAT BOTTOM COMPARTMENT

MECHANICAL CONTROL LOCK
SWITCHES
BASE
ELECTRICAL CONTROL SHOULDER
SWITCHES HARNESS
LOCKING
LEVER
NOTE: THE F/O’S SEAT IS IDENTICAL TO THE CAPTAIN’S SEAT, EXCEPT THAT THE CONTROLS
ARE ON THE LEFT−HAND SIDE.
NOC 02010 01688 0001

ALL
COCKPIT SEATS
THIRD OCCUPANT SEAT
HEADREST
SHOULDER HARNESS
BACKREST HEADREST UNLOCK
ARMREST
(if installed)
HARNESS UNLOCK
BOTTOM
SEAT UNLOCK
SEAT BELT
ATTACHMENTS
LIFE VEST STOWAGE
NOC 02010 01689 0001

ALL
COCKPIT SEATS
FOURTH OCCUPANT SEAT
HEADREST
FIXED BACKREST
LOCKING PLATE
HARNESS LOCKING
SLIDE
SUPPORT LINKS
SEAT BELT
SEAT CUSHION
LIFE VEST STOWAGE

(if installed)
NOC 02010 01692 0001

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN LAYOUT SEP 13/07
MAIN DECK
ALL
The A/C cabin layout is divided into a MAIN DECK and a LOWER DECK layout.
CABIN LAYOUT - MAIN DECK
The aircraft is equipped with a total of 114 passenger seats:

-- 20 business class(B/C) seats
-- 94 economy class(Y/C) seats
Furthermore the main deck is equipped with:

-- 2 galleys (G)
-- 3 lavatories (L)
-- 2 stowages C
-- 2 doghouses D

CABIN LAYOUT - MAIN DECK
GALLEYS
COAT STOWAGES
LAVATOIES EMER EXIT R
DOGHOUSES
BUSINESS CLASS
ECONOMY CLASS
ATTENDANT SEATS
DOOR FWD R
EMER EXIT L
DOOR AFT R
DOOR FWD L
DOOR AFT L
D
NOC 02030 03255 0001

LOWER DECK
ALL
The lower deck is equipped with:

-- 3 cargo compartments (FWD, AFT and BULK)

CABIN LAYOUT - LOWER DECK
FWD CARGO
COMPARTMENT
FWD CARGO
DOOR
BULK CARGO
COMPARTMENT
AFT CARGO
DOOR
AFT CARGO
COMPARTMENT
NOC 02030 02370 0001

PASSENGER SEATS
ALL
The following types of passenger seats are installed in the cabin:

-- Business class (B/C) seats
-- Economy class seats
ECONOMY CLASS SEAT
The equipment of the economy class seat consists of:
ECONOMY CLASS SEAT (EXAMPLE)
BACKREST
HEADREST
ARMREST
MEAL TABLE
SEAT CONTROL
BUTTON
SEAT PAN
SEAT BELT
BAGGAGE BAR LIFE VEST

STOWAGE
NOC 02030 01670 0001
Note: Ensure that all seats are in upright position and all meal tables as well as
cup holders are stowed during Taxi, Take-Off and Landing. This is
necessary for a trouble-free evacuation in case of an emergency.
BUSINESS CLASS SEAT
The equipment of the business class seat consists of:

BUSINESS CLASS SEAT (EXAMPLE)
HEADREST
CENTER
ARMREST
BACKREST
COCKTAIL TABLE
MEAL TABLE ASH TRAY
LATERAL SEAT CONTROL

ARMREST BUTTON
FOLDING SEAT PAN

FOOTREST
BAGGAGE BAR
STEP SEAT BELT LIFE VEST

STOWAGE
NOC 02030 02375 0001
SEAT BELT
The seat belt is part of the seat.
OPERATING THE SEAT BELT

FASTEN/LOOSEN THE SEAT BELT
FASTEN SEAT BELT
(FIG.1)
LOOSEN SEAT BELT
(FIG.2)
NOC 02030 01671 0001
How to fasten the seat belt
Refer to Fig.1
WARNING
Ensure that the seat belt is not twisted before or during the fasten
procedure. Otherwise it does not protect from injury.

1. Take the belt fastener in one hand and the connector of the opposite belt
in the other hand.
2. Move the connector into the belt fastener until it snaps into place.
3. Pull the free strap end until the seat belt is tightened.
4. Check whether the seat belt is correctly locked and tightened.
WARNING
Ensure that the seat belt is correctly locked and tightened. Otherwise it
does not protect from injury.
How to loosen the seat belt
Refer to Fig.2
1. Lift the cap of the belt fastener at the rear end. The belt fastener opens.
2. Take the belt fastener in one hand and the connector in the other hand.
3. Lay down the seat belt and make sure that its position on the seat causes
no danger of tripping.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL STOWAGE COMPARTMENTS SEP 13/07
STOWAGE COMPARTMENTS
ALL
Normal purpose of all stowage compartments is to stow emergency equipment,

passenger clothing, items for passenger comfort and miscellaneous equipment.
WARNING
Do not use stowage compartments for any unnormal purposes!
Otherwise injury to persons is possible.
All stowage compartment doors have a locking mechanism. The locking

mechanism prevents the door from opening caused by flight manoeuvres or
turbulence.
WARNING
Make sure that the doors of all stowage compartments are closed and
correctly latched during
-- taxi
-- take-off
-- turbulence
-- landing
Otherwise injury caused by moving DOORS and/or Falling items is possible.
Depending on the compartment function, the load limit is specific. It is shown on

a placard at the inner side of each stowage compartment.
WARNING
Do not overload the stowage compartments!
Overload may cause a failure of the locking mechanism (danger of uncontrolled
door opening) or damage at the stowage compartment Attachment. To avoid
passenger injury, distribute some items to other stowage compartments.
OVERHEAD STOWAGE COMPARTMENTS
Overhead stowage compartments are installed above the seat rows in the cabin.
They are attached together to make the overhead stowage compartment rows. At
their bottom side, overhead stowage compartments contain oxygen containers
and PASSENGER SERVICE UNITS (PSU) consisting of:

-- Reading lights
-- Passenger lighted signs
-- Loudspeaker
-- Passenger call system
OVERHEAD STOWAGE COMPARTMENT COMPONENTS
EXAMPLE
OVERHEAD STOWAGE
COMPARTMENT
NOC 02040 01013 0001
Each overhead stowage compartment has one or two doors with a latch on the
bottom edge of the door. The overhead stowage compartment doors open
upwards and give access to the compartment from the aisle. Special damper
hinges control the opening and closing speed of the door. When the door is
unlatched, the damper hinges hold the door in the fully open position.
Each overhead stowage compartment has a grip rail installed along its length
below the compartment door.
Adapted to the cabin configuration, different sizes of the overhead stowage
compartments are installed along the cabin sidewalls throughout the entire cabin.

OVERHEAD STOWAGE COMPARTMENTS - DOOR OPERATION
How to open an overhead stowage compartment
1. Lift the latch until the overhead stowage compartment door is unlatched.
2. Keep away the hand from the latch. The overhead stowage compartment
door opens automatically.
How to close an overhead stowage compartment
1. Swing in the overhead stowage compartment door.

2. Push the overhead stowage compartment door against the housing until the
latch snaps into place.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN CREW STATIONS SEP 13/07
LOCATION
ALL
Cabin attendant stations are located at the FWD and AFT cabin door on the A/C.
The cabin attendant seats are part of the attendant stations. During the take-off
and landing procedure the cabin crew members must use the attendant seats.
The A/C has a total of 3 cabin attendant stations with together 5 cabin attendant
seats installed.
These stations are equipped with:

-- single (1) or double (2) cabin attendant seats (CAS)
-- Forward Attendant Panel (FAP)
-- Attendant Indication Panels (AIP)
-- Aft Attendant Panels (AAP)
-- Handsets (HS)

LOCATION OF CABIN ATTENDANT STATIONS AND SEATS
REAR ATTENDANT STATION

(DOOR AFT R)
PURSER STATION
(DOOR FWD L)
NOC 02050 03259 0001
DIRECT VIEW FROM CABIN ATTENDANT STATIONS
A minimum of the attendant stations must be occupied to comply with the type
certification requirements.

DIRECT VIEW FROM CABIN ATTENDANT STATIONS

PURSER STATION FWD DOOR LH
ALL
The station at the FWD door LH is equipped as follows:
Station FAP AIP HS CAS

FWD LH 1 1 1 2
PURSER STATION FWD DOOR LH
FWD DOOR LH
PURSER STATION
AIP
FAP
HANDSET
NOC 02050 01695 0001

ALL
REAR ATTENDANT STATIONS RH
The seats of the attendant stations are mounted on the wall of lavatory E.
The rear attendant stations RH are equipped as follows:
Stations AAP AIP HS CAS

REAR RH 1 2 2 3
REAR ATTENDANT STATIONS RH
DOOR AFT R
REAR ATTENDANT STATIONS
HANDSET AIP
LE AIP
AAP
HANDSET
NOC 02050 03278 0001

ALL
REAR ATTENDANT STATIONS LH
Not installed.

CABIN ATTENDANT SEATS
ALL
There are three different types of cabin attendant seats (CAS) installed in the
cabin:
-- floor-mounted (swivelling) single CAS
-- wall-mounted double CAS
CABIN ATTENDANT SEAT / SWIVELLING SINGLE SEAT
The equipment of the swivelling single seat consist of:

SWIVELLING SINGLE SEAT
ATTENDANT HANDSET
HEADREST
SHOULDER STRAPS
BACKREST
SEAT PAN
STOWAGE BOX
SEAT BELT
NOC 02050 01732 0001
For the location and the quantity of the swivelling single CAS refer to "Location
of Cabin Attendant Stations and Seats".
CABIN ATTENDANT SEAT / DOUBLE SEAT
The equipment of the double seat consist of:

DOUBLE SEAT
HEADREST
SHOULDER STRAP
BACKREST
SEAT BELT
SEAT PAN
SEAT FRAME
STOWAGE BOX
NOC 02050 01734 0001
For the location and the quantity of the double CAS refer to "Location of Cabin
Attendant Stations and Seats".
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
The restraint system consist of the seat belt and two shoulder straps integrated
in the cabin attendant seat.
Fasten seat-belt procedure (Fig.1):

1. Close the lap belt (1).

2. Pull the unlocked free strap end (2) and tigthen the belt.
3. Pull down the shoulder straps (3).
4. Insert the shoulder straps (3) into the lap belt fastener.
Loosen seat-belt procedure (Fig.2):
Open the lap belt fastener through turning the cap of the fastener to the left or
right side.
FASTEN AND LOOSEN OF THE SEAT BELT
FASTEN SEAT BELT LOOSEN SEAT BELT
(FIG 1) (FIG 2)
NOC 02050 01735 0001
CAUTION
The lap belt (fig.1) must be stowed correctly in the cavity located at the rear
of the backrest (fig.2), in order to avoid a Damage of the belt after retraction
of the seat pan.

STOWAGE OF THE LAP BELT
(FIG 1) (FIG 2)
NOC 02050 01736 0001

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CONTROL PANELS JAN 08/08
ALL
FORWARD ATTENDANT PANEL
The main control panel in the cabin is the FAP.

It is located at the attendant station FWD L and is divided into three different
control modules.
FORWARD ATTENDANT PANEL (FAP)
NOC 02060 02521 0001
1 Cabin Lighting Module (to control the cabin and entrance lighting)

2 Audio Module (to control the prerecorded announcement and boarding music)
3 Water and Miscellaneous Module (indicates the water/waste quantity and the
status of different normal/emergency systems).
The PTP is installed next to the FAP. It is used to make inputs to the CIDS
(e.g. to perform cabin programming).
The CABIN PROGRAMMING is part of the PROGRAMMING mode and it is
code protected. To get access to the subfunctions CAM LAYOUT SELECTION
and PA LEVEL ADJUSTMENT different access codes are needed.
The other subfunction of the PROGRAMMING mode is the CABIN ZONING,
which is not code protected.
PROGRAMMING AND TEST PANEL (PTP)
EXAMPLE
DSPL 1 2 3
ON
4 5 6
TEST BAT BAT 7 8 9

OK
EMER
LIGHT SYS SYS CLR 0
OK
CAM−MODULE
NOC 02060 02522 0001
In addition to the input functions, the PTP indicates the current status of the
CIDS, which is monitored in the SYSTEM STATUS mode. For support of the
cabin crew, the status of the LAVATORY SMOKE DETECTION and the SLIDE
BOTTLE PRESSURE are also monitored.
After the system power up, the SYSTEM STATUS mode is running automatically
and the PTP usually displays the following messages:

-- CIDS OK
-- LAV SMOKE DATA OK
-- SLIDES PRESS OK
-- DRAINMASTS OK.
An exception to these messages appears only when one of the other modes
(MAINTENANCE or PROGRAMMING mode) is selected manually.
In case of a failure the respective messages are:
-- <CIDS FAIL or <CIDS DEGRADATION
-- <LAV SMOKE SYS FAIL
-- <SLIDES PRESS FAIL
-- <DRAINMASTS FAIL.
In order to get detailed information on these failures, push the related membrane
switch on the PTP.

ALL
R (1)
INDICATION OF CABIN STATUS AND SELECTION OF SYSTEM PAGES
Not available.

ALL
R (2)
AUTOMATIC ACTIVATION OF SYSTEM PAGES AND SYSTEM INFO PAGE
Not available.

ALL
AFT ATTENDANT PANEL
The Aft Attendant Panel (AAP) is located beside Door AFT L. In general, the
cabin systems are controlled from the FAP. Some of these cabin systems can be
additionally controlled from the AAP.
CONTROLS ON AAP AFT L
AFT ATTENDANT PANEL
NOC 02060 02520 0001
The following cabin systems can be controlled from this AAP:

-- The illumination of the AFT entrance area (ENTRY BRT, ENTRY DIM 1,
ENTRY DIM 2)
-- The illumination of the passenger zone (CABIN BRT, CABIN DIM 1, CABIN
DIM 2)
-- The reset of the evacuation signalling chime (RESET)
-- The indication of the evacuation signalling (EVAC)

HIGHLIGHTS
(1) New item ’Indication of Cabin Status and Selection of System Pages’ for
’ALL’
(2) New item ’Automatic Activation of System Pages and System Info PAge’
for ’ALL’

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN LIGHTING SYSTEM OCT 27/07
ALL
GENERAL
The cabin lights illuminate the cabin and entrance areas, the attendant stations,
the lavatories and the galleys. All these lights are controlled by the cabin lighting
system, which is a part of the CABIN INTERCOMMUNICATION DATA SYSTEM
(CIDS).
The cabin lighting system consists of following sub-systems:
-- General illumination
-- Lavatory lighting
-- Passenger reading lights
-- Cabin attendant work lights
-- Emergency lighting
-- Passenger lighted signs (for location and operation: Refer to General System
Information)

GENERAL ILLUMINATION
ALL
R (1)
The general illumination system has different light strips, which are located in the
ceiling panels above the aisles and windows. Additional lights are installed in the
stowage compartments.
Every light strip consists of a row of fluorescent tubes, which are integrated in
ballast units.
The system illuminates the following areas:
-- Entry areas
-- Cabin zones.
The cabin crewmembers control these lights from the FORWARD ATTENDANT
PANEL (FAP) and from the ADDITIONAL ATTENDANT PANEL (AAP).
After power-up of the CIDS all cabin lights illuminate with full intensity, except the
lavatory lights.
Note: The lights near the cockpit door in the entrance area FWD dim
automatically when the cockpit door is opened. This function should avoid
glaring in the cockpit and is available, when at least one engine is running.
Note: In case of LOW CABIN-PRESSURE all cabin lights are switched on with
full brightness, independent from any selected light volume setting.
R (2)
R (3)

SYSTEM OPERATION FROM THE FAP
ALL
R (4)
CABIN LIGHTING MODULE ON THE FAP
NOC 02070 02519 0001
The FAP provides the following light controls:

-- MAIN ON / MAIN OFF (controls for all cabin lights)
-- ENTRY FWD: BRT / DIM 1 / DIM 2 (forward entry lighting controls for the
steps: 100%/50%/10% visual brightness)
-- ENTRY AFT: BRT / DIM 1 / DIM 2 (aft entry area lighting controls for the
steps: 100%/50%/10% visual brightness)
-- Cabin BRT / DIM 1 / DIM 2 (cabin zone lighting controls for the steps:
100%/50%/10% visual brightness)
-- WDO / CLG (separate controls for the lights at the cabin window seats or the
ceiling lights)
-- POWER LAV / ATTN / READ (separate controls for the lavatory, attendant
work and passenger reading lights).

SYSTEM OPERATION FROM THE AAP
ALL
R (5)
The cabin lighting can be controlled from the AAP or from the FAP.
The attendant station AFT L has an AAP. The AAP controls the illumination of
its entry area and of the cabin zone.
ADDITIONAL ATTENDANT PANEL (EXAMPLE)
Pushbutton Description
CABIN BRT Pushing the CABIN BRT illuminates the corresponding
cabin zone with 100% brightness.
CABIN DIM 1 Pushing the DIM 1 turns the light in the assigned cabin
zone to approximately 50% visual brightness.
CABIN DIM 2 Pushing the DIM 2 turns the light in the assigned cabin
zone to approximately 10% visual brightness.
ENTRY BRT Pushing an ENTRY BRT turns the light in the assigned
entry area to 100% brightness.
ENTRY DIM 1 Pushing the DIM 1 turns the light in the assigned entry
area to approximately 50% visual brightness.
ENTRY DIM 2 Pushing the DIM 2 turns the light in the assigned entry
area to approximately 10% visual brightness.
The pushbuttons are arranged in two columns for cabin zone (CABIN) and entry
area (ENTRY) illumination.

The LED on the pushbutton illuminates, when the pushbutton is pushed and
activated.

ALL
R (6)
ENTRY AREA LIGHTING CONTROL FORM THE FAP
To set the intensity of the entry area lights, press one of the following
pushbuttons:
-- ENTRY BRT to set the entry area lights to 100% visual brightness
-- ENTRY DIM 1 to dim the entry area lights to 50% visual brightness
-- ENTRY DIM 2 to dim the entry area lights to 10% visual brightness
To switch OFF the entry area lights, press the active (illuminated) pushbutton a
second time.
To switch ON the entry area lights again, press one of the pushbuttons ENTRY
BRT, ENTRY DIM 1 or ENTRY DIM 2. The entry area lights illuminate with the
corresponding brightness.

ENTRY AREA LIGHTING CONTROL FROM THE AAP
ALL
R (7)
To set the intensity of the entry area lights, press one of the following
pushbuttons:
-- ENTRY BRT to set the entry area lights to 100% brightness
-- ENTRY DIM 1 to dim the entry area lights to 50% brightness
-- ENTRY DIM 2 to dim the entry area lights to 10% brightness
To switch off the entry area lights, press the active (illuminated) pushbutton a
second time.
To switch on the entry area lights again, press one of the pushbuttons ENTRY
BRT, ENTRY DIM 1 or ENTRY DIM 2. The entry area lights illuminate with the
corresponding brightness.

CABIN ZONE LIGHTING CONTROL FROM THE FAP
ALL
R (8)
To set the intensity of the cabin zone lights, push one of the following
pushbuttons:
-- CABIN BRT to set the cabin zone lights to 100% brightness.
-- CABIN DIM 1 to dim the cabin zone lights to 50% visual brightness.
To switch OFF the cabin zone lights, push the active (illuminated) pushbutton a
second time.
To switch ON the cabin zone lights again, push one of the pushbuttons BRT, DIM
1 or DIM 2. The cabin zone lights illuminate with the corresponding brightness.
To switch ON or OFF all lights of the cabin use the MAIN ON / MAIN OFF
pushbuttons.

CABIN ZONE LIGHTING CONTROL FROM THE AAP
ALL
R (9)
In addition to the control from the FAP it is possible to control the cabin zone
lighting from the AAP.
The following pushbuttons are available to control the lights intensity of the
related cabin zone(s):
-- CABIN BRT to set the cabin zone lights to 100% visual brightness.
The LED on the "active" pushbutton illuminates.
To switch OFF the cabin zone lights, push the active (illuminated) pushbutton a
second time.
To switch ON the cabin zone lights again, push one of the pushbuttons CABIN,
DIM 1 or DIM 2. The cabin zone lights illuminate with the corresponding
brightness.
Note: Only the FAP provides the possibility to switch OFF all cabin zone lights.

LAVATORY LIGHTING
ALL
Each lavatory is equipped with different lighting units, controlled by the lavatory
lighting system.
STANDARD TYPE LAVATORY
STANDARD TYPE LAVATORY
EXAMPLE
BALLAST UNITS WITH

FLUORESCENT TUBES
MIRROR/AUXILIARY LIGHT
NOC 02070 01863 0001
The lavatory lighting system has following elements:

-- Two ballast units with fluorescent tubes (located above the lavatory door)
-- One combined halogen mirror / auxiliary light (located beside the mirror)
SYSTEM OPERATION
The lavatory lighting system is controlled by the CIDS.

A micro-switch in the lavatory door-frame monitores, if the door is UNLOCKED or
LOCKED. Depending to these positions, the lavatory lighting system works in
different ways.
When the lavatory door is UNLOCKED:
-- The fluorescent tubes illuminate with reduced intensity,
-- The auxiliary light is on,
-- The mirror light is off.
When the lavatory door is LOCKED:
-- The fluorescent tubes illuminate with full intensity,
-- The auxiliary light stays on,
-- The mirror light comes on.

PASSENGER READING LIGHTS
ALL
The passenger reading lights are high intensity LED lights which give additional
illumination to the passengers. Each passenger can control his own reading light.
PASSENGER READING LIGHTS (PSU)
The passenger reading lights are installed in the PASSENGER SERVICE UNITS
(PSUs), which are located above the seat rows. Each reading light has an
individual pushbutton.
PASSENGER READING LIGHTS (PSU)
OVERHEAD STOWAGE
COMPARTMENT EXAMPLE
READING LIGHTS
PUSHBUTTONS
NOC 02070 01864 0001
SYSTEM OPERATION BY PASSENGERS
Operate the passenger reading lights on the PSU as follows:

1. Push the pushbutton to switch ON the reading light.
2. Push the pushbutton again to switch OFF the reading light.

TURN ON OR OFF ALL READING LIGHTS AT ONCE
The cabin crew can turn ON or OFF all passenger reading lights at the same
time via the FAP.
READ PUSHBUTTON ON THE FAP
EXAMPLE INDICATION ON FAP, ACP, AIP AND LAVATORY WALL
FAP
DOOR FWD L
NOC 02070 06812 0001
To turn ON or OFF the reading lights in the cabin, push the READ:
1. Push the pushbutton to switch ON the reading lights.
2. Push the pushbutton again to switch OFF the reading lights.

CABIN ATTENDANT WORK LIGHTS
ALL
R (10)
The cabin attendant work lights are high intensity LED lights. They give
additional illumination to the working areas.
The cabin attendant work lights are installed near the cabin attendant seats and
galleys, and in the entrance areas (e.g.). They are arranged as single-type lights
and combined panels.

CABIN ATTENDANT WORK LIGHTS
AFT DOOR RH
A
A
FWD DOOR RH B C
C
D AFT DOOR LH
FWD DOOR LH
C
PUSHBUTTON WORK LIGHT

SWITCH
B
D
PUSHBUTTON WORK LIGHTS

SWITCHES
NOC 02070 01865 0001

SYSTEM OPERATION
The cabin attendant work lights can be controlled manually. Operate them as
follows:
-- Press the related pushbutton to switch ON the selected cabin attendant work
light. The illumination of the symbol on the pushbutton comes on.
-- Press the related pushbutton again to switch OFF the selected cabin attendant
work light. The illumination of the symbol on the pushbutton goes off.

EMERGENCY LIGHTS
ALL
There are two types of emergency lights in the cabin:

-- Emergency Lights at the doors (A)
-- Cabin Emergency Lights (B).

EMERGENCY LIGHTS - EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
EMERGENCY LIGHT
A
A
CABIN EXAMPLE
EMERGENCY LIGHT
B
B
NOC 02070 01869 0001

A Emergency Lights (Doors)
B Cabin Emergency Lights

The emergency lights at the doors (A) are installed above the doors or beside
the emergency exit doors. They show the position of the exit.
The cabin emergency signs (B) are installed in the aisle in an overhead position.
They show the direction to the next exit.

R (11)

R (12)

ESCAPE SLIDES EMERGENCY LIGHTS
ALL
Each escape slide has a row of small emergency lights. They indicate the way
out of the aircraft and the borders of the escape slide.
The escape slide emergency lights are activated only when the door or the
emergency exit door is opened in position DOOR ARMED and the escape slide
is released.
Refer to: Escape Slide for information about the location of the escape slide
emergency lights.

HIGHLIGHTS
(1) Text improvements and structural improvements. No technical impact.
(2) Deleted item ’System Operation from AAP’
(3) Deleted item ’System Operation from FAP’
(4) New item ’System Operation from the FAP’ for ’ALL’
(5) New item ’System Operation from the AAP’ for ’ALL’
(6) New item ’Entry Area Lighting Control form the FAP’ for ’ALL’
(7) New item ’Entry Area Lighting Control from the AAP’ for ’ALL’
(8) New item ’Cabin Zone Lighting Control from the FAP’ for ’ALL’
(9) New item ’Cabin Zone Lighting Control from the AAP’ for ’ALL’
(10) Minor text improvements: C/A replace by cabin attendant etc.
(11) Deleted item ’Emergency Escape Path Marking System (EEPMS)’
(12) Deleted item ’Overwing Emergency Exit Emergency Lights’

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CIRCUIT BREAKER (PANELS) SEP 13/07
ALL
VU PANEL LOCATION
On the circuit breaker (C/B) panels 2000VU and 2001VU the circuit breakers for
the different electrical systems are located. These VU panels have different
locations, 2000VU in the FWD and 2001VU in the AFT cabin area.
VU PANEL LOCATION
2001VU
AFT DOOR RH
2000VU
FWD DOOR RH
AFT DOOR LH
FWD DOOR LH
NOC 02080 01856 0001
They are installed to protect the electrical circuits of their related components.
A cover protects each circuit breaker panel to prevent unauthorized access.

C/B DESCRIPTION
ALL
The VU panels have rows of circuit breakers. The function of each circuit
breaker is shown below the related circuit breaker. The location of the circuit
breaker is defined through a matrix (Letter x Number):
-- a letter (A,B,C,...) for the circuit breaker row,
-- a number (1,2,3,...) for the circuit breaker column.
Example:
If a circuit breaker is installed in row H on position 3 (column 8) the related
location is called H3.
In this case the circuit breaker H3 protects the electrical circuit which is
responsible for the CABIN LIGHT POWER at the WINDOW in the AFT of the
cabin area.

CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL 2000VU
NOC 02080 02145 0001

CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL 2001VU
NOC 02080 03290 0001
CAUTION
It is not allowed to reset a tripped C/B. If you reset it, you can cause an
overload to another system.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING JAN 08/08
ALL
GENERAL
The engines or the APU supply the A/C with fresh air. This air is controlled for
pressure, temperature and humidity to ensure the comfort of the passengers. A
certain part of the used air is mixed to the fresh air by mixer units. The rest of
the used air is discharged overboard.

ALL
COCKPIT AIR CONDITIONING
The air for the cockpit is delivered from the underfloor mixer unit into the cockpit
distribution lines, which supply the different cockpit air outlets.
The used air is extracted through grills at the bottom of the cockpit.
COCKPIT AIR CONDITIONING OPERATION
FRESH AIR
AIR OUTLETS
USED AIR
NOC 02090 01034 0001

ALL
CABIN AIR CONDITIONING
The air for the passenger cabin is delivered from the underfloor mixer unit into
the cabin distribution lines, which supply the different cabin air outlets.
The cabin air is distributed through cabin outlets (above and below the overhead
stowage compartments) and passenger individual air outlets.
To control the cabin temperature individually, the cabin is divided into two areas
(AREA 1 (FWD) and AREA 2 (AFT)).
The used air is extracted through panels near the cabin floor.

CABIN AIR CONDITIONING OPERATION
FRESH AIR
USED AIR
INDIVIDUAL
AIR OUTLETS
EXAMPLE
NOC 02090 01035 0001

PASSENGER INDIVIDUAL AIR OUTLETS
ALL
The PASSENGER SERVICE UNITs (PSUs) below the overhead stowage

compartments have passenger individual air outlets. Each air outlet is individually
adjustable for flow direction and flow rate (0% to 100%).
PASSENGER INDIVIDUAL AIR OUTLETS
OVERHEAD STOWAGE
COMPARTMENT EXAMPLE
INDIVIDUAL
AIR OUTLETS
100% 0%
NOC 02090 01036 0001

GALLEY VENTILATION
ALL
Some galleys have air outlets in their upper part. The air outlets are connected
to the cabin air distribution system.
The air outlets are adjustable for the flow direction, and they are closed by
turning them into the closed-position.
Through connections inside of the galley, the used air is extracted and
completely discharged overboard.
GALLEY VENTILATION
EXAMPLE
A
A
AIR OUTLET
(NOZZLE)
NOC 02090 01669 0001

LAVATORY VENTILATION
ALL
Cabin air enters the lavatory through the grills in the door and through the air
outlet on the LAVATORY SERVICE UNIT (LSU).
The air outlet is adjustable for flow direction and flow rate (0% to 100%).
Through the grill in the lavatory ceiling, the used air is extracted and completely
discharged overboard.
Behind the grill in the lavatory ceiling, a SMOKE DETECTOR is installed to
monitor the extracted air. If there is smoke in the extracted air, a visual and
aural alert comes on.

LAVATORY VENTILATION
EXAMPLE
CEILING GRILL (AIR OUTLET)
A A
AIR OUTLET
100%
DOOR GRILL (AIR INLET) 0%
NOC 02090 01037 0001

TEMPERATURE CONTROL FROM COCKPIT
ALL
TEMPERATURE CONTROL FROM COCKPIT
A 1 2 3 A
NOC 02090 01043 0001
1 Temperature Selector COCKPIT
2 Temperature Selector FWD CABIN
3 Temperature Selector AFT CABIN
COCKPIT TEMPERATURE CONTROL
The cockpit temperature is controlled by the temperature selector COCKPIT (1)

on the cockpit overhead panel (30VU).
The temperature can be controlled between 18˚C (64˚F) (COLD) and 30˚C
(86˚F) (HOT). The 12 o’clock position is 24˚C (75˚F).
CABIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Basically the cabin areas temperatures are controlled by the temperature selectors
FWD CABIN (2) and AFT CABIN (3) on the cockpit overhead panel (30VU).
The temperature can be controlled between 18˚C (64˚F) (COLD) and 30˚C
(86˚F) (HOT). The 12 o’clock position is 24˚C (75˚F).

TEMPERATURE CONTROL FROM CABIN
ALL
R (1)
Not applicable.

ALL
R (2)
FAP FAILURE MESSAGES
Not applicable.

HIGHLIGHTS
(1) New item ’Temperature Control from Cabin’ for ’ALL’
(2) New item ’FAP Failure Messages’ for ’ALL’

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL WATER AND WASTE SEP 13/07
ALL
SYSTEM FUNCTIONS AND COMPONENTS
The function of the water system is to supply water from the water tank:
-- to the galleys.
-- to the lavatories.
The function of the waste system is:
-- to discard the waste from the toilets in the lavatories to the waste tank.
-- overboard to discard the wastewater from the lavatory wash-basins and galley
sinks through the heated drain masts.
The FAP, located at the FWD purser station is used to control and to indicate
the water/waste.

SYSTEM COMPONENTS
EXAMPLE OF WATER
SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT
GALLEY
LAVATORY
WASTE TANK
BULK CARGO
COMPARTMENT
WATER TANK
POTABLE WATER
SERVICE PANEL
WASTE
SERVICE PANEL
WASTE AFT CARGO
WASTEWATER COMPARTMENT
WATER AFT DRAIN MAST NOC 02100 02113 0001
WATER TANK
1. Location
The water tank is installed in the pressurized underfloor area RH behind the
forward cargo compartment.
2. Capacity
The water tank has a usable capacity of 200 liters (52 US Gallons).

WATER SUPPLY
The pressurization of the water system is achieved with compressed air. It makes
sure that the water flows from the water tank to the galleys and lavatories.
MANUAL WATER SHUT-OFF VALVE
Manual water shut-off valves are installed in each wet galley and lavatory. The
water supply stops, when the manual water shut-off valves are closed.
WASTEWATER DRAINAGE
1. General
The wastewater from the galley and lavatory wash basins is discarded
overboard through the FWD and AFT heated drain masts.
2. Description
-- Lavatories
-- Drain-Valve Assembly (Drain Assy)
The drain assy is installed at the bottom of the wash basin and is
connected to its overflow.
-- Drain Valve
The drain valve is installed below the drain assy in the wastewater line
of the lavatory. It lets the wastewater drain to the drain masts and
prevents the loss of air pressure through the drain mast.
-- Galleys
-- Drain Valve
The drain valve is installed below the sink in the wastewater line of the
galleys. It enables the wastewater drain to the drain masts and prevents
the loss of air pressure through the drain mast.

WASTEWATER DRAINAGE
A WASTEWATER
FWD OUTLET
A
AFT
EXAMPLE LAVATORY EXAMPLE GALLEY

SINK
WASH OVERFLOW
BASIN
DRAIN FROM AFT GALLEYS

ASSEMBLY AND AFT LAVATORYS
DRAIN
VALVE
FWD
DRAIN MAST AFT DRAIN MAST
WASTEWATER LINE NOC 02100 01002 0001
WASTE TANK
1. Location
One waste tank is on board the aircraft located RH behind the bulk cargo
compartment, near the partition wall.
2. Capacity
The waste tank has a usable capacity of 200 liters (52 US Gallons).
WATER AND WASTE QUANTITY INDICATION

INDICATION
MEMBRANE SWITCH
WATER AND WASTE
WATER QTY IND
ON
% 0 25 50 75 100
WASTE QTY
LIGHT SMOKE EVAC

EMER RESET
EVAC CMD
LAV
FAP
DOOR FWD L
NOC 02100 02114 0001
On the FAP (Forward Attendant Panel) the water and waste quantity can be
shown by pressing the membrane switch ’IND ON’. An LED indicator shows the
percentage of volume.
Note: The water and waste quantity is shown when the door of the potable-water
service panel is open, for example on ground during servicing of the water
and waste system.

ALL
WATER
Unexpected waterflow in a lavatory
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Operate the manual shut-off valve.

-- In the related lavatory, open the access door and turn control
handle of the manual shut-off valve to the closed position.
Please lock the lavatory for the rest of the flight.
Make an entry in the logbook to record the deactivation. END END

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL LAVATORIES OCT 27/07
ALL
R (1)
LOCATION OF LAVATORIES A,D AND E
3 lavatories are installed in the cabin area at position A,D and E.

Each lavatory has a toilet function and a washroom function.
Following connections are provided:
-- A cold and hot water supply.
-- A waste and wastewater disposal.
-- An air outlet.
-- An electrical power supply (razor socket).
LOCATION (A, D AND E)
DOOR AFT R
DOOR FWD R
LAV E DOOR AFT L

LAV D
DOOR FWD L
LAV A NOC 02110 01007 0001

LAVATORY DOOR TYPES
ALL
Two different door types can be installed:

-- Single blade door (opens outwards).
-- Bi-folding door (opens inwards).
All lavatory doors are fitted with:
-- A lock including a VACANT (green) or OCCUPIED (red) indicator flag.
-- A coat hook.
-- An ashtray.

SINGLE BLADE DOOR

OUTSIDE INSIDE
COVERPLATE
"LAVATORY" COAT HOOK
FLAG
FLAG
LATCH
LATCH
FLAG
"VACANT" HANDLE
OR
"OCCUPIED"
HANDLE
ASHTRAY
EXAMPLE
NOC 02110 01005 0001

BI-FOLDING DOOR
OUTSIDE DOOR INSIDE

LOCKER
COVERPLATE COAT
"LAVATORY" HOOK
FLAG FLAG
AND AND
LATCH LATCH
ASHTRAY
FLAG
"VACANT"
OR HANDLE
"OCCUPIED"
EXAMPLE
DOOR
LOCKER
NOC 02110 01006 0001

LAVATORY DOOR OPERATION
ALL
DOOR LOCKING MECHANISM
NORMAL OPERATION
In each door is a latch to operate the locking door mechanism.

-- OUTSIDE LAVATORY:
If you read OCCUPIED the lavatory door is locked.
If you read VACANT the lavatory door can be opened.
-- INSIDE LAVATORY:
To lock the door, move the latch toward the left respective to the lock symbol.
To unlock the door, move the latch toward the right respective to the arrow
symbol.
LOCKING MECHANISM - NORMAL OPERATION
EXAMPLE A B
OUTSIDE DOOR INSIDE DOOR
FLAG DISPLAY LATCH POSITION
B A
NOC 02110 01008 0001
EMERGENCY UNLOCKING
It is possible to unlock a locked door from the passenger compartment side. For
this do the following procedure:
-- Lift the coverplate LAVATORY above the OCCUPIED flag.
-- Then push the unlocking PIN from the right to the left until the flag shows
VACANT.

LOCKING MECHANISM - EMERGENCY UNLOCKING

EXAMPLE
A A
PIN
NOC 02110 01009 0001
DOOR LATCH EMERGENCY OPERATION (SINGLE BLADE DOOR)
The catch assembly in the door frame of a single blade door is fitted with a
folding catch, that is operated by a lock pin. In an emergency, turn the lock pin
to the left or the right with a coin, for example. The latch unlocks. Now pull the
knob to open the lavatory door.

DOOR LATCH LAVATORY
LAVATORY A
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
NORMAL
OPENING
B
DOOR
LATCH
DOOR KNOB CATCH
ASSEMBLY
DOOR
B
EXAMPLE
HOUSING HOUSING
LOCK PIN LOCK PIN

(LOCKED (UNLOCKED
POSITION) POSITION)
CLOSED RELEASED
FOLDING CATCH FOLDING CATCH
(EMERGENCY (EMERGENCY
RELEASE) RELEASE)
NOC 02110 02697 0001
EMERGENCY OPERATION (REMOVAL) OF THE BI-FOLDING DOOR
Operation

The bi-folding door has three door lockers and one damper.
-- Step 1. Turn the safety pin about 90 degrees to unlock the door lockers.
-- Step 2. Unlock the three door locker. Move the safety pin up to release.
-- Step 3. Turn the bi-folding door about 90 degrees towards yourself. Then lift
the bi-folding door up to release the damper.
UNLOCKING THE BI-FOLDING DOOR LATCH
Step 2
Step 1
UNLOCKED
LOCKED
NOC 02110 00330 0001

DOOR DAMPER OPERATION
Step 3
NOC 02110 00331 0001

INTERIOR
ALL
COMPONENTS
Each toilet has these components:

-- A toilet unit with seat and cover.
-- A wash basin unit with drain valve assembly, water faucet and liquid soap
dispenser etc.
-- A wash basin cabinet with access door.
-- A waste container with waste chute and closing flap.
-- A nursing table: Refer to Nursing Table.
-- Light units.
-- Paper roll holders.
-- A service cabinet with a box for towels, a Lavatory Service Unit (LSU): Refer
to Lavatory Service Unit, loudspeaker etc.
-- A mirror.
-- Ashtrays.
-- A coat hook.
-- A handgrip.
-- Smoke detector: Refer to Lavatory Smoke Detection.
-- Waste-bin fire extinguisher: Refer to Waste-Bin Fire Extinguisher.

LAVATORY INTERIOR
EXAMPLE OF LAVATORY
LIGHT UNITS
MIRROR
WASH BASIN UNIT
SERVICE CABINET
NURSING TABLE
HAND GRIP
WATER FAUCET
TOILET UNIT
ACCESS DOOR
WASH BASIN CABINET
NOC 02110 01010 0001

ALL
LAVATORY SERVICE UNIT (LSU)
All lavatories are equipped with an LSU. The LSU is installed below the mirror or
at the side of the mirror, next to the door:
-- A RETURN TO SEAT sign.
-- A CABIN ATTENDANT CALL button.
-- A razor socket.
EXAMPLE
LAVATORY
A
EXAMPLE
RAZOR SOCKET CABIN ATTENDANT

CALL BUTTON
A
RETURN TO SEAT SIGN

NOC 02110 01011 0001
The RETURN TO SEAT sign lights up when the FASTEN SEAT BELTS signs
are switched on: Refer to General System Information.
With the CABIN ATTENDANT CALL button the cabin crew is called. To reset the
call the CABIN ATTENDANT CALL button must be pressed again: Refer to
General System Information.

The razor socket is supplied with 115 V and 60 Hz.

For the lavatory lighting operation: Refer to Lavatory Lighting.

LAVATORY SMOKE DETECTION
ALL
GENERAL
Each lavatory is equipped with a smoke detector:

Refer to Waste-Bin Fire Extinguisher and Refer to LAVATORY SMOKE/FIRE
PROCEDURE.
LOCATION
One smoke detector is installed in each lavatory extraction duct.

LAVATORY SMOKE DETECTION
EXAMPLE
LAVATORY A
A SMOKE DETECTOR
AIR EXTRACTION
DUCT
AIRFLOW
AIRFLOW
NOC 02110 01012 0001
DESCRIPTION
The smoke detection system is installed to detect smoke and/or fire in the
lavatories.
The system has:

-- One smoke detector for each lavatory.

-- Connections to the CIDS (Cabin Intercommunication Data System) with the
CIDS-SDF (CIDS Smoke Detection Function) and FWC (Flight Warning
Computer).
If smoke is detected, the system gives a visual and aural warning to the flight
crew and the cabin crew.
The cockpit warnings are:
-- A repetitive chime.
-- A red master warning light.
-- A smoke warning indication on the ECAM upper display unit.
The cabin warnings are:
-- The cabin loudspeakers give a triple chime, repeated every 30 seconds.
-- A red flashing indicator light and a steady text (SMOKE LAV X) on all
Attendant Indication Panels (AIP).
-- An amber flashing light on the related Area Call Panel (ACP).
-- An amber flashing call light on the related lavatory wall.
-- A red indication SMOKE LAV on the Forward Attendant Panel (FAP) or the
related Aft Attendant Panel (AAP).
OPERATION
If smoke enters into the measuring chamber of the detector, a warning signal is
transmitted to the CIDS and FWC.
The CIDS activates the related indications on the FAP, AIP and the ACP.
The FWC activates the related indications in the cockpit.
By pressing the LAV SMOKE/RESET push-button on the FAP or on the related
AAP, here the aural and visual warning as well as the warning indications on the
ACP and AIP are turned off. The indication on the FAP disappears, as soon as
the density of smoke drops below the threshold of the respective smoke detector.

INDICATION
WATER AND WASTE

WATER QTY IND
ON
% 0 25 50 75 100
WASTE QTY
LIGHT SMOKE EVAC

EMER RESET
EVAC CMD
LAV
FAP
DOOR FWD L
FLASHING
AMBER
LIGHT
AIP
ACP
FLASHING
RED
A LIGHT
FLASHING
AMBER
A LIGHT
LAVATORY WALL
NOC 02110 02120 0001

WASTE-BIN FIRE EXTINGUISHER
ALL
1. General
Each lavatory is equipped with a waste-bin fire extinguisher:
Refer to Lavatory Smoke Detection and Refer to LAVATORY SMOKE/FIRE
PROCEDURE.
2. Location
A fire extinguisher is installed above the waste bin in each lavatory.
Note: The indicator on the gauge must show into the green area to ensure full
operation in case of a fire.
3. Description
Each fire extinguisher has these main components:
-- A spherical container with a mounting bracket.
-- A discharge tube with a fusible plug.
-- A pressure gauge indicating extinguisher condition.
-- An identification label.
4. Operation
If there is a fire in the waste bin, the fire extinguisher operates automatically.
When the temperature in the waste bin increases to approximately 79 ˚C
(174.2 ˚F.), the fusible plug installed in the end of the discharge tube melts
and lets the agent flow into the waste bin.

EXAMPLE
LAVATORY
A
EXTINGUISHER
DISCHARGE TUBE
FUSIBLE
PLUG
PRESSURE GAUGE
NOC 02110 01014 0001

NURSING TABLE
ALL
NURSING TABLE
Some lavatories have a nursing table: Refer to Location.
NURSING TABLE
EXAMPLE
STOP
LATCH
NURSING TABLE
NOC 02110 01017 0001

1. DESCRIPTION
The nursing table is attached to the lavatory wallpanel above the toilet unit.
2. OPERATION
Make sure that the nursing table is clean, if necessary clean it.

Taking the nursing table into Service

a) Unlock the latch:
Lift the latch until the nursing table is unlatched from the stop.
b) Using the latch, pull the nursing table from its position.
c) Hold and fold down the nursing table to its support, attached to the sidewall.
Taking the nursing table out of Service

Make sure that the nursing table is clean, if necessary clean it.
a) Fold up the nursing table to the stop.
b) Push the nursing table against the stop until the latch engages with a snap.

TOILET AND WASHROOM FUNCTION
ALL
WATER FAUCET
GENERAL
The water faucet is installed in each lavatory.

The water faucet has these main components:
-- An outlet.
-- An operating part to activate the waterflow.
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

WATER FAUCET
EXAMPLE
LAVATORY A
OPERATING MECHANICAL
A PART WATER−FAUCET
B
C
PUSH AND
RELEASE
TEMPERATURE
WARM/COLD
OUTLET
C
INFRA−RED (IR)
WATER−FAUCET B
HOT (RED) MECHANICAL
BUTTON COLD (BLUE)
BUTTON WATER−FAUCET
PUSH AND RELEASE

OPERATING
PART
TEMPERATURE
WARM/COLD
IR−SENSOR OUTLET
OUTLET
DETECTION AREA NOC 02110 01025 0001
These types of water faucet can be installed:

Mechanical Water-Faucet
Push and release the knob of the water faucet. The water flow starts and
stops automatically.
On knobs with red and blue indication the temperature of the water can be
selected by turning the knob:
-- Turning the knob to the blue direction, the water becomes colder.
-- Turning the knob to the red direction, the water becomes warmer.
Infra-Red Water-Faucet
Holding the hands within the detection area the water flow starts and stops
automatically.
Operating the red or the blue button for the first time, warm water flows out of
the outlet.
To get hot water, operate the red button again.
To get cold water, operate the blue button again.
WATER HEATER
1. General
The water heater is installed in each lavatory below the wash basin to the hot
water connection of the water faucet.
2. Description
The water heater has these main components:
-- Water inlet and water outlet connection.
-- A water tank.
-- An ON/OFF switch.
-- An indicator light.
-- A pressure relief valve.
3. Operation
A thermoswitch regulates the water temperature between 54 ˚C (129.2 ˚F)
and 50 ˚C (122 ˚F), so that the outlet temperature at the water heater is
between 40 ˚C (104 ˚F) and 50 ˚C (122 ˚F). If the thermoswitch has a
malfunction, an overheat switch cuts the electrical supply between 72 ˚C
(161.6 ˚F) and 82 ˚C (179.6 ˚F).

WATER HEATER
EXAMPLE
LAVATORY A
WATER HEATER
ON/OFF
SWITCH INDICATOR
LIGHT
WATER
OUTLET
PRESSURE
RELIEF
VALVE
A
WATER INLET
NOC 02110 01026 0001
1. Location
In each lavatory with a right-angle arrangement of toilet and wash basin one
manual water shut-off valve is installed.
In each lavatory with an opposite arrangement of toilet and wash basin two
manual water shut-off valves are installed.
2. Description
Through the manual water shut-off valve you can stop the water supply in the
lavatory. A placard shows to the related access door.
3. Operation
Open the related access door and operate the valve to the closed position.

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
WITH CONTROL HANDLE WITHOUT CONTROL HANDLE
A B
ACCESS DOOR
B
A
LEVER
C
PLACARD
ACCESS PANEL
CONTROL HANDLE
PLACARD
LEVER ACCESS DOOR
CLOSED POSITION
OPEN POSITION NOC 02110 01027 0001

DRAIN-VALVE ASSEMBLY
DRAIN-VALVE ASSEMBLY
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE OF
LAVATORY A PERMANENTLY OPEN
PLUG
VALVE BODY
WASTEWATER
OUTLET
DRAIN−VALVE
ASSEMBLY
EXAMPLE OF
A SELECTABLE
ON WASH BASIN
VALVE BODY
CONTROL LEVER
WASTEWATER
OUTLET
OPERATING
MECHANISM
NOC 02110 01028 0001

GENERAL
A drain-valve assembly is installed in the wash basin of each lavatory.
The drain-valve assembly (referred to as the drain assy) lets the wastewater
drain from the wash basin. Either a selectable drain assy or permanently open
drain assy is installed.
Selectable Drain Assy
With the control lever, the user can open or close the drain assy.
Open to let the water flow out of the wash basin.
Close to keep the water in the wash basin.
Permanently Open Drain Assy
To keep water in the wash basin, use a plug to close inlet of the drain assy.
DRAIN VALVE

DRAIN VALVE
PULL
EXAMPLE
LAVATORY
A
RING
DRAIN
VALVE
NOC 02110 01029 0001
1. Location
A drain valve is installed in the wastewater line under each wash basin.
2. Description
The drain valve lets the wastewater drain to the drain masts and stops the
leakage of air pressure through the drain mast.
3. Operation
The drain valve opens only when water flows through the drain masts.
By pulling the ring located at the top of the valve, it allows to override the
wastewater drainage from the wash basin.
TOILET OPERATION
Close the cover of the toilet and push the flush button.

TOILET OPERATION
EXAMPLE
LAVATORY
FLUSH BUTTON
COVER
NOC 02110 01030 0001

LAVATORY
ALL
In the lavatory is an unexpected water flow.
YES NO
1. Is there an unexpected water flow in the lavatory? 2. END
2. Turn the water off in the lavatory.

-- Open the access door to the manual water shut-off valve. For
information on the location: Refer to Toilet and Washroom
Function.
-- Turn the control handle or lever of the manual water shut-off
valve into the closed position.
Has the water flow stopped? 3. 2.
3. To keep passengers from using the lavatory, lock the lavatory until
the end of the flight.
-- Lift-up the spring loaded cover.
-- Slide the knob to the side until the indicator shows occupied. 4. 4.
4. Log entry:
-- Make an entry in the log about the problem and about the
deactivation. END END
Excessive noise level due to permanent suction because of an open toilet

gate valve.
YES NO
1. Is there excessive noise in the lavatory? 2. END
2. To reduce the noise:

-- Throw a blanket or cushion into the toilet bowl. Is the noise
reduced? 3. 2.
the end of the flight:

4. Log entry:
The lavatory has to be locked due to other reasons (decision of cabin crew
members).
YES NO
the end of the flight:
2. Log entry:

ALL
RESTART AN INOPERATIVE TOILET
The vacuum system does not work properly and a related message comes up
on the FAP. Restart this inoperative toilet through a reset of the Vacuum System
Controller (VSC).
On the FAP following CIDS failure message is displayed: Vacuum System

Controller
YES NO
1. Is there an inoperative toilet ? 2. END
2. On the aft cabin circuit breaker (C/B) panel (2001 VU):

-- Pull the VACUUM SYS C/B, located at position A6.
-- Wait for 30 seconds.
-- Push the VACUUM SYS C/B again. 3. 3.
3. Does the vacuum system work ? END 4.
4. The concerned toilet is inoperative:

-- Close the lavatory for passenger use (lock the lavatory door).
-- Make an entry into the logbook. END END

HIGHLIGHTS
(1) Color of lavatory inside graphic changed from "gray" to "green".

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DOORS AND EXITS JAN 08/08
DOORS AND EXITS IN THE CABIN
ALL
The aircraft has:

-- 4 cabin doors
-- 4 emergency exits (hatches).
In case of an emergency evacuation all doors and exits are used as emergency
exits.
CABIN DOORS
All cabin doors are provided with emergency evacuation equipment (slides /
slide-rafts) stowed in a container hinged to the lower part of the cabin doors.
The cabin doors have an initial opening movement to the inside, then they open
outwards.
EMERGENCY EXITS (HATCHES)
For emergency exits the emergency evacuation equipment (slides / slide-rafts) is

stowed below the cabin floor.
The emergency exits open inward. They are located above the wing box
(over-wing exits).

LOCATION OF THE DOORS AND EXITS
ALL
LOCATION OF DOORS/EXITS

ALL
CABIN DOOR DESCRIPTION
THE CABIN DOOR

THE CABIN DOOR
7
CABIN DOOR R
(DOOR L MIRRORED) A 4
B
4
3
6
ARMED
2
8
A B
1
UNLOCKED
LOCKED
9
NOC 02120 02868 0001

1 Escape Slide Container
2 Arming System
3 Gust Lock
4 Assist Handles
5 Door Locking Indicator
6 Observation Window with:
-- SLIDE ARMED Indicator Light

-- CABIN PRESSURE Warning Light
7 Buzzer Signal Horn
Note: It is installed in the cabin doors to avoid inadvertent door opening

when the escape slide is armed.
8 Door Control Handle
9 Armed Indicator
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF THE CABIN DOOR

CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF THE CABIN DOOR
5
A 10
C 9
4 A
3
3
2
E 6
B
1 B 7
F
8
ARMED 11 12
D C
HANDLE SHOWN OUTSIDE
E 2 IN CLOSED POSITION
13
D
14
15
NOC 02120 01020 0001

1 Arming System
The slide ARMING SYSTEM consists of a SLIDE ARMING LEVER (8) and a
SAFETY PIN (9).
2 Gust Lock
The GUST LOCK secures the door in its fully open position.
3 Assist Handles
The cabin crew can use the ASSIST HANDLEs to hold onto when opening
or closing the door from the inside of the cabin.
4 Locking Indicators
The DOOR LOCKING indicator indicates the door status.

-- When the door is not in its closed/locked position the information
UNLOCKED is displayed on a red background in the DOOR LOCKING
indicator.
-- When the door is closed and locked the information LOCKED is displayed
on a green background in the DOOR LOCKING indicator.
5 Door Assist Handle
The cabin crew can use the DOOR ASSIST HANDLE when opening or
closing the door.
6 Observation Window
The OBSERVATION WINDOW has two indicator lights visible from the inside
of the cabin as well as from the outside):
-- Red CABIN PRESSURE WARNING indicator light (10)
-- White SLIDE ARMED indicator light (11).
7 Door Control Handle
The cabin crew can use the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE to open and close
the door from the inside of the cabin.
8 Armed Indicator
On the ARMED indicator the cabin crew can read the position of the SLIDE
ARMING LEVER: If the door is in the ARMED mode the red arrow points on
the indicator.

9 Slide Arming Lever
The cabin crew can use the SLIDE ARMING LEVER to arm or disarm the
door slide/slide-raft.
10 Safety Pin with Warning Flag
A SAFETY PIN secures the SLIDE ARMING LEVER in the disarmed position.
11 Cabin Pressure Warning Indicator Light
The red CABIN PRESSURE WARNING indicator light flashes when all
engines are shut down, the related door is disarmed and the cabin
differential pressure is above 2.5 mbar (0.0362 psi).
12 Slide Armed Indicator Light
The white SLIDE ARMED indicator light goes ON steadily when the door
slide is in ARMED mode and somebody moves the DOOR CONTROL
HANDLE (7) up.
13 Exterior Door Control Handle
The exterior DOOR CONTROL HANDLE consists of a FLAP (14) and a

HANDLE (15).
14 Flap
The cabin crew can use the FLAP to release the HANDLE from its closed
position.
15 Handle
The cabin crew can use the HANDLE to open and close the door from the
outside.

CABIN DOOR OPERATION
ALL
CABIN DOOR NORMAL OPENING FROM THE INSIDE
1. Make sure that the SLIDE ARMING LEVER (8) is in the DISARMED position
and the SAFETY PIN (9) is installed.
2. Make sure that the red CABIN PRESSURE WARNING indicator light in the
observation window is not ON and flashing.
Do not open the door if the red CABIN PRESSURE WARNING indicator
light is ON and flashes:
-- Do not force the handle to open the door.
-- Report the indication to the cockpit crew.
-- Make sure that the SLIDE ARMING LEVER (8) is in the DISARMED
position and the SAFETY PIN (9) is installed.
WARNING
If A cabin crewmember opens the door while the red CABIN PRESSURE
WARNING indicator light is flashing, there is a risk that the cabin door
will open violently because the cabin is not fully depressurized.
The red CABIN PRESSURE WARNING indicator light flashes when all
engines are shut down, the related door is disarmed and the cabin
differential pressure is above 2.5 mbar (0.0362 psi).
CAUTION
If the SLIDE ARMED indicator light is ON, the SLIDE ARMING LEVER
(8) is in the armed position and the slide will be activated automatically
by opening the door.
3. Grasp one of the ASSIST HANDLEs (3).

4. Lift the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE (7) fully up.
5. Push the door outwards then move it forward and sideward by using the
DOOR ASSIST HANDLE (5) until the door locks in its fully open position.

CABIN DOOR NORMAL CLOSING FROM THE INSIDE
1. Grasp one of the DOOR ASSIST HANDLEs (3).

2. Press the GUST LOCK (2) and simultaneously pull the support arm towards
yourself.
3. Move the door towards yourself by using the DOOR ASSIST HANDLE (5).
4. When the door is in front of its frame, pull the door inwards and lower the
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE (7).
5. Check whether the door is locked correctly, the DOOR LOCKING
INDICATORS (4) must indicate LOCKED.
CABIN DOOR NORMAL OPENING FROM THE OUTSIDE
Note: Labels next to the EXTERIOR DOOR CONTROL HANDLE (12) indicate
how to operate the door from outside.
1. Look through the OBSERVATION WINDOW (6) and make sure that the red
CABIN PRESSURE WARNING indicator light (10) does not flash.
2. Push at the FLAP (13) and grasp the HANDLE (14), lift the handle fully up to
the horizontal green line.
3. Pull the door outwards and sideways until it locks in its fully open position.
CABIN DOOR NORMAL CLOSING FROM THE OUTSIDE
1. Push the GUST LOCK (2) to unlock the door.

2. Move the door towards its frame.
3. When the door is in front of its frame push it into it and lower the EXTERIOR
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE (12).
The door is locked when the handle is flush with the fuselage.

CABIN DOOR EMERGENCY OPENING
WARNING
When the door is in the ARMED mode, the red CABIN PRESSURE WARNING
indicator light (10) does not illuminate to indicate the cabin differential pressure.
Indications of cabin differential pressure may be:
-- Resistance in the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE (7) when it is lifted to the
OPEN position, using normal force, and/or
-- A hissing noise in the immediate door area.
If the circumstances permit, fully lower the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE(7) to
the CLOSED position. Notify the flight crew immediately.
1. Check the outside conditions via the OBSERVATION WINDOW (8). Make sure
that the slide deployment area is clear of:
-- Fire
-- Smoke
-- Obstacles.
2. Check whether the SLIDE ARMING SYSTEM (1) is in SLIDE ARMED mode.
3. Grasp the DOOR ASSIST HANDLE (3) and hold on to it.
4. Lift the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE (7) rapidly fully up and release it.
Note: The door opens automatically and locks in its fully open position. Should
the pneumatic assistance of the door fail, push the door open manually.

ALL
EMERGENCY EXIT DESCRIPTION
DOUBLE OVERWING EMERGENCY EXIT (HATCH)
THE DOUBLE OVERWING EMERGENCY EXIT (HATCH)
1 2
3
NOC 02120 04487 0001
1 Handle Cover
2 Control Handle
3 Slide Manual Inflation Handle

CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF THE DOUBLE OVERWING EMERGENCY

EXIT (HATCH)
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF THE EMERGENCY EXIT (HATCH)
7 8 10
6 9
NOC 02120 04488 0001
1 Exit Marker
In an emergency the EXIT markers located on both sides of the emergency

exit hatch are illuminated.
2 Handle Recess
The HANDLE RECESS and the COVER FLAP RECESS (6) are used to
remove the hatch.
3 Window
A normal window with a window shade is integrated into the emergency exit
hatch.

4 Handle Cover
The HANDLE COVER covers the HATCH HANDLE (5).
5 Hatch Handle optionally under a Transparent Handle Flap
The illuminated HATCH HANDLE is used to open and close the hatch from
the inside. As an option the HATCH HANDLE is covered with a transparent
handle flap.
6 Cover Flap Recess
The COVER FLAP RECESS and the HANDLE RECESS (2) are used to
remove the hatch.
7 Opening Instructions
You can find the OPENING INSTRUCTIONS for the emergency exit hatch on
the back of the seats next to the emergency exits and on the hatch itself.
8 Exit Sign
The EXIT sign is illuminated to indicate the location of the emergency exit.
9 Slide Armed Indicator
A SLIDE ARMED indicator indicates the slide status. The indicator is located
next to the hatch.
The indicator shows ARMED on a green background when the slide is
installed correctly.
10 Slide Manual Inflation Handle
When the hatch is removed, you can see the SLIDE MANUAL INFLATION
HANDLE.

EMERGENCY EXIT OPERATION
ALL
Note: The emergency exits are overwing exits. They are always in armed
configuration.
EMERGENCY EXIT OPENING FROM THE INSIDE OF THE CABIN
1. Check the outside conditions and make sure that removing the hatch is safe.
2. Remove the HANDLE COVER (4) by opening the COVER FLAP RECESS (6).
The SLIDE ARMED indicator (9) illuminates.
3. Hold on to the HANDLE RECESS (2).
4. Lift the TRANSPARENT HANDLE FLAP (5), if installed (option).
5. Pull down the HATCH HANDLE (5).
CAUTION
Hold on to the hatch or it will fall into the cabin.
6. Lift the HATCH into the cabin, away from the frame, by using the HANDLE
RECESS (2) and the COVER FLAP RECESS (6).
7. Throw out the HATCH through the opening. The slide inflates automatically.
8. If the escape slide has not inflated automatically, pull the SLIDE MANUAL
INFLATION HANDLE (10).

SLIDE ARMING SYSTEM
ALL
The cabin crew can arm or disarm the slides in the cabin doors via the SLIDE
ARMING LEVER.
The SLIDE ARMING LEVER is connected to the girt bar, and the girt bar is
attached to the escape slide.
When the slide is armed the SLIDE ARMING LEVER connects the escape slide
via the girt bar to the cabin floor.
When the slide is disarmed the SLIDE ARMING LEVER connects the escape
slide via the girt bar to the cabin door.
Note: The emergency exit hatches are always in armed mode.
CABIN DOOR AND EMERGENCY EXIT IN DISARMED POSITION
When the SLIDE ARMING LEVER (8) is in the DISARMED position a SAFETY
PIN (9) with a red flag must be installed in order to:
-- Indicate that the slide is DISARMED
-- Prevent inadvertent movement of the SLIDE ARMING LEVER.
CABIN DOOR ARMING PROCEDURE
In order to arm the slide:

1. The SAFETY PIN (9) has to be removed and stowed in the hole provided on
the door support arm for that purpose.
2. The SLIDE ARMING LEVER (8) must be moved to the armed position.
The door is now ready for flight.
Note: When the SLIDE ARMING LEVER is in the armed position, a flap, which
avoids an unintentional reinstallation of the safety pin, moves over the
disarmed safety pin hole. If the SLIDE ARMING LEVER is in the armed
position and the door is opened from the outside, the lever will move
automatically and mechanically to the disarmed position.

ALL
DOORS AND SLIDES COCKPIT CONTROL SYSTEM


DOORS AND SLIDES COCKPIT CONTROL SYSTEM
2 2
MASTER MASTER
CAUTION CAUTION
A 1 ENGINE / WARNING DISPLAY
B 3 SYSTEM DISPLAY
A
B
C
ENTRANCE STAIRS
ARE OPTIONAL
C 4 ECAM CONTROL PANEL
NOC 02120 01053 0001

1 ENGINE/WARNING Display
Warnings are automatically displayed on the ENGINE/WARNING display and

on the SYSTEM display.
Unlocked doors are shown in amber text on the ENGINE/WARNING
DISPLAY. At the same time the DOOR PAGE is displayed on the SYSTEM
display.
2 MASTER CAUTION Light
If the engines are running and a door is not locked, the MASTER CAUTION
lights flash and a single chime sounds in the cockpit.
3 SYSTEM Display
Warnings are automatically displayed on the SYSTEM display and on the

ENGINE/WARNING display.
Door locked & armed : The door symbol is green and
there is no message.
Door open : The door symbol and the

message OPEN are amber.
No data : The door symbol shows X in

amber, the message NO
DATA is white.
Slide armed : The message SLIDE adjacent

to the door is white.
Slide disarmed/door open : The message SLIDE is

replaced by a dotted line
amber.
Slide disarmed/door closed : The door symbol is green and

there is no message.

4 ECAM CONTROL PANEL
The door status can be checked at any time on the SYSTEM display by
pushing the DOOR key on the ECAM CONTROL PANEL.

DOORS AND SLIDES CONTROL FROM THE CABIN
ALL
R (1)
Not applicable.

HIGHLIGHTS
(1) New item ’Doors and Slides Control from the Cabin’ for ’ALL’

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GALLEYS JAN 08/08
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT GALLEYS
ALL
The galleys are installed in the cabin area. They are used to:
-- Keep and/or prepare food and hot and cold drinks.
-- Hold full and/or half-size trolleys (carts) and containers.
WARNING
Danger of injury!
Make sure that the galley equipment is always correctly stowed and latched.
WARNING
Health Hazard!
Make sure that the galley equipment is clean and serviceable.
Wash your hands before you handle food.
The galleys have stowage compartments for coats, equipment etc.

The galleys can be a wet or dry units and, where applicable, a pelmet is installed:
-- Wet Galley:
The wet galley is used to store and prepare food and drinks. There are
system connections/provisions for:
-- Electrical power supply
-- Water
-- Wastewater
-- Dry Galley:
The dry galley has no system provisions and is only used to store food and
drinks.
-- Pelmet:
The pelmet is a structure on top of the galleys which is also a ceiling between
galleys or stowages. The pelmet generally has these services installed:
-- Galley lighting
-- Speakers
-- Area call panel
-- Oxygen panel

GALLEY LOCATION AND EQUIPMENT
ALL
These galleys are on board of the aircraft:
LOCATION
DOOR AFT R
DOOR FWD R
DOOR AFT L
WET GALLEY UNIT DOOR FWD L NOC 02140 03370 0001
Equipment
2 wet galleys are on board of the aircraft.
The galleys have this main equipment distributed to the related galley:

-- Air Chiller
-- Steam Oven
-- Water Boiler
-- Hot Cup
-- Coffee Maker
-- Water Taps
-- Water Shut-Off Valves
-- Sink
-- Drain Valve
-- Trolley compartments for halfsize and fullsize trolleys
-- Container (standard units)

LATCHES
ALL
Description
Latches secure items like trolleys, drawers, containers and doors in the galleys.
WARNING
Danger of injury to persons and aircraft interior damage caused by unsecured
items!
Make sure that the returned items are correctly latched.
trolleys must blocked additionally with their brake.
Danger of clamping!
Clamping of fingers between the latch and the items is possible. Be careful!
CAUTION
Always Latch, stow and secure all doors, drawers, inserts, shelves, cart doors
and stow carts and loose items.
LATCH
Different types of latches are installed to secure:
-- 1/4-turn retainer in different sizes to latch items. Some of these latches
secure intermediate items.
-- Intermediate latch to latch intermediate stored items.
-- Slam latch to close doors.
-- Sliding latch or combined latch to latch and close doors.

DIFFERENT TYPES OF LATCHES
EXAMPLE
90° 1/4−TURN RETAINER

UNLOCK
90° 90°
LOCK UNLOCK UNLOCK
90°
UNLOCK LOCK
INTERMEDIATE LATCH
LOCK UNLOCK
DOOR
SLIDING DOOR
LATCH
SLAM
LATCH
PULL TO OPEN
NOC 02140 01753 0001
WARNING
An unlocked item is a danger in the aircraft and can cause injury to persons
and damage to the aircraft Interior.
Make sure that the latches are not unlocked by passengers.
Unlock the latches only when you take items out of the galleys. Let a
crewmember secure the area while you are stowing or removing items.
UNLOCKING A LATCH
-- 1/4-TURN RETAINER
Turn the related 1/4-turn retainer 90˚ until it unlatched the item.

-- INTERMEDIATE LATCH
Turn the related intermediate latch 90˚ until it unlatched the item.
-- SLAM LATCH
Some galley compartments have additionally to the 1/4-turn retainer a slam
latch, to open the door.
1. Lift the slam latch until the door is unlatched.
2. Using the slam latch, swing out the door.
-- SLIDING LATCH or COMBINED LATCH
Some galley compartments have additionally to the slam latch a sliding latch
or combined latch, to open and unlock the doors.
1. Unlock the sliding latch by sliding the handle. The locking indicator shows
the red dot.
2. Lift the slam latch until the door is unlatched.
3. Using the slam latch, swing out the door.
LOCKING A LATCH
-- 1/4-TURN RETAINER
Turn the related 1/4-turn retainer 90˚ until it latched the item.
-- INTERMEDIATE LATCH
Turn the related intermediate latch 90˚ until it latched the item.
-- SLAM LATCH
Some galley compartments have additionally to the 1/4-turn retainer a slam
latch, to close the doors.
1. Using the slam latch, swing in the door.
2. Push the door against the housing until the slam latch engages with a snap.
-- SLIDING LATCH or COMBINED LATCH
Some galley compartments have additionally to the slam latch a sliding latch
or combined latch, to lock and close the doors.
1. Using the slam latch, swing in the door.
2. Push the door against the housing until the slam latch engages with a snap.
3. Lock the sliding latch or combined by sliding the handle. The locking
indicator shows the green dot.

ADDITIONAL WORKTABLE
ALL
An additional work table is an additional working place, integrated in some galleys.
WARNING
Danger of collision!
A pulled out additional work table is an obstacle in the aisle and can cause
injury! Make sure that the additional work tables are not pulled out by
passengers.
Do not overload the folded work table! Overload may cause damage at the
table attachment.
WARNING
Danger of Injury!
Make sure that the additional work table is pushed back and correctly latched
during
-- Taxi, Take-off, Turbulences, landing.
-- cruise, only if not in use.

SLIDING WORK TABLE
EXAMPLE
SLIDING TABLE
1/4−TURN RETAINER
A A
UNLOCK
LOCK
1/4−TURN RETAINER
NOC 02140 01754 0001
Sliding Work Table

-- Opening a sliding work table
1. To unlock the sliding work table, turn the 1/4-turn retainer to the vertical
position.
2. Push the button and pull out the sliding work table.
WARNING
Danger of injury!
Always secure items placed on the work table against falling down,
especially when they are
-- Sharp.
-- Heavy.
-- Hot.
-- Closing a sliding work table
WARNING
Danger of clamping!
Clamping of fingers between sliding work table and galley is possible. Be
careful!
1. Make sure that there are no items on the work table.

2. Push the button and push the sliding work table on its track into the galley.
3. To lock the sliding work table, turn the 1/4-turn retainer to the horizontal
position.
If a FOLDED WORK TABLE is installed:

-- Opening a folded work table
1. Only if the work table has two latches:
Unlock the sliding latch by sliding the handle. The locking indicator shows
the red dot.
2. Lift the slam latch until the work table is unlatched and open the folded
work table.
WARNING
Danger of injury!
Always secure items placed on the work table against falling down,
especially when they are
-- Sharp
-- Heavy
-- Hot
-- Closing a folded work table
WARNING
Danger of clamping!
Clamping of fingers between folded work table and galley is possible. Be
careful!
1. Make sure that there are no items on the work table.

2. Close the work table.
3. Push the work table against the galley until the slam latch engages with a
snap.
4. Only if the work table has two latches:
Lock the sliding latch by sliding the handle. The locking indicator shows the
green dot.

FOLDED WORK TABLE
EXAMPLE
A
A
TABLE
PULL TO OPEN
SLAM LATCH
SLIDING LATCH
NOC 02140 01755 0001

TROLLEYS
ALL
A trolley is a mobile unit on board the aircraft. Normal purpose is to store and to
transport catering items, for example meals and beverages, and board-shop items.
WARNING
Danger of injury!
Use a trolley for designated purpose only!
There are full size and half size trolleys. Operated the same way, they only differ
in housing length, interior volume and load limit.
The load limit of each trolley is specific. Placards at the trolley compartments
(park positions) show the load limits.
CAUTION
Do not overload the Trolleys!
Overload may cause damage to the locking mechanism (danger of
uncontrolled opening) and/or Trolley housing and/or galley.
To avoid overload, distribute some items to other Trolleys.
OPERATING A TROLLEY

OPERATING ELEMENTS
EXAMPLE
FULLSIZE
TROLLEY
1
HANDLE
LATCH HANDLE
NOT APPLICABLE BRAKE SYSTEM

1 FOR HALFSIZE TROLLEY NOC 02140 01797 0001

REMOVING A TROLLEY FROM ITS COMPARTMENT IN THE GALLEY (PARK

POSITION)
WARNING
Danger of Injury!
A Trolley can be heavy. The more heavy a trolley is, the more power is
needed to move it. Right after removing from park position and Before
entering any passenger zone, check its weight and moveability to ensure safe
handling. If necessary ask a crew member for assistance.
1. Open the cover door or the securing latches at the trolley compartment.
Refer to Latches
2. Disengage the trolley brake.
See Operating the brake system, paragraph "Disengaging the trolley brake".
Note: If an optional "T" divider is installed in the galley, unlock and rotate the
"T" divider to remove the outboard trolley from the stowage area.
For that remove the beside (inner) trolley first.
After this turn the outer trolley toward the middle of the galley (see
illustration below).
3. Remove the trolley from its park position.
4. If there is a cover door at the trolley compartment:
a) Engage the trolley brake.
See Operating the brake system, paragraph "Engaging the trolley brake".
b) Close the cover door.
c) Disengage the trolley brake again.

T-DIVIDER
NOC 02140 03944 0001

a Unlock the latch
b Swivel the T-divider in the middle of the galley
a Turn the trolley in the direction of the center of the galley
TROLLEY OPERATION IN PASSENGER ZONES
WARNING
Danger of Injury!
1. Carefully move the trolley through the aisle and endanger no passengers.
2. Always activate the brake when stopping or parking the trolley.
3. Make sure that the trolley will not be handled by passengers.
OPERATING THE BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING
Danger of Injury!
Carefully operate the trolley brake to minimize the risk of clamping feet.
Engaging the trolley brake
Push the red pedal using a foot to engage the brake.
Disengaging the trolley brake
Push the green pedal using a foot to disengage the brake.
OPERATING THE TROLLEY DOOR / DRAWER
Note: Depending on its exact purpose, a trolley has an additional drawer or not.
Opening the trolley door
1. Turn the latch handle to OPEN position.

2. Swivel out the trolley door using the handle.

Note: The door will remain open, when swiveled out to an angle of 270˚.
Closing the trolley door
WARNING
Danger of Injury!
Carefully close the trolley door to minimize the risk of clamping fingers.
1. Swivel in the door.

2. Make sure that the latch handle is in OPEN position.
3. Push the door against the housing and hold it with one hand.
4. Turn the latch handle to CLOSED position using the other hand.
Opening the drawer
1. Pull the drawer latch and hold it.

2. Using the drawer latch, pull out the drawer.
Closing the drawer
WARNING
Danger of clamping!
Clamping of fingers between drawer and housing is possible. Be careful!
Push the drawer into the housing until the latch engages with a click.
INSERTING THE TROLLEY INTO ITS COMPARTMENT IN THE GALLEY (PARK

POSITION)
Note: If trolley compartments are long enough, stow half size trolleys in pairs,
one trolley after another.
1. If there is a cover door at the trolley compartment or if the securing latches
are closed:
a) Engage the trolley brake.

b) Open the cover door or the securing latches.

c) Disengage the trolley brake again.
2. If necessary turn the trolley around until its door is on the front side.
3. Carefully insert the trolley into its compartment.
Note: If an optional "T" divider is installed in the galley, insert the outer trolley
first.
See Removing a trolley from its compartment in the galley (in
reverse order)
4. Engage the trolley brake.
5. Close the cover door or the securing latches at the trolley compartment.
Refer to Latches

ELECTRICAL PANEL
ALL
Description
The electrical panel has this main equipment:
-- Circuit breakers.
-- Toggle switches
Use the following illustration as an example. There are different electrical panels
in the particular galleys. The illustration shows the electrical panel of galley 5.
For location of the galleys: Refer to Galley Location and Equipment.
ELECTRICAL PANEL
NOC 02140 03373 0001
Operation
1. Circuit breaker:
Circuit breakers operate automatically and secure the related electrical circuit.
When a circuit breaker trips, the circuit has been overloaded.

CAUTION
It is not allowed to reset a tripped circuit breaker. If you reset it, you can
cause an overload to the system. Make an entry in the aircraft logbook to
record the tripped circuit breaker.
2. Toggle switch:
The purpose of the toggle switch is to switch ON/OFF one separate device.
The label on the panel will show you which device is connected to the
particular toggle switch.
3. Work light
You can set the toggle switch to three positions:
-- BRIGHT position
-- OFF position
-- DIM position

GALLEY COOLING
ALL
General
The galley cooling keeps the content of the cooling trolleys and cooling
compartments cool.
Description
The air chiller units supply cold air to cool the trolleys or the trolley compartment
in the connected galleys. Each air chiller unit is connected to one galley only.
The cooled air is supplied to the galley through insulated ducts. The air returning
from the galley is passed through an evaporator and heat exchanger, chilled and
returned to the galley in a closed loop. The drain water of the air chiller unit
drains into the aircraft bilge drainage-system or the wastewater drain system of
the galley. Each galley system has these main components:
-- Air Chiller Units mounted in the galley with tubings to the related compartment.
-- Tubing for drainage.
-- ON/OFF switches and circuit breakers for the galley cooling system on the
electrical panels of the cooled galleys.
Note: Do not use the circuit breaker to switch ON / OFF the galley cooling
system.
Use the following illustration as an example. There are different electrical panels
in the particular galleys. The illustration shows the electrical panel of galley 1.
For location of the galleys: Refer to Galley Location and Equipment.

ELECTRICAL PANEL GALLEY COOLING
NOC 02140 03553 0001
Operation
-- Starting
On the electrical panel, set the related switch of the AIR CHILLER to the ON
position. The light comes on.
The galley cooling system starts. Each related galley has to be switched on
separately.
-- Switching OFF
On the electrical panel, set the related switch of the AIR CHILLER to the OFF
position. The light goes off.
The galley cooling system stops. Each related galley has to be switched off
separately.
Indication
-- Operate function
The indication OPERATIONAL illuminates and shows correct function of the
system.
-- Malfunction light on the electrical panel:
The indication FAULT illuminates. This means no cooling is available any
more. Check the content of the cooling compartment.

WARNING
Health Hazard!
Without Existing cooling, food can become inedible.
Handling
After taking items (like trolleys or containers) out of the cooling compartment, the
door of the related compartment must be closed and immediately secured with
latches.
Placing the items back to the cooling compartment, make sure that the items are
correctly placed and secured. Close the compartment door and immediately
secure it with latches.
For description of:
-- the trolleys Refer to Trolleys.
-- the latches Refer to Latches.

WATER TAP
ALL
1. General
With the water tap you can take water from the aircraft water system.
2. Operation
To take water from the water tap:
-- Hold a container (for example a cup or a can etc.) below the outlet of the
water tap.
-- Push and hold the operating button at the front of the water tap.
To stop the waterflow:
-- Release the operating button at the front of the water tap.
GALLEY WATER TAP
EXAMPLE
OPERATING
BUTTON
OUTLET
NOC 02140 01724 0001

WATER SHUT-OFF VALVE
ALL
1. General
Water shut-off valves are installed in the water supply lines in the wet galleys.
When you close the water shut-off valves, the water supply to the equipment
(for example boiler, water tap, steam oven etc.) stops.
2. Location
Each wet galley has a water shut-off valve. A placard MAIN SHUT-OFF
VALVE or emergency water shut-off shows the location of its operating handle.
3. Operation
With the operating handle you can set the water shut-off valve to the open or
closed position.
When the operating handle points to the ON respective OPEN position (as
shown on the placard) the water shut-off valve is open.
When the operating handle points to the OFF respective CLOSED respective
SHUT position (as shown on the placard) the water shut-off valve is closed.

WATER SHUT-OFF VALVE
EXAMPLE
WATER SHUT−OFF VALVE
OFF
VALVE POSITION
ON
OFF
OPEN CLOSED NOC 02140 02152 0001

WASTEWATER DRAINING
ALL
1. General
The wastewater draining has these components for cabin crew attention:
-- Sink
-- Operating button for drain valve
2. Description
Through the sink and the drain valve the wastewater from the galleys will be
discarded.
3. Operation
CAUTION
Do not pour
-- Milk
-- Cream
-- Milk with acidic liquids (e.g. orange juice, apple juice, vinegar etc.)
together
-- Coffee grounds
-- Tea ground
-- Food rests
into the sink. This causes defects on the wastewater drainage system.
Discard residual water and liquids except those mentioned in the caution through
the sink.
Flush occasionally with hot water.
WARNING
Hot water can cause serious burns.
You have to pull and release the operating button of the drain valve, when the
wastewaster does not flow through the sink.

WASTEWATER DRAINING
EXAMPLE
MAN. DRAIN
RELEASE
PULL
NOC 02140 02153 0001

BOILER
ALL
GENERAL
The boiler is a water heater installed in a wet galley and is supplied from the
aircraft water system and electrical system.
BOILER
3
5
2
5
1
2
3 1 NOC 02140 03372 0001

1 Blue ON/OFF Push-Button
2 Red NO WATER Light
3 Outlet
4 Black Handle
5 Green READY Light

-- DESCRIPTION
The boiler heats 4.1 liters (1.08 USgal) of water to a temperature of 87˚C
(188.6˚F).
-- OPERATION
1.
WARNING
When you open the hot water faucet:
-- Keep your hands away from the water.
-- Do not let the water splash.
CAUTION
DANGER!
Monitor the Boiler during its operation!

Push the ON/OFF push-button (1) to the ON position. The blue ON/OFF
light (1) comes on.
2. If there is not enough water in the boiler, the red NO WATER light (2)
comes on and the heater does not operate:
a) Hold a container (for example a hot-water can) below the outlet (3) of
the HOT water-faucet.
b) Open the HOT water-faucet by pulling the black handle (4) 90˚ towards
you. Hold the handle to bleed any air from the boiler until water flows
out of the outlet (3).
c) Release the black handle (4). The water flow stops.
d) Discard the water from the container through the sink of the galley.
3. When the boiler is full of water the red NO WATER light (2) goes off.
4. The green READY light (5) comes on, when the water is hot and has the
correct temperature.
5. HOT water-faucet operation:
WARNING
When you open the hot water faucet:
-- Keep your hands away from the water.
-- Do not let the water splash.
a) Make sure that the container (for example a hot-water can) you use is
for hot water and hold the container below the outlet (3) of the HOT
water-faucet.
b) To open the HOT water-faucet, pull the black handle (4) towards you
and hold it.
c) To close the HOT water-faucet, release the black handle (4). The water
flow stops.
6. To stop the operation of the boiler, push the ON/OFF push-button (1) to the
OFF position. The blue ON/OFF light (1) goes off.

COFFEE MAKER
ALL
General
The coffee maker is installed in the galley and connected to the galley power
and water supply. The coffee maker is:
-- For brewing coffee.
-- To hold coffee warm (hot plate function).
-- For hot water withdrawal.
-- For cold water withdrawal.
The Coffee Maker uses soft packaged coffee (pillow pack) placed in a cup
assembly, which serves as the brew chamber. Heated water sprays onto the
pillow pack. The brewing takes place as the hot water soaks through the coffee.
The brewed coffee then flows down into the server below. The coffee grounds
are retained within the pillow pack. When brewing is completed, the cup
assembly can be withdrawn and the old pillow pack discarded.
A warmer plate, mounted in the base of the coffee maker, will maintain brewed
coffee above 76˚C (169˚F) for 30 minutes when the fresh brew is above 82˚C
(180˚F).

COFFEE MAKER
5
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
NOC 02140 03554 0001

1 Brew Handle
2 Brew Chamber
3 Hot/Cold Water Faucet
4 Hot Plate
5 ON/OFF Switch
6 Brew Switch
7 Hot Plate ON
8 Hot Water
9 Cold Water
Operation
CAUTION
Server must be empty and brew handle must be in down position during taxi,
takeoff, turbulence and landing.
Observe the coffee maker during its operation!
Note: The server must be in place and the brew handle in the down position to
activate the coffee maker control switches.
Power On
Press the ON/OFF button. The ON/OFF button will be illuminated.
-- The water in the water tank is heated.
Brew Coffee

1. Put a new coffee pack in the cup assembly in the brew chamber.
2. Close the brew chamber totally.
3. Put the server in place.
4. Set the brew handle in down position.
5. Press the BREW button to activate the brew cycle.
When the temperature in the water tank reaches the set point of approximately
90˚C (194˚F), the brew circuit is completed. When the brew light goes out, the
coffee is ready.
The brew cycle may be reset by cycling ON/OFF switch through the OFF position.
Hot/Cold Water Faucet
Hot or cold water can obtained through a faucet mounted on the front of the unit
by the push of the appropriate button. The hot water faucet will dispense hot
water approximately three to five minuets after the coffee maker is turned on. An
indicator illuminates when water is hot.
Hot Plate Operation
Power to the hot plate is applied by activating both the ON/OFF switch and the
HOT PLATE ON switch. An indicator lamp illuminates when the hot plate is on.
With the server in place, the hot plate will maintain coffee temperature at 76˚C
(169) to 88˚C (190˚F) for approximately 30 minutes.

ALL
OVEN CONTROL MODULE
DESCRIPTION
GENERAL
The Oven Control Module controls the operation and the function of the
convection oven located in the galley. There is one Oven Control Module for
each oven.
WARNING
Danger of injury!
USE THE OVEN CONTROL MODULE only FOR designated PURPOSES!
Obey the Warnings and CAUTIONs APPLICABLE to the oven!
COMPONENTS

OVEN CONTROL MODULE COMPONENTS
NOC 02140 02382 0001
-- Heating time display (heating time selector switches below)

-- Temperature indicator lights (temperature selector switch below)
-- Serving time display (serving time selector switches below)
-- ON/OFF button
-- Start button
GENERAL OPERATION
Set the required heating time and the heating temperature at the front panel.
The temperature sensor in the oven gives the signals to the OVEN CONTROL
MODULE to control oven operation.
You can use three heating temperatures:
Selection Temp in degree Temp in degree

Celsius Fahrenheit
1. low 145 293
2. med 185 365

Selection Temp in degree Temp in degree

Celsius Fahrenheit
3. high 230 446
The appropriate indicator of the used heating temperature lights up at the front
panel.
Conditions:
-- The max. heating time is 60 minutes.
-- The used heating time is shown at the front panel.
-- The max. serving time is 90 minutes.
-- The used serving time is shown at the front panel.
-- While the soak time only the blower is working.
-- After the program is done, the OVEN CONTROL MODULE switches off the
system.
-- In case power supply is interrupted while the oven is operating, data for oven
operating will be kept for two minutes. If the power supply returns within two
minutes, the OVEN CONTROL MODULE will continue to operate automatically.
The OVEN CONTROL MODULE identifies the following failures:
-- temperature sensor short-circuit.
-- temperature sensor breaking.
-- overheating of the oven to more than 290 degrees Celsius (554 degrees
Fahrenheit).
STARTING OPERATION
1. Press the key, ON/OFF.

The display shows 00.
The indicators MED and ON/OFF light up.
2. Setting the serving time (right segment) and the heating time (left segment).
Set the serving time and the heating time with separate keys for the two
decimal places.
When you press a key, the adjusted time will increase by approximately one
value per second.
The max. heating time is 60 minutes.
The max. serving time is 90 minutes.

Note: The serving time is the elapsed time from program start to serving the
prepared meal. Normal the serving time should be two minutes more
than the heating time, because of the two minutes soak time after the
heating process. For further information see the description below.
To start the oven immediately:
-- Select the heating time.
-- Select the serving time max. two minutes more than the heating time.
Heating elements and blower are switched on immediately and the heating
process starts.
After the end of the heating time, two minutes serving time are left, which
pass as soak time
To start the oven by input the elapsing time, you wish to serve the meal:
-- Select the heating time.
-- Select the serving time. The serving time has to be more than two minutes
more than the heating time.
Serving time passes until the serving time is two minutes more than the
heating time. Then the heating elements and the blower are switched on and
the heating process starts.
After the end of the heating time two minutes serving time are left, which
pass as soak time
3. To set the temperature press the TEMP key and the adjusted temperature and
the respective indicator changes as follows:
MED - HIGH - MED - LOW - MED - HIGH - MED - LOW

4. To start the program press the key START. The START indicator lights up.
Additional features:
-- If you press the TEMP key the actual temperature in the oven is shown for
three seconds.
Example: 14 5C = 145˚C
-- After the end of the program the time display " - -" flashes for ten minutes.
Than the Oven Control Module switches off the complete system.
-- You can switch off the Oven Control Module at any time if you press the
ON/OFF key. All adjusted values are then lost.

OVEN
ALL
DESCRIPTION
GENERAL
The oven is installed in a galley. It is supplied from the aircraft electrical system.
The normal purpose of the oven is either to warm up frozen food and to hold it
at its desired temperature or to grill steak or other food.
WARNING
Danger of injury!
USE THE OVEN only FOR designated PURPOSES!
COMPONENTS

OVEN COMPONENTS
1
2
NOC 02140 02381 0001
1 Door
2 Latch
3 Door Knob
4 Vapour Outlet

GENERAL OPERATION
-- Before operating the oven, make sure that it is clean and serviceable.
CAUTION
Do not operate an empty oven. An empty oven in operation causes damage
to the equipment.
During oven-operation make sure that the VAPOR OUTLET is free to let vapor
out of the oven.
CAUTION
Do not place anything in front of the vapor outlet. If vapor cannot escape,
damage can occur to the equipment.
DOOR OPERATION
Opening the oven door
WARNING
Danger of Injury!
Be careful! falling items can cause injury!
WARNING
Danger of injury!
Be careful! Hot Air can escape from the oven. Hot meal can fall out of the
oven. Use adequate protection e.g. gloves.
Be careful hot items can fall out of the oven.
-- Turn the related 1/4-turn retainer 90 degrees until it unlatched the door
-- Turning the DOOR KNOB toward the OPEN position, until the latching
linkage disengages, then carefully pull the operating knob to open the door

Closing the oven door
WARNING
Danger of clamping!
Clamping of fingers between Door and housing is possible. Be careful!
-- Turn the related 1/4-turn retainer 90 degrees until it latched the door
-- Close the door firmly and turn the DOOR KNOB to the LOCKED POSITION
OPERATING THE OVEN
The oven is controlled by a separate CONTROL MODULE in the galley.

To see how to operate the oven Refer to Control Module

STEAM OVEN
ALL
GENERAL INFORMATION
The steam oven is an oven with water injection. As soon as its inside
temperature reaches a certain value, the injection process starts with a several
milliseconds watershot, repeated several times per minute. The injected water will
vaporize instantly, which creates an overpressure inside the oven. The food heats
up in an environment of very high humidity, while overpressure and temperature
are controlled and regulated by a special control software. This method of careful
cooking has a positive effect on the food’s nutritive value and taste.
COMPONENTS AND SOFTWARE
STEAM OVEN COMPONENTS
Main components

MAIN COMPONENTS OVERVIEW
EXAMPLE
NOC 02140 01727 0001
Note: The door of the steam oven can be left-hinged or right-hinged. It is

possible that the figure shows the door side-inverted.
1. Door
2. Door knob
A three-position door lock. The positions are:
-- LOCK
Locks the door and keeps it locked, particularly when the steam oven is
under pressure.
-- SAFE
Keep the door in a snap-in position to prevent it from uncontrolled
swinging out. Does not keep the door closed in special flight situations
or when the steam oven is under pressure.
-- OPEN
Unlocks the door.

WARNING
Danger of injury!
Door knob must be in position "LOCK" during
-- taxi
-- take off
-- turbulence
-- landing
-- steam oven operation
3. 1/4-turn retainer
Additional lock, used to increase safety against uncontrolled door opening.
4. Oven control module (OCM)
Centralizes the operating elements.
Oven control module (OCM)
OCM OVERVIEW
1 2
NOC 02140 01728 0001
The OCM has two components:

1. Oven display
Used to display status data or information and error messages.
2. Operating panel
Needed mainly for data input. Additionally used to display steam oven main
status.

OPERATING PANEL

1. ON/OFF pushbutton
Has main switch function.
An integrated LED lights up in ON position.
2. CLEAR pushbutton
Used to stop or change cooking start time delay and cooking program
(sequence).
3. PRESET pushbutton
Allows to execute a cooking start time delay.
An integrated LED lights up to indicate that this function is activated.
4. DRY-HEAT pushbutton
Selects the cooking program DRY-HEAT.
An integrated LED lights up to indicate that this program is activated.
5. MEDIUM pushbutton
Selects the cooking program MEDIUM.
6. LOW pushbutton
Selects the cooking program LOW.
7. TIME + pushbutton
Increases the default time of the cooking start time delay or a cooking
program. Each time the pushbutton is pressed, the default time makes an
one-minute-step upwards.
8. TIME - pushbutton
Decreases the default time of the cooking start time delay or a cooking
program. Each time the pushbutton is pressed, the default time makes an
one-minute-step downwards.
9. READY LED (green)
Lights up when the steam oven is ready to heat up food.
10.FAIL LED (red)
Lights up when the steam oven has a malfunction.
STEAM OVEN SOFTWARE
The steam oven software has three cooking programs (LOW, MEDIUM,
DRY-HEAT). It is possible to use them as single cooking programs or to combine
at least two of them to a cooking program sequence.
Cooking programs:
-- LOW
Produces steam at low temperature.

-- MEDIUM
Produces steam at high temperature.
-- DRY-HEAT
Produces no steam. Oven heats up conventional.
All cooking programs operates with a default time of 20 minutes. If necessary,
manual overriding of the default time in one-minute-steps is possible.
Additionally a cooking start time delay can be selected. It allows to finish cooking
at a defined point of time without keeping in mind when to start the cooking
program (sequence). If necessary, manual overriding of the default time (10
minutes) in one-minute-steps is possible.
OPERATING THE STEAM OVEN
Note: If there is a pushbutton to be pressed, then in every case it is located at

the operating panel.
TAKING THE STEAM OVEN INTO SERVICE
1. Press the ON/OFF pushbutton.

The integrated LED lights up. A start message appears on the oven display.
2. Wait for a few seconds until the oven display shows the message:
** STAND BY **
Additionally, the inner temperature of the steam oven is displayed (in ˚C).
The green READY LED at the operating panel lights up.
The steam oven is now ready to be loaded and to cook.

OPENING THE DOOR
1. Swivel the 1/4-turn retainer to unlocked position.

2. Turn the door knob into position OPEN.
3. Swivel out the door.
CLOSING THE DOOR
1. Swivel in the door.

2. Push the door against the housing.
3. Turn the door knob into position LOCK.
4. Swivel the 1/4-turn retainer to locked position.
PROGRAMMING THE STEAM OVEN
WARNING
Danger of injury!
Do not start programming the steam oven before the door knob is in position
"LOCK".
1. If a starting time delay is requested:

a) Press the PRESET pushbutton.
The integrated LED lights up.
The oven display shows the default time.
b) If necessary, change the default time by pressing the corresponding
pushbutton TIME + or TIME -. Each time a pushbutton is pressed, the
default time makes an one-minute-step upwards or downwards depending
on the corresponding pushbutton.
2. Select the cooking program by pressing the corresponding pushbutton (LOW,
MEDIUM or DRY-HEAT).
The integrated LED lights up.
The oven display shows the default time.
3. If necessary, change the default time by pressing the corresponding
pushbutton TIME + or TIME -. Each time a pushbutton is pressed, the default

time makes an one-minute-step upwards or downwards depending on the

corresponding pushbutton.
4. If a cooking program sequence is requested, repeat the last two steps.
5. Go ahead immediately with the steps described in section COOKING THE
FOOD.
COOKING THE FOOD
1. Start up the steam oven by pressing the pushbutton of the cooking program
entered last once more (LOW, MEDIUM or DRY-HEAT).
The oven display shows the following:
-- During starting time delay (if selected):
The actual time until the cooking program starts.
The displayed time counts down to zero.
-- During cooking program (sequence):
The elapsed time of the actual cooking program and the oven temperature
(in ˚C)
2. The end of the cooking program (sequence) is signalled by
-- a beeper, beeping for 15 seconds
-- the green READY LED on the operating panel
-- the oven display, showing the message:
=> PRESS CLEAR?
Confirm the end of cooking by pressing the CLEAR pushbutton.
The oven display shows now:
** STAND BY **
Additionally, the inner temperature of the steam oven is displayed (in ˚C).
WARNING
Danger of injury!
Do not take out any food box/dish without hands protected against heat.
Else serious burns caused by hand contact with food boxes/dishes or oven
walls are possible.
TAKING THE STEAM OVEN OUT OF SERVICE
1. Ensure the steam oven is in standby mode. The oven display must show:
** STAND BY **
2. Press the ON/OFF pushbutton.
The integrated LED expires.
The green READY LED at the operating panel expires.
The oven display clears.

HOT CUP
ALL
General
1. The hot cup is a water heater installed in a galley and is supplied from the
aircraft electrical system.
2. Normal purpose of the hot cup is to heat up potable water.
WARNING
Danger of injury!
use the Hot Cup only for designated purposes!
3. The hot cup is a kettle with a thermostatically controlled heating-element and

a lid.
HOT CUP
EXAMPLE
A
HOLDER
A
RECEPTACLE
LID
HANDLE
KETTLE
CONNECTOR
NOC 02140 00138 0001
Components

The hot cup has these main components:

1. A lid.
2. A kettle.
3. A connector, for electrical supply.
Operation - Taking the Hot Cup into Service

NEVER USE THE HOT CUP WITHOUT WATER
1. Pull up the holder.
2. Open the lid and make sure that the hot cup is clean.
3. Fill the kettle with water.
WARNING
Danger of Injury!
Never fill the Kettle to more than the maximum level. There is Danger of
burning from hot water!
4. Close the lid. Make sure that it is correctly positioned.

5. Position the hot cup and push the connector into the receptacle.
6. Pull down the holder.
WARNING
Danger of injury!
Make sure that the hot cup is correctly latched.
7. The hot cup operates and heats up the water.
CAUTION
Monitor the hot cup during its operation.

8. When the correct temperature is reached the hot cup switch goes off. The hot
water is ready to serve.
9. Carefully pull up the holder, hold the handle and remove the hot cup.
WARNING
Danger of injury!
The KETTLE is hot. Hold the hot cup only at the handle.
Hot water can cause burning. Be Careful!
Operation - Taking the Hot Cup out of Service

1. Let the hot cup cool.
2. After use, and the hot cup is cooled, dry it with a clean absorbent cloth.
3. Stow and latch the hot cup correctly.

CIDS AND COMMUNICATIONS 03.000
03.010 CABIN INTERCOMMUNICATION DATA SYSTEM

-- SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1
-- GENERAL 5
-- FAP - LOCATION AND MODULES 6
-- CIDS COMPONENTS AT THE ATTENDANT STATIONS 9
-- AFT ATTENDANT PANEL 10
-- ATTENDANT INDICATION PANELS 11
-- AREA CALL PANELS 13
-- CABIN HANDSETS 15
-- SYSTEM POWER-UP 16
03.020 CABIN PROGRAMMING

-- ZONES 1
-- LAYOUT SELECTION 3
-- PA LEVEL ADJUSTMENT 5
-- SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD 8
-- FAP SETUP 9
03.030 COMMUNICATION
-- GENERAL SYSTEM INFORMATION 1
03.040 PA SYSTEM
-- PA ANNOUNCEMENTS FROM THE COCKPIT 1
-- PA FROM THE COCKPIT 3
-- PA ANNOUNCEMENTS FROM AN ATTENDANT HANDSET 6
-- ANNOUNCEMENTS 8
03.050 SERVICE INTERPHONE

03.060 CABIN INTERPHONE

-- INTERPHONE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION 1
03.070 PASSENGER CALL SYSTEM

03.080 PASSENGER LIGHTED SIGNS

-- LOCATION OF PASSENGER LIGHTED SIGNS 2
-- OPERATION OF PASSENGER LIGHTED SIGNS SYSTEM 5
03.090 AUDIO

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN INTERCOMMUNICATION DATA SYSTEM JAN 08/08
ALL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS) operates, controls and

monitors the main cabin systems.
The CIDS performs different system and unit tests.
It is connected to the following cabin systems:
Air Conditioning
Communications
Fire Protection
Ice Protection
Lights
Water and Waste
The system philosophy makes it easy to change the cabin layout because CIDS
hardware provides spare inputs, outputs and circuits. This allows the connection
of new and/or additional cabin equipment without a change of CIDS hardware
components. If any equipment is changed, only the CIDS software database has
to be updated.
The CIDS system is also able to detect faults in its components and the
connected equipment by itself.
INTEGRATED CABIN SYSTEMS
The CIDS provides these system functions:
PASSENGER ADDRESS
The PA system distributes announcements from the cockpit and each attendant
station through all assigned PAX loudspeakers.
( Refer to PA SYSTEM)
SERVICE INTERPHONE
The service interphone system allows the communication via telephone between
the ground crew, the cockpit crew and the cabin crew when the aircraft is on the
ground.

( Refer to SERVICE INTERPHONE)
CABIN AND FLIGHT CREW INTERPHONE
The cabin interphone system allows the communication via telephone between all
attendant stations and between the attendant stations and the cockpit.
( Refer to CABIN INTERPHONE)
CABIN READY SIGNALLING (OPTIONAL)
The cabin ready signalling informs the cockpit crew about the cabin status.
( Refer to General System Information)
PASSENGER CALL
The PAX call system controls the illumination of the PAX call-light and the
activation of the call-chime.
( Refer to PASSENGER CALL SYSTEM)
PASSENGER LIGHTED SIGNS
The PAX lighted signs system controls the NO SMOKING (NS), FASTEN SEAT
BELT (FSB), RETURN TO SEAT (RTS) and EXIT signs.
( Refer to PASSENGER LIGHTED SIGNS)
PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT AND BOARDING MUSIC
The PRAM transmits the pre-recorded announcement and the boarding music to
the related PAX loudspeakers.( Refer to AUDIO)
CABIN ILLUMINATION
The cabin illumination system controls the illumination of the different cabin areas
independently.
(Refer to Chapter 02 / Section 070)
READING LIGHTS
The reading lights system controls the PAX reading lights and attendant
work-lights in the cabin. In addition to the above described lights it is possible to

install special decor lights and spot lights which are also controlled by the
reading light system.
AIR CONDITIONING
The CIDS can select different temperatures for all defined cabin zones. A fine
adjustment of the pre-selected temperature for different zones is possible through
FAP operations. The actual temperature per zone is indicated on the FAP.
POTABLE WATER INDICATION AND PRE-SELECTION
The potable water indication and pre-selection system shows the filling level of
the water tank on the FAP and gives the commands for the pre-selection of the
water quantity.
WASTE INDICATION
The waste indication system shows the filling level of the waste tanks on the
FAP. In addition to that inoperative lavatories are indicated on the FAP and
respective messages come on.
LAVATORY SMOKE INDICATION
The smoke detection system controls the visual and acoustical indications in the
cabin if a smoke alert is received from the Smoke Detection Control Unit SDCU.
DOORS AND ESCAPE-SLIDES PRESSURE MONITORING
The door and escape-slide control system monitors the door and escape-slide
bottle-pressure reservoir at the PAX doors and the emergency exits. In addition
to that it monitors the status of the doors (OPEN/CLOSED) and the
escape-slides (ARMED/DISARMED). The status is indicated on the FAP.

PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (OPTIONAL)
The PES transmits audio programs and video sound to the passengers and
shows video programs through the video display units in the PAX compartment.
The passenger can hear the audio programs and the video sound through the
headsets and the loudspeakers. In addition, the CIDS director transmits PA
announcements to the headsets and the loudspeakers. As an option, the system
provides also internet access and in-seat power supply.
(Refer to Chapter 04)
EMERGENCY EVACUATION SIGNALLING
The EVAC system controls the evacuation signalling in all cabin areas and in the
cockpit. It can be activated from the cockpit, the FAP (guarded push button called
EVAC CMD) or,as an option, from the AAP (EVAC CMD) during an emergency.
PASSENGER SERVICE SYSTEM
The PSS gives the remote controlled operation of the PAX reading lights and the
PAX call activation/deactivation.
STERILE COCKPIT (OPTIONAL)
If installed, the sterile cockpit command is used by the cockpit crew to indicate
that they do not want to be disturbed.

ALL
GENERAL
The CIDS system consists of these components:

-- Directors 1 and 2
-- Decoder/Encoder Units (DEU), Type A and B
-- Forward Attendant Panel (FAP)
-- Cabin Assignment Module (CAM)
-- Aft Attendant Panel(s) (AAP)
-- Attendant Indication Panels (AIP)
-- Area Call Panels (ACP)
-- Handsets
-- Loudspeakers
-- Passenger call/reset pushbuttons
-- Passenger call lights
-- No Smoking (NS), Fasten Seat Belt (FSB) and Return To Seat (RTS) signs.
All components of the CIDS are connected to the two identical directors, one of
them in active mode and the other one in hot standby mode. The directors are
the central control components of the CIDS. They monitor the system
performance continuously, store detected faults and send them to the Warning
and Maintenance System (WMS) and/or the FAP.
In the event of a major fault, respective information is sent additionally to the
ECAM Status Page or to the ECAM Warning Page.
The CIDS can operate in NORMAL MODE (all power connected) or in
EMERGENCY MODE. In the EMERGENCY MODE the power consumption is
reduced to a minimum and the system operates with these minimum functions:
-- the PA system,
-- the CABIN INTERPHONE system,
-- the EVAC signalling system.
The standby DIR2, the PTP and the FAP are not supplied.

FAP - LOCATION AND MODULES
ALL
The FORWARD ATTENDANT PANEL (FAP) enables the cabin crew to control
certain cabin systems which are connected to the CIDS and gives information
about their status, e.g. lighting or announcements.
LOCATION
The FAP is located at the attendant station FWD L (located in the forward
entrance area/door 1L).
FAP - COMPONENT LOCATION
A A FAP
LIGHT
MODULE
B PTP AUDIO
MODULE
MISCELLANEOUS
MODULE
NOC 03010 02391 0001

MODULES
The FAP consists of 4 different control modules and the PTP. The module on
top of the FAP is not used (spare). The other modules are:
-- the CABIN LIGHTING module
-- the AUDIO module
-- the WATER & MISCELLANEOUS module
FAP - OVERVIEW
LIGHT
MODULE
AUDIO
MODULE
123456
123456
123456
123456
WATER AND MISCELLANEOUS

MODULE NOC 03010 02394 0001
Refer to GENERAL ILLUMINATION for a description of the LIGHT module,

PRERECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT for the AUDIO module and SYSTEM
FUNCTIONS (water and waste) for the WATER & MISCELLANEOUS modul.

PTP - PROGRAMMING AND TEST PANEL
The Programming and Test Panel (PTP) is installed in the rear wall of lavatory
"A" at the attendant station 1L. It is located next to the FAP behind a hinged
access door.
PTP - OVERVIEW
EXAMPLE
DSPL 1 2 3
ON
4 5 6
TEST BAT BAT 7 8 9

OK
EMER
LIGHT SYS SYS CLR 0
OK
CAM−MODULE
NOC 03010 02395 0001
The PTP enables the attendants and other personnel to test and re-program the
CIDS.
For a correct operation of the CIDS the Cabin Assignment Module (CAM) must
be installed in the socket behind the CAM-Module front panel. This CAM defines
all of the modifiable system properties and layout information of the CIDS. It
contains a storage capacity of 4 different cabin layouts (Layout 1-3, Layout M).
These Layouts are programmed acording to the airline requests and can be
modified via the PTP. At the end of the modification procedure the new layout is
automatically stored as Layout M.

CIDS COMPONENTS AT THE ATTENDANT STATIONS
ALL
All CIDS components are installed at the attendant stations. The stations are
located in the door areas or in the aisle between them.
COMPONENT LOCATION
AIP
HANDSET
ACP AIP ACP
HANDSET HANDSET AIP

AIP
FAP AAP
NOC 03010 02386 0001

ALL
AFT ATTENDANT PANEL
With the switching functions integrated in the AAP the cabin attendants can
control certain cabin systems ( Refer to Additional Attendant Panels).
It is installed at the attendant station AFT L.
The AAP is a switch panel consisting of 3 rows x 6 columns of membrane
switches.
AFT ATTENDANT PANEL (AAP)
NOC 03010 02390 0001
Note: The available switching functions are optional (e.g. ENTRY DIM1/DIM2/...).

ATTENDANT INDICATION PANELS
ALL
The AIPs indicate dial and call information of the PA / Interphone system and
other system information (e.g. lavatory smoke location, PAX calls, ...) to the
attendants.
They are installed at all attendant stations.
The AIPs consists of a two-row alphanumerical display and two indicator lights.
The upper row displays communication information (e.g. interphone calls) and the
lower row displays cabin system and emergency information (e.g. direct
announcements) with a length of 16 characters maximally.
Each text message displayed in the lower row belongs to the following priority:
Indication related to System Function Priority

Emergency Call 1
Cabin Interphone All Attendant Call 2
Normal Call 3
Smoke Detection 2
Evacuation Signalling 3
Service Interphone 6
Passenger Address 7
Prerecorded Announcement 7
Seatrow 5
Passenger Call from Lavatory 4
Attendant 4
Sterile Cockpit Indication 8
Waste Warning Indication 3
’Purser Call’ Status 5
Cockpit Alert Indication 1
Cabin Alert Confirmation 1
Two indicator lights (red/green) serve as attention getters and ensure a far
reaching call function when a respective message is displayed. The red light is
used for system and emergency information, the green light for communication
information. The lights are steady in normal situations and will flash in
emergency situations.

ADDITIONAL INDICATION PANEL (AIP)
RED LED GREEN LED
DISPLAY−AREA
NOC 03010 001683 0001

AREA CALL PANELS
ALL
R (1)
The ACPs give a long-range visual indication about the system status (e.g. PAX
call active).
They are installed at the ceiling in the middle of the aisle between the
passenger/crew doors, close to the attendant stations.
Each of them has four separately controllable indication fields containing colored
LEDs which are visible from the front and the rear side.
AREA CALL PANEL (ACP)
AMBER
RED
RED
BLUE NOC 03010 02163 0001
Note: In case of two red ACP fields both will react as one single field. There will
be no difference of the indication modus between them.
The lighted segments are activated either continuously (steady) or flashing.

In case of "normal" calls they are not flashing (steady), in case of "abnormal" or
"emergency" situations they will flash. Only the blue PAX call field will never
flash, this will be always a "normal" indication.
The following table shows the types of information on which the cabin attendants
are informed about, in combination with the related ACP field and the lighting
modus:
SYSTEM INFORMATION COLOR on ACP (LED) LIGHT MODUS
PAX call (from lavatory) Amber Steady
LAV smoke Amber Flashing
All ATTND calls (from cockpit) Red Steady
EMER call (from cockpit) Red Flashing

SYSTEM INFORMATION COLOR on ACP (LED) LIGHT MODUS

All ATTND calls (from cabin) Red Steady
PAX call (from seat row) Blue Steady
Note: If a PAX call from a lavatory is started an additional amber light (similar to
the ACP lights) comes on steady on the dedicated outside lavatory wall.

CABIN HANDSETS
ALL
The cabin attendants use the cabin handsets for the cabin and flight crew
interphone functions and for PA announcements.
The handsets are installed at the cabin crew stations.
CABIN HANDSET
EXAMPLE
HANDSET
CRADLE
KEYBOARD
NOC 03010 01685 0001
Use the integrated keyboard to make different types of calls and announcements.
For SERVICE INTERPHONE functions: Refer to General System Information
For CABIN INTERPHONE functions: Refer to Interphone System - General
Information

ALL
SYSTEM POWER-UP
After CIDS is started, the system initializes and tests all the connected
equipment. These test results are compared with the programmed basic data to
decide wether their status is OK or NOT OK. These status is transmitted to the
CFDS and displayed on the ECAM in the cockpit.
This power-up test is activated after every power connection to the CIDS, also
through performing a system reset or a manually activated test via PTP, CFDS
... .
Dependant on the aircraft condition (e.g. doors open/closed ...) the duration of
this test is 60sec up to 180sec.
If a system failure is detected, an indication is possible on
-- the FAP (CIDS caution light),
-- the PTP,
-- the CFDS/MCDU display,
-- the ECA; displays.
During flight phase, it is possible to reset the illuminated caution light on the
FAP. If the failure still exists after landing, the caution light will come on again
and the SYSTEM STATUS mode is displayed.

HIGHLIGHTS
(1) New item ’Area Call Panels’ for ’ALL’

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN PROGRAMMING SEP 13/07
ZONES
ALL
In the programming mode of the PTP it is possible to change the non-smoking

(NS) area. This function is not access code protected.
For programming a NS zone the last seatrow number of the related NS zone
must be entered. Entering a 0 (zero) deletes the NS zone.
The following diagram gives an example of this procedure.

NS ZONE PROGRAMMING
NOC 03020 02402 0001

LAYOUT SELECTION
ALL
This function on the PTP is code protected. To get access the correct code must
be entered at first.
The A/C is delivered with access code: 333 .
After this 3 digit code is entered the CAM LAYOUT SELECTION menu appears
on the display. The progammed layouts are marked with a ’<’ or ’>’ sign and the
number of the active layout flashes.
Push the related membrane switch to select a new layout. After selection the
new layout is marked and downloaded to the system. A system update will be
initiated automatically and CIDS works with this layout until a new one will be
selected and loaded.

LAYOUT SELECTION
DSPL START HERE

ON
CIDS PROGRAMMING
<SYSTEM STATUS <ZONING
<SYSTEM TEST <CABIN PROGRAMMING
<PROGRAMMING <RET
ENTER ACCESS CODE <CAM LAYOUT SELECT
*** 1
<RET ENTER> <RET
CAM LAYOUT SELECTION CAM LAYOUT SELECTION
LAYOUT 1 LOADED <1 LAYOUT 2
3 LAYOUT M>
<RET <RET
AFTER INPUT OF RESPECTIVE DIGITS

1 (EACH ENTERED DIGIT IS MARKED BY A SIGN)
2 LAST SELECTED LAYOUT IS FLASHING

ALL
PA LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
This function on the PTP is code protected. To get access the correct code must
be entered at first.
The A/C is delivered with access code: 333 123 .
After this 6 digit code is entered the PA LEVEL ADJ appears on the display.
It is possible to adjust the basic loudness levels of 3 different cabin areas and
all the attendant areas. Information on these areas are stored in the CAM. Their
positions are fixed and independent from the cabin zone programming.

PA LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
NOTE:
EACH ENTERED DIGIT OF THE
ACCESS CODE IS MARKED BY A SIGN
NOC 03020 02404 0001

In addition to that the automatic increase levels for

-- ENGINES RUNNING (FLIGHT) and
-- CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION (EMERGENCY)
can be adjusted.
The acoustic loudness in the cabin for these auto increase cases is always
according to the basic loudness level plus the auto increase.
To change one of these values select the related key on the right side and push
it. The currently active loudness value is flashing and can be adjusted in steps
of +/-2 dB through pushing the related key on the left side of the menu. The
respective loudness level is updated immediately (for auto increase cases only if
they are currently active).
The following table shows the default settings and the possible value range:
Default setting Range from / to
Areas 0 dB -6 dB / +4 dB
Engines running +6 dB +4 dB / +8 dB
Cabin decomp. +4 dB +4 dB / +6 dB
Note: If the min. or max. limit of the range is reached, the respective prompt ’<’
in front of the ’+’ or ’-’ disappears.
For each page a ’RES’ (Reset) function is selectable. If one of the adjustable
values is selected and this value is flashing while pushing the ’RES’ key, it
becomes the default value.
If non has been selected before pushing ’RES’ (nothing flashes), all values of
the page become default values.

SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD
ALL
Not applicable.

FAP SETUP
ALL
Not applicable.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL COMMUNICATION SEP 13/07
GENERAL SYSTEM INFORMATION
ALL
The cabin communication system is managed by the CIDS and provides these
subsequent system functions:
Cabin Ready Signalling
Passenger Address (PA) system
Service Interphone
Refer to General System Information
Interphone
Refer to Interphone System - General Information
Passenger Call system
Passenger Lighted Signs
Audio
Refer to Prerecorded Announcement
PRIORITIES OF THE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
The communication system functions have different priorities.

The following table shows the priorities for the displayed messages of the
communications’ subsequent systems on the AIP and the ACP.
After a reset of the indication with the higher priority the AIP will display the
previous indication.
The indications are queued up with regard to their priority.
INDICATION RELATED TO SYSTEM FUNCTION PRIORITY on

AIP ACP
Cabin Interphone Emergency Call 1 1
All Attendant Call 2 3
Normal Call 3 3
Lavatory Smoke Detection 2 2
Evacuation Signalling 3 4
Service Interphone 6 - - -
Passenger Address 7 - - -

INDICATION RELATED TO SYSTEM FUNCTION PRIORITY on

AIP ACP
Pre-recorded Announcement 7 - - -
Passenger Call Call from Seatrow 5 5
Call from Lavatory 4 5
Call from Attendant 4 5
Waste Warning Indication 3 2
"Purser Call" Status (optional) 5 - - -
Cockpit Alert Indication (optional) 1 1
Cabin Alert Confirmation (optional) 1 - - -
CABIN READY SIGNALLING
The cabin crew can indicate the actual cabin status through pushing the CABIN
READY pushbutton. This pushbutton is installed on the MISCELLANEOUS
MODUL of the FAP near to the WATER & WASTE / EVAC function keys.
The CABIN READY memo is reflected in the TAKE OFF and LANDING check
lists and displayed on the ECAM in the cockpit as follows:
-- if the cabin is not ready :
CABIN..........CHECK
-- if the cabin is ready :
CABIN..........READY
and the CABIN READY pushbutton (LED) on the FAP illuminates.
SET THE CABIN READY INDICATION
Push the CABIN READY pushbutton on the FAP to set the respective indication,
but depending on the actual FLIGHT PHASE the CABIN READY function is only
available during :
-- TAKE OFF procedure after the first engine is started (oil pressure high), or
-- LANDING procedure when FLIGHT PHASES 6,7 or 8 are reached (altitude <
2000ft) and the slats are extended.
RESET OF THE CABIN READY INDICATION
An automatic reset of the CABIN READY indication is performed after take off,
on the ground after landing and also for go-around. In detail the following
conditions must be fulfilled :

-- during TAKE OFF after FLIGHT PHASE 4 is reached (airspeed > 80kts), or
-- after LANDING when FLIGHT PHASE 9 (airspeed < 80kts) + 30sec is
reached, or
-- during GO AROUND with slats retracted in FLIGHT PHASE 5, 6 or 7, or
-- after TOUCH AND GO with slats retracted in FLIGHT PHASE 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8,
or
-- when the CABIN READY pushbutton on the FAP is pushed a second time.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL PA SYSTEM SEP 13/07
ALL
PA ANNOUNCEMENTS FROM THE COCKPIT
The passenger address system distributes the PA related announcements from

the cockpit, the attendant stations, the PRAM and the VCU to all assigned PAX
loudspeakers.
PA ANNOUNCEMENTS FROM THE COCKPIT
With the handset or the equipment connected to the Audio Management Unit
(AMU) such as boomset, microphone or oxygen mask a PA announcement from
the cockpit can be initiated.
DIRECT PA VIA COCKPIT HANDSET
Hook off the cabin handset and push the PTT key on the handset during the
DIRECT PA announcement.
COCKPIT HANDSET WITH PTT-PUSHBUTTON
PTT
PTT
(PUSH TO TALK)
KEYBOARD
NOC 03040 01770 0001

Note: To raise the attention before an announcement from the cockpit will be
made a "HIGH-LOW" chime is heard through the loudspeakers and the
related message PA IN USE is displayed on all AIPs.

PA FROM THE COCKPIT
ALL
DIRECT PA VIA COCKPIT AUDIO EQUIPMENT
It is also possible to make DIRECT PA announcements through the acoustic

equipment.
The following table shows the available equipment with its functions and the
necessary handling procedure during the announcement:
Equipment PA PA INT/RAD Push-to-talk
connected Transmission Reception switch on button on
to AMU P/B on knob on Audio Handmike
Audio Audio Selector
Selector Selector Panel
Panel Panel
BOOMSET PRESSED OUT RAD - - -
or
OXYGEN MASK
HANDMIKE PRESSED OUT - - - PRESSED
Note: When the rectangular PA TRANSMISSION pushbutton is pressed three

green lines come on.

AUDIO SELECTOR PANEL (ASP)
A A
ON
VOICE RESET
PA 1
VOR1 VOR2 MKR ILS MLS ADF1 ADF2
2
AUDIO SELECTOR PANEL 1,2,3

NOC 03040 01771 0001
1 PA TRANSMISSION push button
2 PA RECEPTION knob
Note: To raise the attention before an announcement from the cockpit will be
made a "HIGH-LOW" chime is heard through the loudspeakers and the
related message PA IN USE is displayed on all AIPs.

PA MONITORING
The cockpit crew can monitor the PA announcements in the cabin via the AMU
by pushing the PA reception knob on an AUDIO SELECTOR PANEL (ASP).
Turning this knob clockwise or counterclockwise controls the volume of the
announcement.
Selecting another function stops the PA MONITORING procedure.

ALL
PA ANNOUNCEMENTS FROM AN ATTENDANT HANDSET
PA ANNOUNCEMENTS FROM AN ATTENDANT HANDSET
A PA announcement can be made with all cabin handsets located at every cabin
attendant station.
CABIN HANDSET WITH KEYBOARD
PTT
PTT
(PUSH TO TALK)
KEYBOARD
NOC 03040 02397 0001
If the keys on the handset are pushed in a specific sequence different

connections for the respective PA announcements can be set.
The following table shows the functions which are available from the cabin
handsets:
FUNCTION KEY SEQUENCE CONNECTION (FROM =>TO)
DIRECT PA PTT Handset => All LS in the cabin
PA ALL PA ALL + PTT Handset => All LS in the cabin

PA INDICATIONS
During the dial procedure the dial information is displayed in the upper row of
the respective Attendant Indication Panel (AIP) .
Example: Perform the PA ALL function
STEP ACTION RESULT on the RESULT on all

(on the handset) calling AIP the other AIP’s
(upper row) (lower row)
1 Hook off the handset # (flashing) (no result)
2 Press the ALL key on the PA ALL (no result)
handset
3 Press PTT and start the > PA ALL PA IN USE
announcement
Additional the following handset operation related messages could appear in the
upper row of the calling AIP while the dialing procedure:
INFORMATION EXPLANATION
BUSY Called station is engaged
CNCL Communication is interrupted by a call with a higher priority
OVER Station is connected to a call with a higher priority
ERR A wrong code has been dialed
RST Reset push button is pressed
WAIT PA CALL Passenger Address system is already in use
If the dial procedure is finished the respective status information is indicated on

all assigned AIP’s.
To raise the attention for these communication informations a "HIGH-LOW" chime
is heard and the green AIP indicator light comes on additionally. This light is
located on the right side of the AIP.
A red indicator light for system and emergency messages is located on the left
side, completed by an information which is displayed in the lower row of the AIP.
Refer to CIDS - System Components.

ANNOUNCEMENTS
ALL
PA ANNOUNCEMENT FROM ADDITIONAL CABIN EQUIPMENT
Optionally an additional hand-microphone can be installed in the FWD area of

the cabin. This hand-mike has only restricted capabilities (DIRECT PA).
PA FUNCTIONAL AND SOURCE PRIORITIES
The PA functions and sources have different priorities.
FUNCTIONAL PRIORITIES
The PA function with the higher priority overrides the function with the lower
priority.
The priority levels are given in the following table:
LEVEL FUNCTION
1 Direct PA + PA from AMU
2 All remaining PA functions
Note: Level 1 has the highest and level 2 the lowest priority.
SOURCE PRIORITIES
A PA source with a higher priority interrupts a PA announcement from a source

with a lower priority. Only the announcement from the source with the higher
priority is heard.
The sources have the following priority levels:
LEVEL SOURCE
1 Boom Set, Oxygen Mask (AMU)
2 Cockpit Handset (HS)
3 Purser Handset (HS)
4 Attendant Handset (HS)
5 Prerecorded Announcement (PRAM)

LEVEL SOURCE
6 EVAC Signalling Tone
7 Video or Entertainment Sounds (VCU)
8 Boarding Music
Note: If the purser handset is not assigned (optional), it will have the same
priority level as an attendant handset.
Level 1 has the highest and level 8 the lowest priority with the exception
that an announcement coming from a source of a lower priority has a
higher functional priority.
PA SETTINGS
It is possible to cancel selected and initiated functions manually.

Furthermore the PA system adjusts the volume function in some cases
automatically.
RESET OF SELECTED PA FUNCTIONS
Hooking the handset to the cradle or pushing the RESET button on the handset
cancels a PA function initiated by the handsets functional keys.
If a function is initiated by pushing the PTT button, the release of this button
cancels the function.
VOLUME ADJUSTMENT
In the case of LOW CABIN-PRESSURE or ENGINE ON the volume of a PA

announcement increases automatically. This happens also in the case of a data
bus failure.
To avoid a feedback the volume of the PA announcement in the area around the
respective handset decreases automatically.
For the same reason the volume in the area of the cockpit door decreases if the
cockpit door is opened during an announcement.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL SERVICE INTERPHONE SEP 13/07
ALL
The service interphone system allows the telephone communication between the
flight crew, the cabin crew and the ground service personnel. The service
interphone system is available only when the aircraft is on ground.
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
There are 8 service interphone jacks installed at different locations of the aircraft
(e.g. one at each engine). The service personnel uses them to talk to each other
if their boomsets are connected to the jacks.

LOCATION OF THE GROUND SERVICE JACKS
SERVICE JACKS
NOC 03050 01801 0001
The flight crew or the cabin crew is also able to talk to the connected service
personnel through the acoustical equipment in the cockpit or the attendant
handsets in the cabin.
SYSTEM OPERATION
The system has an automatic and a manually activated operation mode.

It is activated automatically if the nose landing gear is extended and compressed
for more than 10 seconds.

On the other hand the system can be activated manually by the flight crew
through pressing the SVCE INT OVRD switch in the cockpit. This will be
indicated by the SVCE INT OVRD ON integral light.
SVCE INT OVRD PUSHBUTTON
A A
285VU
OXYGEN
SVCE INT G
TMR RESET OVRD
FAULT
ON ON OFF
NOC 03050 01802 0001
After the system has been activated either automatically or manually the
communication can be started from:
-- the cockpit through the acoustical equipment,
-- the attendant station by pushing SVCE INTPH + SVCE INTPH on the
keyboard of the attendant handset,
-- a service interphone jack through a connected boomset.
Note: Depending on the installed cabin handset option, the "SVCE INTPH"
named key might be replaced by the "INTPH" named key.
The message SVCE INTPH AVAIL on the AIPs indicates that at least one
boomset is connected to one of the service interphone jacks and communication
is enabled. If an attendant initiates the communication sequence from a cabin
handset the message SVCE INTPH is displayed on the AIPs.
Note: It is necessary to push and hold the SVCE INTPH key on the attendant
handset while speaking.

For communication through the audio equipment from the cockpit follow the
procedure as described hereafter:
Equipment MECH INT INT/RAD Push-to-talk
connected Transmission Reception toggle button on
to AMU P/B on ACP knob on ACP switch Handmike
on ACP
BOOMSET PRESSED OUT RAD Ð
or
OXYGEN MASK
HANDMIKE PRESSED OUT Ð PRESSED
COCKPIT TO GROUND CREW CALL-SYSTEM
In addition to the described service interphone system there is a call system

installed which allows the cockpit crew to get the attention of the ground service
personnel and vice-versa.
COCKPIT TO GROUND-CREW CALL
On the CALLS overhead panel 211VU push the MECH pushbutton-switch to call
for ground service personnel.

GROUND-CREW CALL COMPONENTS IN THE COCKPIT
B A
A A
A B
INDICATOR LIGHT
TOGGLE SWITCH P/B SWITCH
211VU
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL 1,2,3 NOC 03050 01803 0001
In order to get the attention of the ground crew an external horn will sound
during the time the MECH pushbutton-switch is pressed. It is located in the nose
gear well.
Additionally, the blue COCKPIT CALL indicator light on the panel 925VU comes
on (located near the ground power receptacle).
If the MECH pushbutton-switch is released the external horn will stop but the
indicator light will remain on.
To reset this light the HORN RESET push and release the pushbutton-switch on
the panel 925VU.
Furthermore, these warnings are provided through the external horn:

-- APU FIRE on ground

-- BLOWERS LOW FLOW on ground with engines shut down
-- ADIRS ON BAT on ground
-- BAT FEED WARN on ground.
GROUND-CREW TO COCKPIT CALL
Push the COCKPIT CALL pushbutton-switch located on the panel 925VU in

order to call for the cockpit crew.
OUTSIDE COCKPIT-CALL COMPONENTS
FR8 FR7
108VU A
INDICATOR
LIGHT
A
P/B SWITCH
MECHANIC CALL HORN P/B SWITCH NOC 03050 01804 0001
The amber MECH indicator light on the ACP in the cockpit will flash.
Additionally, the buzzer will sound through the audio-warning loudspeakers as
long as the COCKPIT CALL pushbutton-switch is pushed.
To cancel the MECH legend, push the RESET pushbutton-switch on the Audio
Control Panel and release it.
Note: Perform the RESET procedure in less than one minute after the call,
otherwise the MECH legend goes off automatically.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN INTERPHONE SEP 13/07
INTERPHONE SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION
ALL
The cabin and flight crew interphone system allows the telephone communication
between all attendant stations and the cockpit.
There can be one or more links initialized at the same time. In the conference
mode it is possible to communicate between more than two interphone stations.
CALLS FROM THE COCKPIT
All calls from the cockpit can be initiated through:

-- The audio equipment (boomset, microphone or oxygen mask) connected to the
AMU and the available functions on the AUDIO SELECTOR PANEL(s) (ASP) or
-- The cockpit handset and its functions.
CALLS WITH THE HELP OF THE AUDIO EQUIPMENT
Choose the call destination and press the related pushbutton on the CALLS
panel in the cockpit.

PANELS IN THE COCKPIT
B A
A A
A B
21VU
AUDIO SELECTOR PANEL 1,2,3 NOC 03060 01805 0001
The following table shows the selectable call destinations, the related pushbutton
on the CALLS panel 21VU to be pushed and the associated aural/visual effects
in the cabin.
DESTINATION P/B on CHIME Light on ACP Info on AIP
CALLS panel
FWD attendant FWD 1 x Hi I-Lo I Steady RED on "CALL CAPT" +
station FWD ACPs steady GREEN
light
AFT attendant AFT 1 x Hi I-Lo I Steady RED on "CALL CAPT" +
station AFT ACPs steady GREEN
light

DESTINATION P/B on CHIME Light on ACP Info on AIP

CALLS panel
Emergency call EMER CALL 3 x Hi I-Lo Flashing RED "EMERGENCY
ON I on all LS on all ACPs CALL" + flashing
RED light
After hooking off the handset at the called station a communication link to the
cockpit is established.
To make announcements select some settings on an AUDIO SELECTOR PANEL
as shown in the following table:
Equipment ATT CAB INT/RAD Push-to-talk
connected Transmission Reception switch button on
to AMU P/B on ASP knob on ASP on ASP Handmike
BOOMSET PRESSED OUT RAD - - -
or
OXYGEN MASK
HANDMIKE PRESSED OUT - - - PRESSED
Note: When the rectangular ATT TRANSMISSION pushbutton is pressed three

green lines come on.
CALLS FROM THE CABIN
Different functions are available if the keys on the cabin handsets are pushed in
a given sequence:
EMERGENCY CALL INITIATED FROM THE CABIN (PURSER/ATTENDANT

STATION)
FUNCTION KEY CONNECTION CHIME Light on ASP

SEQUENCE TO
EMER call EMER CALL HS in the Buzzer 3 x 3s EMER CALL +
cockpit ATT flashing
After hooking off the handset at the called station a communication link is
established and announcements can be made.

PURSER/ATTENDANT STATION CALLS COCKPIT
FUNCTION KEY CONNECTION CHIME Light on ASP

SEQUENCE TO
COCKPIT call CAPT HS in the Buzzer 3s ATT flashing
cockpit
After hooking off the handset in the cockpit a communication link is established
and announcements can be made.
PURSER/ATTENDANT CALLS ALL ATTENDANT STATIONS
FUNCTION KEY CONNEC- CHIME Indication Light on

SEQUENCE TION on AIP ACP
TO
All ATTND ALL ATTND All HS in 1 x Hi I-Lo Steady Steady RED
call the cabin I on all GREEN light light on all
ATTND LS + "ALL" ACP’s
established and announcements between the purser and the attendants can be
made.
PURSER/ATTENDANT CALLS ATTENDANT STATION
FUNCTION KEY CONNEC- CHIME Indication Light on

SEQUENCE TION on AIP ACP
TO
FWD FWD HS at 1 x Hi I-Lo Steady Steady RED
ATTND call ATTND ATTND I on all GREEN light light on FWD
station FWD ATTN LS + "Call AFT ACP’s
L+ FWD R L" or "Call
AFT R"
AFT LH AFT L HS at 1 x Hi I-Lo Steady Steady RED
ATTND call ATTND ATTND I on all GREEN light light on AFT
station AFT ATTN LS + "CallFWD L ACP
L L" or "Call
AFT R"
AFT RH AFT R HS at 1 x Hi I-Lo Steady Steady RED
ATTND call ATTND ATTND I on all GREEN light light on AFT
station AFT ATTN LS + "Call FWD R ACP
R L" or "Call
AFT L"

established and announcements between the purser and the attendant can be
made.
RESET OF SELECTED INTERPHONE FUNCTIONS
A selected call from the cockpit is cancelled, when all requested stations have
reset the function on the handset through pushing the RESET button.
The call function is automatically resetted after a time period of approx. 5
minutes, if no requested handset accepts the call.
All other interphone functions can be resetted through hooking on the handset to
the cradle or pushing the RESET key.
INDICATION/CHIME AND PRIORITIES OF INTERPHONE CALLS
There are optical and aural indications for the different types of interphone calls.
Additionally, these calls have fixed priorities.
INDICATIONS
During the dial procedure the dial information is displayed on the related AIP. At
the called station the respective light segment in the ACP comes on and a
related message is shown on the assigned AIP.
In the cockpit the EMER CALL indicator (for EMER CALL only) and the call
indicators on the AUDIO SELECTOR PANEL(s) are activated according the
initiated call.
CHIMES
In addition to the optical indications a chime is emitted through the loudspeakers

in the respective cabin area. These chimes consist of a sequence of one or
more tones with a high (Hi) or low (Lo) frequency.
The following table shows the different possibilities:
Type Frequency Musical Note
Lo II 392 Hz g’
Lo I 494 Hz b’
Hi I 587 Hz d"
Hi II 784 Hz g"
The aural annunciation of a cockpit call is done with the cockpit buzzer.

PRIORITIES
There are two types of priorities of interphone calls:

-- Functional priorities and
-- Source priorities.
The possible functions have different priorities, i.e. every selected function
overrides a function with a lower priority.
LEVEL FUNCTION
1 PA ALL
2 Calls from the Cockpit
3 Emergency Call
4 PA
5 Normal Call
6 Service Interphone
7 All Attendant Call
8 Reset
The sources also have different priorities, i.e. a source with a higher priority
interrupts a link to an interphone station with a lower priority. A source with a
lower priority and a selected function with a higher priority also interrupts an
existing link.
LEVEL SOURCE
1 AMU (Cockpit Audio Equipment)
2 Cockpit Handset
3 Cabin Handsets
4 PRAM
5 Evacuation Signaling Tone
6 Video / Audio
7 Boarding Music

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL PASSENGER CALL SYSTEM SEP 13/07
ALL
The PASSENGER CALL system controls the PAX call activations and indications.
These PAX calls can be initiated to call for an attendant if necessary. The
passengers can use one of the ATTENDANT CALL pushbuttons which are
installed at each seatrow and inside every lavatory.
PAX CALL INITIATED FROM A SEATROW
Pushing one of the ATTENDANT CALL pushbuttons initiates a PASSENGER

CALL.
These buttons are installed in the PASSENGER SERVICE UNIT (PSU) which is
part of the overhead stowage compartment above the seatrow.

PAX CALL VIA PSU
OVERHEAD STOWAGE EXAMPLE

COMPARTMENT PSU
ATTENDANT CALL
P/B
NOC 03070 01806 0001
INDICATIONS
After a PAX CALL is initiated:

-- the respective ATTENDANT CALL pushbutton on the PSU illuminates (steady

during flight and flashing on ground).
-- a HI chime sounds through the passenger and attendant loudspeakers in the
related cabin zone.
-- in the related cabin zone the blue indication field (LED) of the ACP comes on
steady.
-- the cabin zone related AIP shows the calling seatrow in the lower line of the
display (e.g. ’CALL SR 10 L’).
PAX CALL INITIATED FROM A LAVATORY
Pushing the ATTENDANT CALL pushbutton on the LAVATORY SERVICE UNIT

(LSU) starts a LAV CALL from a lavatory and the amber light of the related ACP
on the outside lavatory wall comes on steady.

PAX CALL VIA LSU
EXAMPLE
LAVATORY
A
ATTENDANT CALL
P/B
A
NOC 03070 01809 0001
INDICATIONS
After a PAX CALL is initiated:

-- the respective ATTENDANT CALL pushbutton on the LSU illuminates.

-- a HI chime sounds through the passenger and attendant loudspeakers of the
related cabin zone.
-- the amber call light mounted on the outside wall of the related lavatory comes
on steady.
-- in the related cabin zone the amber indication field (LED) of the ACP comes
on steady.
-- the cabin zone related AIP shows the calling lavatory in the lower line of the
display (e.g. ’CALL LAV E’).
-- an additional arrow (->) located in the lower right corner of the AIP display
indicates that more than only one call from a lavatory is initiated.
RESET OF A PAX CALL
Reset the visual effects of an initiated PAX CALL through one of the following
procedures:
-- Push the related ATTENDANT CALL pushbutton (on the PSU or LSU) again
Note: Closing the A/C doors at the end of the boarding procedure will
automatically lead to the reset of all visual effects initiated through a PAX
CALL .

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL PASSENGER LIGHTED SIGNS SEP 13/07
ALL
Different signs indicate rules of passenger behavior. They are made of colored
LED technology.
Most signs are controlled by the passenger lighted-signs system, some are
working independently from this system.
The passenger lighted-signs system controls these signs:
-- NO SMOKING (NS)
-- FASTEN SEAT BELT (FSB)
-- RETURN TO SEAT (RTS)
-- EXIT
Note: As an option, instead of NO SMOKING (NS) signs other signs (e.g.
PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICES (PED) signs) can be installed.
During taxiing, take-off and landing all signs are illuminated.

During climb, cruise and descend they are switched off (e.g. to permit smoking in
the related areas) if there are no extreme circumstances (e.g. turbulences).
Independently from the passenger lighted-signs system, each lavatory is
equipped with a LAVATORY OCCUPIED SIGN (LOS). These signs show the
location of the lavatories and indicate whether they are occupied or free.

LOCATION OF PASSENGER LIGHTED SIGNS
ALL
The NS and FSB signs are located in every PASSENGER SERVICE UNIT (PSU)
above the seatrows.
The RTS signs are part of each LAVATORY SERVICE UNIT (LSU).
The EXIT signs are located in each door area in the ceiling of the respective aisle.
The LOS are installed on the outside wall of the lavatory. In case there are two
lavatories installed in front of each other, the LOS are installed in the ceiling of
the aisle between them. If a lavatory is accessible from two different
classes/cabin areas the signs are also visible from both sides.

PASSENGER LIGHTED SIGNS
EXAMPLES
A
B
B
PSU
A NO SMOKING (NS)
FASTEN SEAT BELT (FSB)
LSU SIGN
RETURN TO SEAT SIGN

(RTS)
EXIT LAVATORY OCCUPIED SIGN
NOC 03080 06126 0001

Note: The symbols on the LOS are illuminated in GREEN if the related lavatory
is free or in RED if it is occupied.

ALL
OPERATION OF PASSENGER LIGHTED SIGNS SYSTEM
The NS and FSB/RTS signs operate in different modes:

-- ON
-- AUTO
-- OFF.
The control switches for these modes are located in the cockpit on the SIGNS
overhead panel 25VU.

SIGNS CONTROL PANEL
SIGNS
SEAT BELTS NO SMOKING EMER EXIT LT
ON ON ON
A A ARM
U U
T T OFF
OFF
O O
OFF OFF
25VU
NOC 03080 01816 0001
Note: The TOILET OCCPD indication light on panel 48VU shows the cockpit
crew if the L/H FWD lavatory is occupied or if it is free.
FASTEN SEAT BELT AND RETURN TO SEAT SIGNS
The following table gives an overview about the selectable functions of the SEAT
BELTS switch in the cockpit:
Position FSB-Signs (all) RTS-Signs (Lavatories)
ON ON ON

Position FSB-Signs (all) RTS-Signs (Lavatories)

AUTO After engine start and during After engine start and during
taxi/take-off/landing: taxi/take-off/landing:
ON ON
Other flight phases: Other flight phases:
OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
NO SMOKING AND EXIT SIGNS
The following table gives an overview about the selectable functions of the NO
SMOKING switch in the cockpit:
Position Signs in SMOKING areas Signs in NO SMOKING areas
ON ON ON
AUTO During taxi, take-off and landing: During taxi, take-off and landing:
ON ON
Other flight phases: Other flight phases:
OFF OFF
OFF OFF NS signs:
ON
EXIT signs:
OFF
Note: Every time when passenger lighted signs are switched on, a Lo-I chime is
heard through all cabin loudspeakers.
NON SMOKER AIRCRAFT
It is possible to select a NON SMOKER A/C function on the FAP. After

activating this function (by pushing the related ON/OFF button on the CABIN
PROGRAMMING page ( Refer to Zones) all NO SMOKING signs are switched
on. To unselect this function, push the ON/OFF button again.
CABIN DECOMPRESSION
In case of cabin decompression all NS and FSB signs are switched on

automatically, regardless of the position of the cockpit switches. The RTS signs
are switched off.

SIGN CHIME AND FLASH INDICATION
After activation of the NS or FSB signs:

-- a LO I chime is heard through the loudspeakers,
-- the signs flash for a time period of 5 seconds (optional) and then stay on.
SIGNS DIMMING
The passenger lighted signs are dimmed together with the general illumination (
Refer to General Illumination.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL AUDIO SEP 13/07
ALL
The AUDIO module controls the PRERECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS and

BOARDING MUSIC functions.
FAP - AUDIO MODULE
EXAMPLE
NOC 03090 02400 0001
PRERECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT
The area responsible for the PRERECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS consist of a

display, a keyboard and various function keys.
To start a prerecorded announcement push the related key followed by the
ENTER membrane switch. After the correct announcement has been found the
READY indicator comes on. To start the announcement push the START NEXT
membrane switch and the READY indication goes off.
If more than one announcement is selected, the START ALL membrane switch
activates all announcements.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL AUDIO SEP 13/07
If the ENTER membrane switch is not pushed, the selected announcement will
be accepted with a delay of approx. 5 seconds.
A LED in front of each MEMO display indicates which memory is selected for
modification.
BOARDING MUSIC
The MUSIC ON / OFF membrane switch starts the boarding music program and
the integral light of the switch comes on. Pushing the switch a second stops the
music program an d the integral light goes off.
Select another music channel with the MUSIC SEL membrane switch. The
selected channel will be shown on the numerical display.
To increase or decrease the loudness of the boarding music push the MUSIC + /
MUSIC - mebrane switches. The selected loudness level is indicated through 10
step rectangular LED row.

CABIN INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT 04.000
SYSTEMS
04.010 IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

-- IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT - GENERAL 1
-- COMPONENT LOCATION 2
04.020 MUSIC
-- MUSIC SYSTEM 1
04.030 VIDEO
-- VIDEO 1
04.040 AIRSHOW
04.050 LANDSCAPE CAMERA
04.060 TELEPHONE
04.070 INTERACTIVE GAMES
04.080 IN-SEAT POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM (ISPSS)

-- IN-SEAT POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM OPERATION 1
04.090 AIRLINE IN-FLIGHT INFORMATION SERVICES
04.100 INTERNET ACCESS

SYSTEMS
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM SEP 13/07
ALL
IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT - GENERAL
The aircraft is equipped with an entertainment system including prerecorded

music and pre-recorded videos.
Each passenger seat has a passenger control unit (PCU) installed.
For information on the PCU Refer to Music and Refer to Video.
The audio is transmitted to the seat connected headsets as well as the
passenger address loudspeakers. The video signals are transmitted to the LCD
screens (retractable as well as wall mounted).
The business class seats are equipped with in-seat power supply outlets. For the
cabin crew an additional outlet is installed in the fwd stowage. For details: Refer
to In Seat Power Supply System (ISPSS).

SYSTEMS
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM SEP 13/07
COMPONENT LOCATION
ALL
LOCATION OF THE VCC
VIDEO CONTROL
CENTER LOCATION
FWD DOOR L
NOC 04010 02356 0001

SYSTEMS
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL MUSIC SEP 13/07
ALL
MUSIC SYSTEM
The Multiplex Passenger Entertainment System (MPES) transmits prerecorded

audio entertainment programs to the passengers. Each passenger can select
entertainment programs. The passengers can hear these programs through
headsets.
ECONOMY CLASS PASSENGER CONTROL UNIT
To control the music system, use the passenger control system (PCU).
PASSENGER CONTROL UNIT
4 1
3 2
NOC 04020 02351 0001
1/2 Channel Control
To select an available music channel, push the CH UP key (1) or the CH

DOWN key (2). The selected channel is shown on the channel indicator (5).
3/4 Volume Control
To increase the headset volume, push the VOL + key (4).

To decrease the headset volume the passenger has to push the VOL - key
(3).

SYSTEMS
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL MUSIC SEP 13/07
5 Channel Indicator
The selected channel is indicated on the channel indicator (5).

SYSTEMS
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL VIDEO SEP 13/07
VIDEO
ALL
The system uses tape reproducers to replay pre-recorded programs stored on

video tapes. The programs are converted by the tape reproducers into video and
audio signals which are transmitted to the System Control Unit (SCU).
The video signals are transmitted to the LCD units.
The audio signals are transmitted via the Cabin Intercommunication Data System
(CIDS) directors and the Passenger Entertainment System (PES) so that the
program sound can be heard over the passenger address loudspeakers and the
PES headsets.
Note: PA announcements will override the video sound.
PASSENGER CONTROL UNIT
4 1
3 2
NOC 04030 02353 0001
1/2 Channel Control
To select an available music channel, push the CH UP key (1) or the CH

DOWN key (2). The selected channel is shown on the channel indicator (5).
3/4 Volume Control
To increase the headset volume, push the VOL + key (4).

To decrease the headset volume the passenger has to push the VOL - key
(3).

SYSTEMS
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL VIDEO SEP 13/07
5 Channel Indicator
The selected channel is indicated on the channel indicator (5).

SYSTEMS
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL AIRSHOW SEP 13/07
NOT APPLICABLE

SYSTEMS
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL LANDSCAPE CAMERA SEP 13/07
NOT APPLICABLE

SYSTEMS
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL TELEPHONE SEP 13/07
NOT APPLICABLE

SYSTEMS
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL INTERACTIVE GAMES SEP 13/07
NOT APPLICABLE

SYSTEMS
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL IN-SEAT POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM (ISPSS) JAN 08/08
ALL
IN-SEAT POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM OPERATION
The in-seat power supply system (ISPSS) provides 110 V /60 Hz AC for portable
electronic devices (PED).
The outlets are located in the center armrest of the business class seats for the
passengers and in the stowage for the cabin crew.
WARNING
Any usage of portable electronic devices should be coordinated and controlled
by the cabin crew to avoid any effects to the aircraft systems.
POSITION OF ISPSS OUTLET IN THE STOWAGE
A A
FWD DOOR L
ISPSS OUTLET
NOC 04080 02355 0001

SYSTEMS
R (1)

SYSTEMS
HIGHLIGHTS
(1) Deleted item ’PED Power Switch on the FAP’

SYSTEMS
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL AIRLINE IN-FLIGHT INFORMATION SERVICES SEP 13/07
NOT APPLICABLE

SYSTEMS
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL INTERNET ACCESS SEP 13/07
NOT APPLICABLE

EVACUATION DEVICES 05.000
05.010 EVACUATION ALERT SYSTEM

-- EVACUATION ALERT SYSTEM 1
05.020 COCKPIT EMERGENCY EXITS

-- CLEARVIEW WINDOWS 1
-- SLIDING WINDOWS 3
-- DESCENT ROPE 5
-- COCKPIT DOOR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 6
05.030 ESCAPE SLIDES/ SLIDE RAFTS

-- EVACUATION DEVICES 1
-- SLIDE RAFT 3
-- OFFWING SLIDE 23
-- LIFE LINES 29
05.040 AIRCRAFT CRASH POSITION

-- AIRCRAFT CRASH POSITION A320 IAE 1

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL EVACUATION ALERT SYSTEM SEP 13/07
EVACUATION ALERT SYSTEM
ALL
An emergency evacuation signalling system (integrated in the CIDS) is installed.

It provides visual and aural alert in the event of impending emergency
evacuation of the aircraft.
LOCATION
Panels provided with control and warning lights are located:

-- in the cockpit,
-- at the purser station on the FAP, and
-- at the AFT L attendant station on the AAP.
SIGNS AND CONTROLS IN THE COCKPIT
A A
NOC 05010 01833 0001

SIGNS AND CONTROLS ON THE FAP
RESET EVAC
EVAC
CMD
NOC 05010 02338 0001

SIGNS AND CONTROLS ON THE AAP
DOOR FWD DOOR AFT
FAP
AAP
A
NOC 05010 02150 0001
DESCRIPTION
The following diagrams show the available functions on the different panels:

EVAC FUNCTIONS ON THE COCKPIT OVERHEAD PANEL
1 2 3
NOC 05010 01844 0001
1 COMMAND EVAC ON
When pressed, it activates the EVAC flashlights in the cockpit and cabin, as
well as the horns in the cabin.
2 HORN SHUT OFF
When pressed, the cockpit horn is stopped.
3 CAPT / CAPT & PURS
Two different switch positions are available.

CAPT & PURS : EVAC command can be activated from the
cockpit or the FAP.
CAPT : EVAC command can be activated from the

cockpit only.

EVAC FUNCTIONS ON THE FAP
RESET EVAC
EVAC
CMD
1 2 3
NOC 05010 02339 0001
1 RESET
Symbol comes on steady when the EVAC-System is activated. Touch this

button to stop the audio warning.
2 EVAC
Symbol flashes when the EVAC-System is activated.
3 EVAC/COMD
Push this guarded button to activate the EVAC-System.

EVAC FUNCTIONS ON THE AAP
NOC 05010 02151 0001
1 RESET
Symbol comes on steady when the EVAC-System is activated. Touch this

button to stop the audio warning.
2 EVAC
Symbol flashes red only when the system is activated.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL COCKPIT EMERGENCY EXITS OCT 27/07
ALL
CLEARVIEW WINDOWS
GENERAL
The cockpit is equipped with fixed and sliding windows, which are installed on
the front and sides of the cockpit.
TYPES OF WINDOWS
1 1
2 2
1 1
NOC 05020 00051 0001

1 fixed windows
2 sliding windows
DESCRIPTION
EXTERIOR PERSPECTIVE
REAR WINDOW
(FIXED)
SLIDING WINDOW
REAR WINDOW
(FIXED)
SLIDING WINDOW
FRONT WINDOW
(WINDSHIELD) NOC 05020 00052 0001
There are four FIXED WINDOWS

-- two are located on each side of the cockpit, and are fitted with an anti-icing
and defogging system.
-- The other two are located on the front windshield, and are also of the integral
security type, specifically designed to protect against bird impact.
There are two SLIDING WINDOWS
They are located on each side of the windshield, and can be used as crew
emergency exits. If an emergency occurs, the cockpit crew can use descent
ropes to exit the cockpit through the opened sliding windows.

ALL
SLIDING WINDOWS
OPERATION
SLIDING WINDOWS
SLIDING WINDOW
GUIDING TRACK
CONTROL HANDLE
NOC 05020 01667 0001

OPENING
. Press down the operating lever to disengage the locking pins from their
latches. As soon as the operating lever is pressed, a red indicator appears to
show that the window is unlocked.
. Continue pressing down on the operating lever, while simultaneous rotating it
and pulling it downward to move the window backward.
CLOSING
. Move the control lever backward to unlock the window.
. Push the operating lever forward to move the window panel in front of its
fixed frame.
. Continue pushing the operating lever forward to slide the window panel back
into its frame, until the locking pins are engaged.

DESCENT ROPE
ALL
A 5.5 meter (17.04 feet) knotted rope is stored above each sliding window, on
either side of the overhead panel.
Both stowage coverplates are marked with red labels, and are held closed by
magnets, which can be quickly opened.
The ropes and their brackets can support a load of 900 kg (1980 lbs).
GRAPHIC SOLUTION TITLE
ESCAPE
ROPE
STOWAGE
GROUND
NOC 05020 01668 0001

ALL
R (1)
COCKPIT DOOR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
A forward-opening hinge door separates the cockpit from the passenger

comportment. It has an electric-locking latch, controlled by pilots. In normal
conditions, when the door is closed, it remains locked. Upon cockpit entry
request, the flight crew can authorize entry by unlocking the door, which remains
closed until it is pushed open.
When the flight crew does not respond to request for entry , the door can be
unlocked by the cabin crew, by entering a two to seven digit code (programmed
by the airline) on the keypad, installed on the lateral side of the Forward
Attendant Panel (FAP).
The door is bulletproof and fully compliant with rapid decompression requirements.
A mechanical override enables the pilots to open the door from the cockpit side.
Refer to COCKPIT DOOR OPERATION

COCKPIT DOOR
SPY HOLE
DOOR HANDLE
LOCKING MECHANICAL
LATCHES OVERRIDE
ESCAPE PANEL
QUICK RELEASE
PINS
NOC 05020 00053 0001
Note:

1. The escape panel enables the flight crew to evacuate the cockpit, in
case of an emergency, when the door is jammed or stuck. This panel
can only be removed from the cockpit side by pulling the quick release
pin towards the centre of the flap, and kicking the panel open.
2. In case of an electrical supply failure, the door is automatically
unlocked, but remains closed.
3. If installed and in the event that one locking latch strike fails, or in case
of a total CDLS failure, a deadbolt is located at the level of the center
latch area of the cockpit door. This deadbolt bolts the door from the
cockpit side.
4. In case of rapid decompression in the cockpit, the door is automatically
unlocked.
In case of a rapid decompression in the cabin, venting from the cockpit
to the cabin is ensured via existing gaps between the cockpit and the
cabin, and with additional grids installed in the ceiling panels .
KEYPAD LOCATION AND OPERATION
The keypad is located at the lateral side of the Forward Attendant Panel (FAP)
and is used by the cabin crew to request pilots to open the door.
KEYPAD
1 2
3 4
5 6
2
7 8
9 0
* #
NOC 05020 00054 0001

1 LOCKED/UNLOCKED DOOR INDICATOR
GREEN light ON : The door has been unlocked either by a flight

crew action, or automatically (during 5 seconds)
when no flight crew action is performed during the
delay following an emergency access request. The
door can be pushed open.
GREEN light flashes: An emergency request to enter the cockpit has

been made ; the buzzer will sound continuously in
the cockpit, but no action has yet been taken by
the flight crew.
RED light ON : The flight crew has denied access, and the door
remains locked.
2 DIGITAL KEYPAD
The keypad is used to sound the buzzer in the cockpit for one to nine
seconds (three seconds by default), by entering a zero to seven-digit code,
as programmed by the airline, followed by the ’#’ key.
It is also used to enter the two to seven-digit emergency code, followed by
the ’#’ key, when the flight crew does not respond.
COCKPIT DOOR CONTROL PANEL
LOCATION
A
NOC 05020 00055 0001

The secure cockpit door is controlled by a toggle switch, located on the central
pedestal.
CONTROL PANEL
1
2
NOC 05020 00056 0001
1 COCKPIT DOOR toggle switch
UNLOCK position : This position is used to enable the cabin

crewmember to open the door. The switch must
be pulled and maintained in the unlock position
until the door is pushed open.
NORM position : All latches are locked, and EMERGENCY access

is possible for the cabin crew.
LOCK position : Once the button has been moved to this position,
the door is locked; emergency access, the buzzer,
and the keypad are inhibited for a preselected
time (5 to 20 minutes).
Note:
1. If the LOCK position has not been used by the pilot, for at least 5
to 20 minutes, the cabin crew is able to request an emergency
access to open the cockpit door.
2. The UNLOCK position overrides and resets any previous selection.

3. In case of electrical an supply failure, the cockpit door is

automatically unlocked, but remains closed.
2 COCKPIT DOOR Fault Open indicator
OPEN light ON : The door is not closed, or not locked.
OPEN light flashes : The cabin crew has started an emergency access
procedure. If there is no reaction from the flight
crew, the door will unlock at the end of the
adjustable time delay (15 to 120 seconds).
FAULT : This light comes when a system failure has been

identified (Example : latch, pressure sensors,
control unit).

HIGHLIGHTS
(1) Addition of a note regarding the deadbolt (if installed)

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL ESCAPE SLIDES/ SLIDE RAFTS SEP 13/07
EVACUATION DEVICES
ALL
SLIDE RAFTS and ESCAPE SLIDES are installed at each door/exit:
-- a SLIDE RAFT at each FWD and AFT cabin door
-- an ESCAPE SLIDE at each pair of the overwing emergency exits
They take care of a quick passenger and crew evacuation in case of an
emergency.

DOOR AND OVERWING SLIDE LOCATION
DUAL LANE
SLIDE RAFT
FWD CABIN DOORS
OVERWING
EMERGENCY
EXITS
DUAL LANE
OFFWING
ESCAPE SLIDES
AFT CABIN DOORS DUAL LANE

SLIDE RAFT
NOC 05030 02162 0001

SLIDE RAFT
ALL
All SLIDE RAFTS are of the DUAL LANE type and have two functions:
-- as an escape slide,
-- as an inflatable raft after ditching.
OPERATION
The deployment and inflation of the SLIDE RAFT is automatically initiated when
the door is opened in the ARMED mode.
As the door opens, the girt tension pulls the pack board from the door. It falls
below the doorsill, the speed lacing releases and the SLIDE RAFT falls from the
pack board. A firing lanyard actuates the regulator valve, primary gas is supplied
to the aspirators and the inflation is initiated.
An intermediated TIE DEVICES restrain the SLIDE RAFT to approximately one
third of its extended length, to prevent that the SLIDE RAFT inflate underneath
the fuselage.
When the SLIDE RAFT becomes sufficiently pressurized, the intermediate tie
releases and the SLIDE RAFT extends outwards and downwards to contact the
ground.
The inflation reservoir sensors are connected to the CIDS and the pressure of
the inflation cylinder is indicated on the FAP.

RELEASED SLIDE-RAFT
TIE DEVICES A
TIE DEVICES
ASPIRATOR
NOC 05030 02848 0001
MANUAL INFLATION
If the automatic inflation is not initiated, the red manual inflation handle, located
on the girt extension of the SLIDE RAFT, has to be pulled. The handle is
located on the right side of the girt extension.

MANUAL INFLATION
FOR PITCHING
USE ONLY
PULL TO
INFLATE
NOC 05030 02849 0001
The SLIDE RAFTS inflate and deploy within 3 seconds.

The evacuation capacity for one SLIDE RAFT is 60 PAX per minute and lane.

SLIDE RAFT DEPLOYMENT
DUAL LANE
SLIDE RAFT
BOARDING
STIRRUP
DECELERATION
STRIPS NOC 05030 02850 0001
RAFT MODE
After inflation one of the crew members enter the SLIDE RAFT and move to the
toe end. Then the passengers board the RAFT and start seating at the toe end.

Last person to board the RAFT must be also a crew member who has to
release the SLIDE RAFT from the A/C.
RAFT MODE
NOC 05030 02852 0001
DISCONNECTION STEP 1
To disconnect the SLIDE RAFT from the A/C, pull the disconnect handle.

SLIDE RAFT DISCONNECTION STEP 1
DISCONNECT
HANDLE
NOC 05030 02853 0001
DISCONNECTION STEP 2
The SLIDE RAFT is moored to the A/C by means of a mooring line which is
attached to the girt extension remaining on the cabin floor.
To release the mooring line pull the manual release handle located in a pouch
on the top of the SLIDE RAFT (Fig.1).
If the mooring line is not released, use the hook knife for manual releasing (Fig.2).

SLIDE RAFT DISCONNECTION STEP 2
1 2
NOC 05030 02854 0001
SURVIVAL KIT
A SURVIVAL KIT is provided for each SLIDE RAFT.
They are stowed:

-- in an overhead rack next to the FWD and AFT PAX doors (2 in each).
The SURVIVAL KITS will be take out of the stowages (Fig 1). Attach one kit at
each SLIDE RAFT by means of a strap with SNAP HOOK (Fig 2).

SURVIVAL KIT LOCATION
NOC 05030 02855 0001
SURVIVAL KIT EQUIPMENT

Following items will be found in a standard a SURVIVAL KIT:

-- Kit 1:
-- dehydrated sponge
-- bailing bucket
-- whistle
-- raft repair kit
-- sea dye marker
-- signalling mirror
-- survival manual
-- knife
-- first aid equipment
-- Kit 2:
-- ointment burn
-- water purification tablets
-- sea sickness tablets
-- night and day flares
-- Hand pump
-- Canopy
-- Canopy mast (3 pieces)
SURVIVAL KIT EQUIPMENT

SURVIVAL EQUIPMENT
KIT2 KIT1 CANOPY
CANOPY MAST
HAND PUMP
NOC 05030 02856 0001

USE OF THE HAND PUMP

The hand pump function is to add air to either top chamber or lower chamber of
the SLIDE RAFT. The pump air fittings are clearly marked.
1 2
NOC 05030 02857 0001
CANOPY
The canopy has a highly visible orange/yellow color. It gives the occupants
protection against different environmental conditions.
Drag the canopy over the canopy stubs and wrap the string around the rubber
button (Fig.1). Tie the bottom of the canopy to the outboard canopy tie down
(Fig.2).

FIX UP OF THE CANOPY
1 2
NOC 05030 02858 0001
TRANSPORTATION OF A SLIDE RAFT TO ANOTHER DOOR
Only after ditching, if it happens that one cabin door is inoperative, its
corresponding SLIDE RAFT can be disconnected, transported and operated from
any other cabin door, which has already been operated and its SLIDE RAFT
disconnected.
INOPERATIVE DOOR
The slide raft arming lever of the inoperative door is in the "ARMED" mode:
- Release the cover attach straps and remove the decorative cover.

REMOVAL OF THE DECORATIVE COVER
NOC 05030 02859 0001
Portability instructions
LABEL POSITION ON THE PACK BOARD
B
A
NOC 05030 02860 0001
-- step 1 to 5, are written on the pack board

INSTRUCTION LABEL A
NOC 05030 02861 0001
-- step 6 to 12, are written on the pack board
INSTRUCTION LABEL B
NOC 05030 02862 0001
DISCONNECTION OF THE SLIDE RAFT PACKAGE
STEP 1:
-- release the girt bar, pull the yellow lanyard below pack in a direction of 45˚
AFT

STEP 1
A NOC 05030 02863 0001
STEP 2:
-- pull the red handles on top of the pack board

STEP 2
NOC 05030 02864 0001
STEP 3-5:
-- grab sides of pack board and lift unit off door mountings
-- disconnect wire harness behind pack board by turning connector counter
clockwise
-- invert the unit (see STEP 6)

STEP 3-5
NOC 05030 02865 0001
STEP 6+7:
-- stow soft cover facing up
-- girt bar on top of this

STEP 6+7
NOC 05030 02866 0001
STEP 8:
-- carry unit to alternative door
STEP 9:
-- place in front of door, soft cover up, arrows pointing out board

STEP 9
DOOR SILL
OUTSIDE VIEW
NOC 05030 02867 0001
STEP 10:
-- remove other girt bar, remaining at alternate door
STEP 10
NOC 05030 02869 0001
STEP 11+12:
-- insert the girt into fittings

STEP 11+12
NOC 05030 02870 0001
-- Roll unit out of door - Pull handle to inflate
SLIDE RAFT LIGHTING SYSTEM
Each SLIDE RAFT is equipped with an integrated lighting system. A light

harness is attached on the upper side along of each longitudinal tube and across
the bottom of the SLIDE.
The lighting system is automatically activated by the slide deployment. The lights
have the same power supply as the cabin emergency lights. If no aircraft power
available the lights are illuminated for a period of a least 12 minutes from the
cabin Emergency Power Supply Units (EPSU).

SLIDE RAFT LIGHTING LOCATION
LIGHT HARNESS
LIGHT
NOC 05030 02871 0001

OFFWING SLIDE
ALL
The OFFWING SLIDE are of DUAL LANE type and are installed in the wing
fuselage facing AFT of the overwing exits.
Operation
The SLIDE inflation is automatically initiated if one emergency exit is opened.
The ESCAPE SLIDE inflates and deploys over the wing (see Fig. 1 to 4). The
SLIDE can also be inflated manually after the emergency exit is opened by
pulling the MANUAL INFLATION HANDLE.
It takes about 5 seconds for the ESCAPE SLIDE to be ready for evacuation.
The evacuation capacity for one OFFWING SLIDE is 60 PAX per minute per lane.

OFFWING SLIDE INFLATION
(FIG.1) (FIG.2)
(FIG.3) (FIG.4)
NOC 05030 01850 0001
Manual Inflation
If the SLIDE AUTOMATIC INFLATION does not occur, pull the MANUAL
INFLATION HANDLE installed in the HATCH FRAME of each emergency exit.

MANUAL INFLATION
A
EXIT
HATCH FRAME
A
A
RED MANUAL
INFLATION HANDLE
AUTOMATIC
INFLATION
MECHANISM
NOC 05030 02875 0001
Description
The ESCAPE SLIDES for the emergency exits are equipped as follows:

OFFWING SLIDE DEPLOYMENT
RAMP RAIL
RAMP PLATFORM
RESTRAINT TIE DEVICES
RAIL TUBES
ASPIRATOR DUAL LANE

ESCAPE SLIDES
LIGHTS
NOC 05030 01852 0001
OFFWING SLIDE LIGHTING SYSTEM
Each OFFWING SLIDE is equipped with an integrated lighting system. A light

harness is attached on the upper side along of each longitudinal tube and across
the bottom of the SLIDE.
The lighting system is automatically activated by the slide deployment. The lights
have the same power supply as the cabin emergency lights. If no aircraft power
supply available the lights are illuminated for a period of a least 10 minutes from
the cabin Emergency Power Supply Units (EPSU).

OFFWING SLIDE LIGHTING LOCATION
LIGHTS HARNESS
LIGHTS
NOC 05030 01853 0001
DAMAGED OVERWING SLIDE OPERATION
In case of overwing slide damaged or deflated it can still be used as a hand

hold escape chute.
-- look for the snap hook (Fig.1)
-- the snap hook must be fixed to the hook attachment point on the wing (Fig.2)
-- four crew members must hold the slide, two on each side (Fig.3)

DAMAGED OVERWING SLIDE
(FIG.1)
WING SURFACE
(FIG.2)
(FIG.3)
NOC 05030 02876 0001

LIFE LINES
ALL
Four additional LIFE LINES are provided.

Note: Only in the event of ditching the LIVE LINES must be installed, to assure
the passengers a safe way to the ramp section.
LOCATION
The LIFE LINES are stowed in the hatrack above the RH and LH emergency
exit doors.
INSTALLATION
The LIFE LINES must be fixed with the SNAP HOOK between the DOOR-STOP
FITTING located on the upper corner of the overwing emergency exit door
frames and the hook located on the center of the wing surface. After mooring,
the LIFE LINE must be pulled tight with the PULL TAB. The SLIDING BUCKLE
hold the LIFE LINE tight for the correct length.

LIFE LINE INSTALLATION
A
SNAP HOOD
SLIDING A
BUCKLE
PULL TAB
NOC 05030 02885 0001

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL AIRCRAFT CRASH POSITION SEP 13/07
ALL
AIRCRAFT CRASH POSITION A320 IAE
AIRCRAFT CRASH POSITION A320 IAE
3 2 4
1
NOC 05040 02348 0001

CRASH POSITION CHART A320 IAE
SILL HEIGHT RELATIVE TO CRITICAL CRASH CONDITIONS A320 IAE
WING WING PITCH OF ROLL AROUND

GROUND FWD DOOR AFT DOOR LONGIT. AXIS LONGIT.
CONFIGURATION (2nd EMERG Exit) (1st EMERG Exit)
LINE NOSE DOWN AXIS
LH RH LH RH LH RH LH RH
1 ALL GEARS DOWN (NORMAL) 3400 3400 3790 3790 3790 3790 3400 3400 0 0
2 MAIN GEARS UP NOSE GEARS DOWN 3358 3358 3045 3045 2980 2980 1462 1462 −4.43 0
3 MAIN GEARS DOWN NOSE GEAR UP 1869 1869 3372 3372 3470 3470 4700 4700 6.6 0
4 ALL GEARS UP 3500 3500 3020 3020 2938 2938 1150 1150 −5.5 0
NOSE GEAR + ONE MAIN GEAR UP.

5 3226 3522 3402 3710 3282 3670 2688 2918 −1.34 −4.46
ONE MAIN GEAR DOWN LEANING BACK
NOC 05040 02349 0001


OXYGEN 06.000
06.010 GENERAL
-- GENERAL 1
06.020 COCKPIT
-- DESCRIPTION 1
-- OPERATION 3
-- LOCATION 4
-- LATERAL CONSOLES 6
-- CONTROLS AND INDICATORS 12
-- PORTABLE BREATHING EQUIPMENT 15
06.030 CABIN
-- DESCRIPTION 1
-- OXYGEN UNITS LOCATION 2
-- OPERATIONAL SEQUENCE 4
-- CONTROLS AND INDICATORS 6
-- OXYGEN MASK 8
-- OXYGEN CONTAINER 15
-- CABIN CREW AND LAVATORY OXYGEN UNIT 18
06.040 PORTABLE BREATHING EQUIPMENT

-- GENERAL 1
-- PORTABLE BREATHING EQUIPMENT (PBE) 2
-- PORTABLE OXYGEN CYLINDER 5

OXYGEN 06.010
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GENERAL SEP 13/07
GENERAL
ALL
The oxygen system consists of :

-- A cockpit-fixed oxygen system, which supplies adequate breathing oxygen to
the cockpit occupants in case of depressurization, or emission of smoke and
noxious gases.
-- A cabin-fixed oxygen system, which supplies oxygen for cabin occupants
(passengers and cabin crew) in case of depressurization.
-- A portable oxygen system, which is provided in both the cockpit and cabin
and is to be used :
--
. As PROTECTION for the crew during on board emergencies.
. For FIRST AID purposes.

OXYGEN 06.020
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL COCKPIT SEP 13/07
DESCRIPTION
ALL
The cockpit’s fixed oxygen system consists of:

-- A high-pressure cylinder in the left-hand lower fuselage
-- A pressure regulator directly connected to the cylinder that delivers oxygen at
a pressure suitable for the user
-- Two overpressure safety systems to vent oxygen overboard, through a safety
port, if the pressure gets too high
-- A supply solenoid valve that allows the crew to shut off the distribution system
-- Three full-face quick donning masks, stowed in readily accessible boxes
adjacent to crewmembers’seats (one per seat)

OXYGEN 06.020
DESCRIPTION
MASK MAN ON OXYGEN

R
PASSENGER CREW SUPPLY
A SYS ON
U
T
OFF
O
FULL FACE QUICK

DONNING MASK
PRESSURE
REGULATOR STORAGE
BOX
OVERPRESSURE
HOSE
DISTRIBUTION
MANIFOLD
SOLENOID
OXYGEN
VALVE
CYLINDER
P
SAFETY
PORT MANUAL
ISOLATION
VALVE
DIRECT READING
PRESSURE GAGE
DOOR/OXY OXY 1850 PSI

REGUL LO PR
NOC 06020 00214 0001

OXYGEN 06.020
OPERATION
ALL
The crewmember squeezes the red grips to pull the mask out of its box. This
action causes the mask harness to inflate.
A mask-mounted regulator supplies a mixture of air and oxygen, or pure oxygen,
or perform emergency pressure control. With the regulator set on NORMAL, the
user breathes a mixture of cabin air and oxygen up to the cabin altitude at
which the regulator supplies 100% oxygen. The user can select 100%, in which
case the regulator supplies pure oxygen at all cabin altitudes.
If required by the situation, the user can use the emergency overpressure
rotating knob and receive pure oxygen at positive pressure.
The storage box contains a microphone lead with a quick-disconnect for
connection to the appropriate mask microphone cable.
Note: Each mask may have a removable film that protects the visor against
scratches. This strip is optional and may be removed from the mask at
any time.

OXYGEN 06.020
LOCATION
ALL
The cockpit’s oxygen system consists of :

-- One OXYGEN/CREW SUPPLY push-button on the overhead panel
-- The ECAM SYSTEM DISPLAY, which provides oxygen pressure information.
-- 3 (or 4, as installed) oxygen stowage boxes, which contain the quick donning
masks.

OXYGEN 06.020
LOCATION
B
A
DOOR/OXY
MASK MAN ON OXYGEN OXY 1800 PSI
R REGUL LO PR
A
SYS ON
U
T
O OFF
ECAM SYSTEM DISPLAY
CAPTAIN’S FIRST OFFICER’S

OXYGEN MASK A OXYGEN MASK
SPACE PROVISION FOR 3RD CREW MEMBER’S

4TH CREW MEMBER’S OXYGEN MASK
OXYGEN MASK (OPTIONAL)
NOC 06020 00222 0001

OXYGEN 06.020
LATERAL CONSOLES
ALL
STOWAGE BOX
STOWAGE BOX
1
BLINKER
OXYGEN
N
MASK
OX
2 ON
Y
100 %
RESET/TEST PRESS
PUSH
TO
3 TEST
FLAG AND
RESET
NOC 06020 00218 0001
1 Blinker flowmeter (yellow)
This indicator flashes when oxygen is flowing.

OXYGEN 06.020
2 RESET/TEST control slide
The crewmember presses the slide, and pushes it in the direction of the
arrow to test : the operation of the blinker, the regulator supply, system
sealing downstream of the valve ; and the regulator sealing and system
operation. Pressing the RESET control slide, after the oxygen mask has
been used, cuts off the oxygen, and the mask microphone.
3 OXY ON flag
As soon as the left flap door opens, the mask is supplied with oxygen and,
once it closes (mask still supplied with oxygen), the "OXY ON" flag appears.
MAX DONNING

OXYGEN 06.020
MAX DONNING
INFLATABLE HARNESS
1 TAKE THE MASK BY SQUEEZING 3

THE RED RIGHT HAND SIDE GRIP FACE PIECE
MICROPHONE
EMERGENCY HARNESS
OVERPRESSURE KNOB INFLATION
CONTROL
RED GRIP
NORMAL/ 100% DEMAND
2 SELECTOR REGULATOR
MICROPHONE
LEAD
REMOVE THE MASK
THE HARNESS INFLATES
4 DONNING OF THE MASK

(HARNESS INFLATED)
5 RELEASE THE RED HAND SIDE GRIP

HARNESS DEFLATES AND MAINTAINS
THE MASK 6
NOC 06020 00219 0001
CREW 0XYGEN MASK

OXYGEN 06.020
CREW 0XYGEN MASK
INFLATABLE
HARNESS
PROTECTIVE FILM *
MICROPHONE
EMERGENCY RED HARNESS

OVERPRESSURE SEL INFLATION
HANDLE
SUPPLY HOSE
NOC 06020 00220 0001
Note: The protective film can be removed to help crewmembers recover a

sufficient visual field, in case of ice accumulation on the screen, in the
event of rapid cabin depressurization.
PRESSURE REGULATOR

OXYGEN 06.020
PRESSURE REGULATOR
SUPPLY HOSE
1
HARNESS
N
100%
PUSH
EMERGENCY
PRESS
TO 2
TEST
NOC 06020 00221 0001
1 Red grips
Squeezing the right-hand side grip unlocks the two-flap door, and enables
the harness to inflate.
2 EMERGENCY pressure selector
Use of this selector creates an overpressure, which eliminates condensation

and prevents smoke, smell or ashes from entering the mask.
-- Pressing this knob generates an overpressure for a few seconds.
-- Turning the knob, in the direction of the arrow, generates a permanent
overpressure.
Note: Overpressure supply automatically is started, when cabin altitude
exceeds 30,000 feet.

OXYGEN 06.020
3 N/100 % SEL
Pushing up the button from underneath releases it, and it pops up to the N
(normal) position. Pressing it again returns it to 100 %.
100 % : The mask delivers 100% oxygen.
N : The mask delivers a mixture of air and oxygen, the content

of which varies depending on the cabin altitude. When cabin
altitude goes above 35,000 feet, the air inlet closes and the
user breathes 100 % oxygen.

OXYGEN 06.020
ALL
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
ECAM DOOR/OXY PAGE
1 3
CKPT OXY
DOOR/OXY 1300 PSI
REGUL LO PR 2
AVIONIC
CABIN SLIDE SLIDE CABIN

AVIONIC
CARGO
NOC 06020 01628 0001
1 OXY high pressure indication
Green : When pressure is ≥ 400 psi
Amber : When pressure is < 400 psi

An amber half frame appears, when oxygen pressure is <
1500 psi.
In this case, the flight crew must check that the remaining
quantity is not below the minimum.

OXYGEN 06.020
2 REGUL LO PR indication
It appears amber, if oxygen pressure on the low-pressure circuit is low (50

psi).
3 CKPT OXY indication
It is normally white.
It becomes amber, when :
-- Pressure goes below 400 psi.
-- Low oxygen pressure is detected.
-- The overhead panel’s OXYGEN CREW SUPPLY push-button is OFF.
OVERHEAD PANEL
OVERHEAD PANEL
A A
MASK MAN ON OXYGEN

R

A
SYSON
U
T OFF 1
O
NOC 06020 01629 0001

OXYGEN 06.020
The CREW SUPPLY pushbutton electrically controls the position of the low
pressure (LP) solenoid valve.
OFF : The OFF legend comes on white, and the valve is closed.
ON : (Pushbutton pressed - normal position during flight)

The valve is opened, low pressure (LP) oxygen is supplied
to the masks.

OXYGEN 06.020
PORTABLE BREATHING EQUIPMENT
ALL
Two PBE, located on the right aft console 702 VU and at the bottom of the rear
right corner in the cockpit, ensures protection of the eyes and respiratory system
of one (or two) flight crewmembers when fighting a fire, in case of smoke or
noxious gas emissions, or in the event of a loss in pressure altitude.
Refer to PORTABLE BREATHING EQUIPMENT

OXYGEN 06.020
PORTABLE BREATHING EQUIPMENT
SMOKE HOOD (PBE)

IN CONTAINER
SMOKE HOOD (PBE)

IN CONTAINER
NOC 06020 02884 0001

OXYGEN 06.030
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN SEP 13/07
DESCRIPTION
ALL
The cabin-fixed chemical oxygen system supplies oxygen to occupants, in case

of cabin depressurization.
The oxygen is produced by chemical generators, and each generator feeds a
group of 2, 3 or 4 masks.
Generator and masks are in containers, located : Above the passenger seats, in
the lavatories, in each galley, and at each cabin crew station.

OXYGEN 06.030
OXYGEN UNITS LOCATION
ALL

OXYGEN 06.030
ARRANGEMENT
4 3 4 3 4 E A
C2 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 2
G1 2 2 A
A
2 2 G5
2 A A
2 2
A
C1 4 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
A D
4 4 3 4 3
NOC 06030 02937 0001

OXYGEN 06.030
OPERATIONAL SEQUENCE
ALL
SYSTEM ACTIVATION
The cabin oxygen system automatically operates when the altitude pressure
switch, located in the avionics compartment, closes. The switch closes when the
cabin pressure decreases to a pressure equivalent to 14 000 +250, -750 feet
(4260 +76 -228 meters).
To manually operate the system, the flight crewmembers push the "MASK MAN
ON" pushbutton, located on the overhead panel.
SYSTEM OPERATION
When electrical power releases the door latches :

. The passenger oxygen container doors open and the masks drop down for
the use of passengers and cabin attendants.
. A taped message is transmitted through the Passenger Address system.
. The green "SYS ON" indicator light, on the cockpit overhead panel, comes on.
. When a user pulls the oxygen mask towards their face, the chemical oxygen
generator starts to operate and the oxygen flows.
. The mask receives pure oxygen under positive pressure for about 15 minutes,
until the generator is depleted.
If a passenger oxygen container door does not open, the cabin crew can open it
by using the manual release tool. The manual release tool has to be pushed in
a hole of the container door to disengage the electrical latch.
Note: There is no apparent inflation of the mask reservoir bag at lower altitudes
between approximately 10 000 and 19 000 feet.

OXYGEN 06.030
SYSTEM OPERATION
A
ALTITUDE PRESSURE SWITCH 16WR
A
OXYGEN
AUTO
PASSENGER
CAB ALT 14 000 ft SYS ON
TAPE ANNOUNCEMENT
MAN ELECTRICAL OR
CHEMICAL
OXYGEN GENERATOR
MASK MAN ON
R
A
U
T
OR
DOOR
O
LATCHES
MECHANICAL
MANUAL RELEASE TOOL
OXYGEN MASKS
NOC 06030 00224 0001

OXYGEN 06.030
ALL
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
COCKPIT OVERHEAD PANEL
B A
MASK MAN ON OXYGEN OXYGEN
R
TMR RESET
A
SYS ON
U FAULT
T OFF 3
O ON
2 1
B A
NOC 06030 00225 0001

OXYGEN 06.030
1 PASSENGERS SYS ON
This light comes on white, when the control for the oxygen mask doors is
activated. It remains on until the "TMR RESET" pushbutton is pressed.
2 MASK MAN ON
The guard keeps this button in the AUTO position.

AUTO : The mask doors open automatically, when the altitude
exceeds 14,000 feet.
Pressed : The mask doors open.
3 TMR RESET
Maintenance crews use this pushbutton to reset the control circuit after the
system has operated.
ON : This light comes on white, and the PASSENGER SYS ON
light goes off
FAULT : This light comes on amber, when the door latch solenoids
are energized for more than 30 seconds.

OXYGEN 06.030
OXYGEN MASK
ALL

OXYGEN 06.030
OXYGEN MASK STOWED IN UNIT
OXYGEN MASK
ASSEMBLY OXYGEN CONTAINER DOOR
LANYARD
FLEXIBLE
SUPPLY
HOSE
OUTLET
MANIFOLD OXYGEN
GENERATOR
EMERGENCY
OXYGEN
DOOR LATCH CONTAINER
STRIKER/PERCUSSION CAP
DOOR STOP (TEST)
NOC 06030 01630 0001

OXYGEN 06.030
OXYGEN MASK RELEASED
CHEMICAL
OXYGEN
GENERATOR
EMERGENCY
OXYGEN
CONTAINER
FLEXIBLE SUPPLY
HOSES
DOOR
LANYARDS
OXYGEN MASKS
RESERVOIR
BAGS
FLOW
INDICATOR
NOC 06030 01631 0001

OXYGEN 06.030
DESCRIPTION
The mask assembly consists of a reservoir bag and a face mask. The mask is
fitted with three (3) valves : The reservoir and exhaust valves, plus a
supplementary inhalation valve.
Note: The capacity of the reservoir bag is 1,5 liters.

OXYGEN 06.030
OXYGEN MASK
SUPPLEMENTARY
INHALATION VALVE EXHAUST VALVE
FACE MASK
RESERVOIR VALVE
RESERVOIR BAG
FLOW INDICATOR
NOC 06030 01632 0001
OPERATION
The oxygen unit doors open, and :

OXYGEN 06.030
-- Oxygen masks fall and hang on the lanyards.

-- User pulls one mask to their face. (The lanyard pulls the release pin from the
striker assembly of the generator).
-- The striker hits the percussion cap, and the oxygen supply is generated.
-- Oxygen flows through the flexible supply hoses into the reservoir bag.
-- The flow indicator indicates oxygen flow as follows : in case oxygen is flowing
> 0,5 lpm in the housing of the flow indicator, a green tube is visible. If there
is no oxygen flowing or < 0,5 lpm, there is noting visible inside the clear flow
indicator housing.
-- The chemical oxygen generator supplies a flow of low pressure oxygen for a
minimum of 15 minutes.
CAUTION
ONCE ACTIVATED, OXYGEN GENERATION CANNOT BE STOPPED.
-- The chemical reaction used for oxygen generation creates heat. Therefore,
after an emergency mask deployment, it is recommended that a PAX
announcement be made to advise of the possibility of the smell of burning,
smoke, and of a cabin temperature increase associated with normal operation
of the oxygen generator system.
INADVERTENT OXYGEN MASK DEPLOYMENT
CAUTION
DO NOT RESTORE AN OXYGEN MASK, IF THE OXYGEN GENERATOR IS

STARTED IN ORDER TO PREVENT THE SMELL OF BURNING OR FUMES.
RECOMMENDATIONS
-- Although it is not dangerous to the aircraft, if the oxygen mask is stored when
the oxygen generator started, this occurrence may be very unpleasant and
frightening for passengers and crew. Both the flight and cabin crewmembers
should be properly trained regarding the correct action to be adopted in the
event of an inadvertent deployment of the oxygen generator.
-- If the generator is started, the door must be left open. To minimize
inconvenience to the passengers, and avoid having the deployed masks in
their way, they should be relocated, if possible. This will also ensure they are

OXYGEN 06.030
seated in a location in which a generator has not been used, in case a

decompression occurs later in the flight. (If no alternate seats are available,
the crew should be prepared to assist these passengers in reaching spare
masks, in event of decompression).
-- If it is impossible, or undesirable to relocate the passengers, the mask could
be taken out of their way by cutting the mask tubes. Masks will then be
replaced when the generator is replaced.
-- The crew should be instructed on how to recognize whether a generator has
started. If the unit has not started, then passenger relocation, or removal of
the mask hoses is unnecessary. In that case, maintenance should be advised
of the unit that deployed, in order to check the latch condition and verify
correct mask stowage.
-- Even, if no smoke was noticed, the equipment is no longer ready for service,
once the generator has deployed. If the masks are stowed in this case, the
crew may prevent maintenance from recognizing that a generator needs
replacement, and that the masks also need inspection and possible
replacement.

OXYGEN 06.030
OXYGEN CONTAINER
ALL
MANUAL UNLOCKING
The unit door can be opened manually with the MANUAL RELEASE TOOL (MRT).
Insert the pin-end of the tool into the operating rod of the electrical latch, and
push. The unit door opens.

OXYGEN 06.030
MANUAL UNLOCKING
TEST LEVER
(MUST BE FLAT, OTHERWISE CONTAINER WILL NOT OPEN)
PROFILE STRIP
OPERATING
ROD
DOOR ASSY
MANUAL RELEASE TOOL

(MRT)
NOC 06030 00226 0001

OXYGEN 06.030
UNLOCKING SYSTEM TEST
To test the electrical unlocking system, press the cockpit’s "MAN ON" pushbutton.
To prevent the oxygen masks from falling, while performing the test, the oxygen
container test levers should all be pulled out to a 90˚ angle.
This test is performed by maintenance personnel.
Note: The number of oxygen masks, contained in the unit, is written on the inner
side of the test lever.

OXYGEN 06.030
ALL
CABIN CREW AND LAVATORY OXYGEN UNIT
DESCRIPTION
A two-mask oxygen unit is installed in each cabin crew station and in each
lavatory.
LOCATION

OXYGEN 06.030
LOCATION
EXIT
NOC 06030 00227 0001

OXYGEN 06.040
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL PORTABLE BREATHING EQUIPMENT SEP 13/07
GENERAL
ALL
The cabin attendant portable devices are installed in several places in the cabin
area. The possible positions are :
-- in the galley area,
-- in the attendant seats areas,
-- in the overhead stowages,
-- in the cabin stowages/doghouses.
They provide protection to the cabin crew during emergencies.
The portable devices consist of :
-- Protective Breathing Equipment PBE.
-- Portable high-pressure oxygen cylinders with continuous flow oxygen mask.

OXYGEN 06.040
PORTABLE BREATHING EQUIPMENT (PBE)
ALL
GENERAL
The PBE protects the user’s eyes and respiratory system against heat, smoke,
and/or noxious gases. It ensures that a minimum of 15 minutes of total
autonomy is available.
The PBE is readily available to cabin attendants. The primary purpose of the
PBE is to supply oxygen to cabin attendants, in the event of a fire, smoke
and/or noxious gases. It enables them to move about freely in the cabin and
extinguish a fire.
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
HOOD
NECK SEAL
OXYGEN
CYLINDERS
SERVICES/END OF
CONTAINER SERVICE INDICATOR
WITH BATTERY
NOC 06040 01635 0001

OXYGEN 06.040
The flight crew smoke hoods ensure protection of the flight crewmembers’ eyes
and respiratory system when fighting a fire, and in case of smoke or noxious
gas emissions, or a loss of cabin pressure altitude.
Each smoke hood is equipped with 2 oxygen cylinders, which provide 15 minutes
of oxygen.
The hood’s READY FOR USE status is ensured by checking that the hood
containers’s red indicator is not protruding.
A service/end of service indicator is located at eye level, inside the hood :
-- A flashing green light indicates that the hood is working correctly,
-- An alternating red/green flashing light signals that there is no more oxygen.
UTILIZATION

OXYGEN 06.040
UTILIZATION
1 PULL THE VELCRO STAPS TO 2 TAKE THE POUCH OUT OF

REMOVE THE COVER OF THE THE CONTAINER HOLD THE POUCH
CONTAINER TIGHTLY BETWEEN YOUR KNEES.
THEN PULL THE POUCH HANDLES
APART AND REMOVE THE HOOD
FROM THE POUCH.
3 STRONGLY SNAP APART THE 4 OPEN THE NECK SEAL AS FAR AS

OXYGEN CYLINDERS. POSSIBLE
THE OXYGEN CYLINDERS ARE WITH YOUR PALMS
ACTIVATED. FACING EACH OTHER.
THE VISUAL SERVICE INDICATOR
LIGHT FLASHES GREEN.
5 PUT THE HOOD OVER YOUR HEAD,

ASSUMING THAT ALL HAIR IS
INSIDE THE HOOD,TO AVOID
LOSS OF OXYGEN.
NOC 06040 01636 0001

OXYGEN 06.040
PORTABLE OXYGEN CYLINDER
ALL
DESCRIPTION
The high-pressure oxygen cylinder with a continuous-flow type mask supplies

first-aid oxygen to passengers. If necessary, it can also supply oxygen to cabin
attendants.
The oxygen source is a high-pressure cylinder with a capacity of 11 cubic feet
(310 liters) Normal Temperature Pressure Dry (NTPD) at a pressure of 1800 psi
(124 bars). The oxygen cylinders are installed in brackets with quick-release
clamps.

OXYGEN 06.040
DESCRIPTION
PRESSURE ON−OFF 2L 4L
REGULATOR VALVE OUTLET OUTLET
PRESSURE
GAGE PRESSURE
GAGE
ON−OFF
VALVE
HIGH−PRESSURE
RELIEF VALVE
PORTABLE OXYGEN FILLING VALVE LOW−PRESSURE

CYLINDER CYLINDER RELIEF VALVE
FOC 06040 00135 0001
UTILIZATION
The continuous-flow type mask are used to provide oxygen for first-aid treatment.
It can also supply oxygen to cabin attendants.
The continuous-flow oxygen mask is connected to the high pressure cylinder at
one of the continuous-flow outlets. The "ON-OFF" valve is turned on. The
oxygen flows through the supply hose into the reservoir bag.
The flow-indicator is the green part of the reservoir bag, and it inflates when
oxygen is flowing.

OXYGEN 06.040
When the person breathes in, oxygen flows from reservoir bag, through the
inhalation valve and into the face piece.
When the oxygen in the reservoir bag is used, the diluter valve opens, and
ambient air gets into the face piece. When inhaling and exhaling, the diluter valve
closes and the exhaled air goes through the exhalation valve to the atmosphere.

OXYGEN 06.040
UTILIZATION
EXHALE VALVE
FACE PIECE
DILUTER VALVE
INHALE VALVE
RESERVOIR BAG
CONNECTOR
CONTINOUS−FLOW
MASK CONNECTION
ON−OFF
VALVE
FLOW
INDICATOR
PRESSURE GAGE
FOC 06040 00136 0001

EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT 07.000
07.010 PORTABLE EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT

-- SYMBOL LIST 1
-- LOCATION - GENERAL OVERVIEW 6
-- LOCATION IN THE COCKPIT - FWD AREA 7
-- LOCATION IN THE COCKPIT - AFT L AREA 8
-- LOCATION IN THE COCKPIT - AFT R AREA 9
-- LOCATION IN THE CABIN - ALL AREAS 10
-- LOCATION IN THE CABIN - FWD AREA 11
-- LOCATION IN THE CABIN - MID AREA 12
-- LOCATION IN THE CABIN - AFT AREA 13
-- FIRST AID KIT 14
-- FLASHLIGHTS 15
-- FLASHLIGHT COCKPIT 17
-- MEGAPHONES 19
-- EMERGENCY RADIO BEACON 20
-- PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 24
-- PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER COCKPIT 26
-- LIFE VESTS 29
-- FLIGHT DECK ESCAPE ROPE 37
-- CRASH AXE 39
-- FIRE FIGHTING GLOVES 40
07.020 FIXED EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT

-- FIXED EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT 1
07.030 SUPPLEMENTARY MEDICAL EQUIPMENT

-- SPECIAL MEDICAL EQUIPMENT 1

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL PORTABLE EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT JAN 08/08
SYMBOL LIST
ALL
The portable emergency equipment is stowed or installed at different locations

throughout the aircraft.
The following table shows all symbols which are used to identify the installed
portable emergency equipment.
Note: Depending on the airline’s choice and/or airworthiness requirements, some
of these items may be not installed in this particular aircraft.
Symbol Designation
Crash Axe
First Aid Kit
Automated External Defibrillator (AED)
Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT)
Flashlight

Symbol Designation
Survival Kit
Crew Life Vest
Adult Life Vest
Infant Life Vest
Demo Kit
Oxygen Cylinder and Mask
Manual Release Tool

Symbol Designation
Extension Seat BeltChild Seat Belt
Emergency Medical Kit (EMK)
Smoke Hood
Fire Extinguisher (Halon)
Fire Extinguisher (Water)
Megaphone
Gloves

Symbol Designation
Baby Survival Cot
CPR Face Mask
Resuscitator
Dangerous Goods Kit
Life Line
Crowbar
Jemmy
Signalling Kit

Symbol Designation
Crew Tabard
Day-Glo Hat
Life Raft
Eyewash Bottle
The graphics in the following paragraphs show the location of the portable
emergency equipment at the day of aircraft delivery.

LOCATION - GENERAL OVERVIEW
ALL
R (1)
OVERVIEW

LOCATION IN THE COCKPIT - FWD AREA
ALL
COCKPIT - FWD AREA

LOCATION IN THE COCKPIT - AFT L AREA
ALL
COCKPIT - AFT L AREA

LOCATION IN THE COCKPIT - AFT R AREA
ALL
COCKPIT - AFT R AREA

LOCATION IN THE CABIN - ALL AREAS
ALL
In all cabin areas the adult life vests are stowed under each passenger seat,
independent of the seat type, which is installed.
LOCATION OF ADULT LIFE VEST

LOCATION IN THE CABIN - FWD AREA
ALL
CABIN - FWD AREA

LOCATION IN THE CABIN - MID AREA
ALL
R (2)
There is no portable emergency equipment installed in the MID area.

LOCATION IN THE CABIN - AFT AREA
ALL
CABIN - AFT AREA

FIRST AID KIT
ALL
At least one first aid kit must be on board the aircraft.

Note: Maybe there is no first aid kit installed at the day of aircraft delivery. Then
the airline is responsible to install the first aid kit(s) before operating the
aircraft.
Placards on the cabin furniture show the exact location of the first aid kit(s).
Each first aid kit has a content list inside.
FIRST AID KIT (EXAMPLE)
NOC 07010 01064 0001

FLASHLIGHTS
ALL
A lot of flashlights are installed throughout the aircraft.

1. DESCRIPTION
The flashlight is explosion proof and powered by dry batteries.
The flashlight is ON automatically, when removed from the retention bracket.
The flashlight is OFF automatically, when put into the retention bracket.
2. OPERATIONAL REMOVAL OF THE FLASHLIGHT
a) Hold the body of the flashlight.
b) Pull it from the retaining clip of the retention bracket.
Note: The tamper shield will be disconnected.
3. INSTALLATION OF THE FLASHLIGHT

Note: The FINS has to point to the retention bracket and the LED has to
point away from the retention bracket.
b) Let the FINS of the flashlight move into the recess of the retention bracket.
c) Push the body of the flashlight into the retaining clip.

OPERATION OF THE FLASHLIGHT
REMOVAL
RETENTION BRACKET
TAMPER SHIELD
RETAINING CLIP
LED
FINS
INSTALLATION
RETENTION BRACKET
LED
FINS
RETAINING CLIP
NOC 07010 01065 0001

ALL
FLASHLIGHT COCKPIT
Location
A lot of flashlights are installed throughout the aircraft.
Description and Operation

1. DESCRIPTION
The flashlight is powered by 2 alkaline managanese dioxide batteries.
The main components of the flashlight is:
-- a BODY.
-- a REFLECTOR ASSEMBLY.
-- a LENS.
-- a SWITCH ASSEMBLY with BUTTON and CAP.
2. OPERATION
Note: A cracked or broken flashlight bulb that remains glowing has the
potential to cause an explosion in hazardous atmospheres.
b) Pull it from the bracket.
c) Operation Mode
The flashlight is usable for constant light and impulse light.
-- Constant Light
1. Slide back the CAP of the SWITCH ASSEMBLY.
2. Firmly press the BUTTON until it engages, the light comes on.
-- Impulse Light
1. Slide back the CAP.
2. Firmly press the BUTTON until it engages, the light comes on.
3. Light pressing on the BUTTON lets the light goes off and releasing
the BUTTON lets the light comes on again.
Note: The SOS-Signal is:
three times a short signal (for S)
three times a long signal (for O)
three times a short signal (for S).
d) Firmly press the BUTTON until it disengages, the light goes off and slide
back the CAP of the SWITCH ASSEMBLY.
e) Firmly push the BODY of the flashlight into the bracket.

FLASHLIGHT COCKPIT
A
CONSTANT LIGHT
LENS
BUTTON
REFLECTOR EXAMPLE
2
ASSEMBLY
CAP
1
SWITCH
ASSEMBLY
A B BODY
B
IMPULSE LIGHT
BUTTON
NOTE:
1 2 OPERATE IN SEQUENCE
NOC 07010 01756 0001

MEGAPHONES
ALL
The on-board megaphones are powered by 8 alkaline batteries (AA-size) each.
Operation of the Megaphone

1. Hold the megaphone to the mouth.
Note: Do not place the hand around the mouthpiece.
2. Point the megaphone towards the passengers.
WARNING
Do not operate the megaphone near a person’s ears. Amplified sound or
howling can cause damage to the inner ear.
3. Contact the mouthpiece of the megaphone with the lips.

4. Push the push-button switch and then speak slowly with a strong voice.
OPERATION OF THE MEGAPHONE
MOUTHPIECE
PUSH−BUTTON SWITCH
NOC 07010 01066 0001

EMERGENCY RADIO BEACON
ALL
1. Description
The emergency radio beacon (referred to as the beacon) operates in water or
on land. Operating instructions are given on the operating-instruction plate
bonded on the beacon’s housing.
The beacon is held in position in a bracket with standard release latches.
The beacon is a compact, buoyant, emergency locator transmitter with:
-- An identification plate and operating instruction plate.
-- A battery section with a salt-water activated battery.
-- A liquid container / bag with salt assembly bags.
-- An electronic assembly including transmitter.
-- A float and a self-erecting antenna.
-- A tethering lanyard assembly.
The beacon transmits distress signals simultaneously on three frequencies:
-- 121.5 MHz for civil distress frequency.
-- 243 MHz for military distress frequency.
-- 406.025 MHz COSPAS-SARSAT frequency.
2. Operation
Removal of the Emergency Radio Beacon

It is possible to remove the emergency radio beacon (referred to as the
beacon) either by pulling the quick-release pull handle or by opening the
standard release latches.
1. Operating the quick-release pull handle:
a) Hold the top of the beacon and pull the quick-release pull handle.
b) Remove the beacon.
2. Operating the standard-release latches:
a) Hold the beacon and open the standard-release latches.
b) Remove the beacon.
Operation in Sea Water

1. Unwind the lanyard beginning with the free end at the top of the beacon.
2. Tie the cord securely to suitable tethering point of the raft.
3. Place the beacon in the sea-water beside the life raft
Note: The beacon operates automatically in a few seconds and drifts out to
the end of the lanyard.
Operation on Land or on Fresh-Water

1. If on land, look for an area clear of obstruction such as trees and choose
the highest point for best transmission.
2.

WARNING
Danger of injury!
Hold the beacon so that the antenna is positioned away from all persons
and obstructions during antenna erection.
With hand over antenna, break the tape which holds the antenna and
carefully allow antenna to erect.
3. Unroll plastic bag under the lanyard.
4. Carefully remove the pouch of salt from plastic bag.
5. In the plastic bag:
a) Break open the provided pouch of salt.
b) Fill the bag up to the half with water or weak tea or weak coffee.
c) Mix it together.
6. Slowly insert the lower end of the beacon into the plastic bag with the
mixed salt solution.
7. Ensure that the solution covers the two vent holes located at the side of
the beacon at all times.
8. Hold the beacon so that the liquid does not spill and the antenna is vertical
to ensure maximum radiation.
Note: The beacon operates automatically in a few seconds.
9. For best transmission:
Crouch below the level of the antenna base (top of unit housing) or hold a
distance of approximately 18.3 m (60 ft.).
10.If sufficient water or salt are available, replace the water supply at intervals
between 12 to 24 hours to maintain full power output. Use the provided
pouch of salt, refer to point 5. .
Operation on Land or on Fresh-Water in Freezing Conditions (-2˚C

(28˚F) to -20˚C (-4˚F))
1. If on land, look for an area clear of obstruction such as trees and choose
the highest point for best transmission.
2.
Note: The operating life of the beacon may be degraded with this method.
WARNING
Danger of injury!
Hold the beacon so that the antenna is positioned away from all persons
and obstructions during antenna erection.
With hand over antenna, break the tape which holds the antenna and
carefully allow antenna to erect.
3. Unroll plastic bag under the lanyard.
4. Carefully remove the pouch of salt from plastic bag.

5. In the plastic bag:

WARNING
Ensure that proper handling procedures are followed for the use of
CaCl2. Read the applicable material safety data sheet.
a) Add 280g (10oz) of Calcium Chloride.

b) Fill the bag up to the half with water or weak tea or weak coffee.
c) Mix it together.
6. Slowly insert the lower end of the beacon into the plastic bag with the
mixed salt solution.
7. Ensure that the solution covers the two vent holes located at the side of
the beacon at all times.
8. Hold the beacon so that the liquid does not spill and the antenna is vertical
to ensure maximum radiation.
Note: The beacon operates automatically in a few seconds.
9. For best transmission:
Crouch below the level of the antenna base (top of unit housing) or hold a
distance of approximately 18.3 m (60 ft.).
10.If sufficient water or salt are available, replace the water supply at intervals
between 12 to 24 hours to maintain full power output. Use the provided
pouch of salt, refer to point 5. .

EMERGENCY RADIO BEACON
ON LAND
OR
WHILE OVER E.L.T.
FRESH WATER MAX.
LIQUID
QUICK−RELEASE MIN.
PULL HANDLE
LIQUID
CONTAINER/BAG
STANDARD RELEASE
LATCHES
ON SEA WATER
500 10000 20000 40000

BRACKET
SA QU
FR
TE E
FLIGHTLEVEL
E
LI NC
EMERGENCY
TE Y
IN FEET
RADIO BEACON
ELECTRONIC
40
ASSEMBLY
6.
25
EMERGENCY ANTENNA
M
DIS
Hz
RADIO BEACON
LANYARD 245 TANCE 121.5 MHz
175 IN N
GUIDE 123 M
87
WATER−SOLUBLE
TAPE
243 MHz
SALT BAG
OPERATING
BAG/CONTAINER INSTRUCTION PLATE
IDENTIFICATION
PLATE
BATTERY
SECTION
LANYARD
ASSEMBLY NOC 07010 02147 0001

PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
ALL
Description and Operation of the Portable Fire Extinguisher

1. DESCRIPTION
The portable fire extinguisher is filled with HALON 1211 and extinguishes small
fires as such its capacity is limited. The instruction for operation of the fire
extinguisher is shown on a placard bonded on the body of the extinguisher.
2. OPERATION
WARNING
It is recommended to use a smoke hood when fighting a fire. Smoke from
fire and gas from the fire extinguisher may cause irritation of the eyes and
respiratory organs.
1. Remove the portable fire extinguisher from the bracket.
CAUTION
Read the Instruction, Cautions and Warnings bonded on the fire
extinguishers bottle.
2. Carry the extinguisher holding it on the CARRYING HANDLE.

3. To operate, hold the extinguisher upright and lift the CARRYING HANDLE.
4. Bent down SAFE GUARD (black) and remove SEAL WIRE.
5. Stand at least 1.8 m (6 ft.) away from the fire and aim the nozzle at the
base of flame.
6. To start the flow of extinguishant, depress TRIGGER (red) and use a
sweeping motion from side to side at the base of fire.
Remarks
a) Only the fully developed cloud of extinguishant is effective, not the
stream from the discharge-hose outlet. If the cloud does not developed
around the fire, move back.
b) NEVER point the full stream into liquid fires. Start at the base and
always fight the front of the fire and follow the flames.
c) When fighting fires on burning solids, apply the extinguishant in sharp
bursts.
7. To stop the flow of extinguishant, release the TRIGGER (red) lever.

OPERATION HALON PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER
SEAL WIRE TRIGGER
SAFE GUARD
EXAMPLE
CARRYING HANDLE
NOC 07010 01067 0001

PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER COCKPIT
ALL
A halon portable fire extinguisher is in the cockpit.
Description
The portable fire extinguisher extinguishes small fires as such its capacity is
limited. The instruction for operation of the fire extinguisher is shown on a
placard bonded on the body of the extinguisher. The fire extinguisher has:
-- A monoblock pressed steel tank, red coated.
-- A valve tap with a trigger handle for use a carriage and a jet-spray.
-- Content is Halon 1211.
WARNING
It is recommended to use a smoke hood when fighting a fire. Smoke from fire
and gas from the fire extinguisher may cause irritation of the eyes and
respiratory organs.
Operation of the Halon Portable Fire Extinguisher

1. Remove the portable fire extinguisher from the bracket.
CAUTION
Read the Instruction, Cautions and Warnings bonded on the fire
extinguishers bottle.
2. Carry the extinguisher holding it on the CARRYING HANDLE.

3. To operate, hold the extinguisher upright.
4. Pull SAFETY PIN.
5. Stand at least 1.8 m (6 ft.) away from the fire and aim the nozzle at the base
of flame.
6. To start the flow of extinguishant, hold the device in one hand and firmly
press with the thumb on the LEVER of the TRIGGER.
Remarks

a) Only the fully developed cloud of extinguishant is effective, not the stream
from the DISCHARGE OUTLET. If the cloud does not developed around the
fire, move back.
b) NEVER point the full stream into liquid fires. Start at the base and always
fight the front of the fire and follow the flames.
c) When fighting fires on burning solids, apply the extinguishant in sharp bursts.
7. To stop the flow of extinguishant, release the LEVER.

OPERATION PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER
BRACKET
SAFETY PIN EXAMPLE
LEVER
DISCHARGE
OUTLET
TRIGGER
CARRYING
HANDLE
NOC 07010 01767 0001

LIFE VESTS
ALL
LIFE VESTS FOR THE COCKPIT AND CABIN CREW
For every member of the cockpit and cabin crew there is a life vest stowed on
board the aircraft.
They are located in each cockpit seat and attendant seat.
( for location of the seats.) Placards show where they are stowed.

LIFE VEST FOR THE CREW
COCKPIT: CAPTAIN SEAT COCKPIT: OCCUPANT SEAT

:F/O SEAT CABIN: EACH FLIGHT
ATTENDANT SEAT
A
A
STOWAGE BOX
FOC 07010 00498 0001

Life jacket referred to as life vest.
LIFE VESTS FOR PASSENGER, CHILDREN AND SPARES
Placards show where they are stowed.

1. Passenger Life Vest:
One life vest is stowed under each passenger seat or in a box under the
armrest.
2. Child Life Vest (if applicable):
Several child life vests are stowed on board the aircraft:
for location.
3. Spare Life Vest (if applicable):
Some spare life vests are stowed on board the aircraft:
for location.
LIFE VESTS FOR PASSENGER, CHILDREN AND SPARES
FOC 07010 00710 0001
Life jacket referred to as life vest.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE LIFE VEST
DESCRIPTION
-- The LIFE VEST for passengers and for crew has these main components:
Inflatable cells.
Waistbelt harness with buckle and harness-pull-tab.
Gas inflation system.
Oral inflation system.
Water-activated light assembly. (If applicable)
-- The CHILD LIFE VEST (if applicable) has these main components:
Inflatable cells.
Waistbelt harness with buckle, harness pull-tab and harness adjust-tab.
Gas inflation system.
Oral inflation system.
Water-activated light assembly. (If applicable)
Tether line.
OPERATION
Life Vest
Each LIFE VEST shows the instruction for its use:

1. Remove the life vest from its bag, then unroll it.
a) Hold the life vest on each side of the neck opening and put the head
through the opening.
b) Run the WAISTBELT HARNESS around the back of the waist and back
to the front.
c) Hold the buckle ends:
WARNING
Danger of finger clamping by closing the buckle!
Close the buckle below the life vest.

d) Pull the HARNESS-PULL-TAB to tighten snugly.
Note: Make sure that the life vest is drawn firmly against the body.

2. Inflation:
CAUTION
ORAL INFLATION PRIOR TO GAS INFLATION WILL CAUSE
EXCESSIVE PRESSURE WHICH MAY BURST THE LIFE VEST.
Pull all the JERK TO INFLATE tags, this inflates the buoyancy chambers
with the gas inflation system. The number of tags depents on the model
and the number of chambers of the life vest.
a) With the ORAL INFLATOR system you can inflate the life vest yourself.
Inflation is done by blowing into the end of the tubes by mouth.
b) If you need to change the pressure in the life vest, use the ORAL
INFLATOR system.
Note: The oral inflation system in each inflatable cell can also be used
to release gas by depressing the valves at the tube ends.
3. Light System Assembly Activation (If applicable)

a) The light system assembly is activated when the battery is immersed in
water.

LIFE VEST
INFLATABLE
CELLS LIGHT
1 ASSEMBLY
ORAL INFLATOR
SYSTEMS
GAS
INFLATION
SYSTEMS
TUBES WAISTBELT
HARNESS
2 JERK TO
INFLATE
WATER
JERK TO ACTIVATED HARNESS
INFLATE BATTERY BUCKLE PULL−TAB 4
6
IF NECESSARY
5 5
COLOR
YELLOW FOR PASSENGER
ORANGE FOR CREW FOC 07010 01672 0001
Child Life Vest
Each CHILD LIFE VEST shows the instruction for its use:
1. Hold the child life vest on each side of the neck opening and put the head
through the opening.
2. Place one child’s leg over waistbelt harness loop and pull the
HARNESS-ADJUST-TAB so that this strap is snug but not tight. (If
applicable)
3. Run the WAISTBELT HARNESS around back of the child’s waist and back
to the front.
4. Hold the BUCKLE ends:
WARNING
Danger of finger clamping by closing the buckle!
Close the BUCKLE below the life vest.

5. Pull the HARNESS-PULL-TAB to tighten snugly.
6. Inflation:
CAUTION
ORAL INFLATION PRIOR TO GAS INFLATION WILL CAUSE
EXCESSIVE PRESSURE WHICH MAY BURST THE LIFE VEST.
Pull the red JERK TO INFLATE tags to inflate the buoyancy chambers with
the gas inflation system.
a) With the ORAL INFLATOR system you can inflate the life vest yourself.
Inflation is done by blowing into the end of the tubes by mouth.
b) If you need to change the pressure in the life vest, use the ORAL
INFLATOR system.
Note: The oral inflation system in each inflatable cell can also be used
to release gas by depressing the valves at the tube ends.
7. Light System Assembly Activation (If applicable):

a) Pull the ring and the light system will be activated automatically when it
is immersed in water.

CHILD LIFE VEST
1 2
PLACE OVER HEAD PLACE ONE LEG OVER
HARNESS LOOP
PULL SNUG,
BUT NOT TIGHT
3
BUCKLE BELT AROUND
WAIST AND TIGHTEN
TETHER LINE INFLATABLE

CELLS
LIGHT
ASSEMBLY
SNAP
4
RING
FASTENER PULL RED TAGS
TO INFLATE
ORAL
INFLATION WATER ACTIVATED
SYSTEMS BATTERY
TUBES
GAS
INFLATION JERKS TO
SYSTEMS INFLATE
WAISTBELT
HARNESS
HARNESS HARNESS
PULL−TAB BUCKLE ADJUST−TAB FOC 07010 00759 0001
ALL
FLIGHT DECK ESCAPE ROPE
1. Location
2 Flight Deck Escape Ropes are on board the aircraft:
-- 1 in a RH stowage above the RH sliding window on the side of the
overhead panel, marked by a red label.
-- 1 in a LH stowage above the LH sliding window on the side of the
overhead panel, marked by a red label.
2. Description
The Flight Deck Escape Rope is a 5.5 m (18 ft.) long and knotted. The rope
is connected with one end to the structure of the aircraft. The rope and the
attachment can support a load of 900 kg (1984 lb.).

FLIGHT DECK ESCAPE ROPE
A COCKPIT
B
A
ESCAPE
ROPE
NOC 07010 01678 0001

CRASH AXE
ALL
The crash axes are used to cut through light structures, panels and windows.
They have insulated handles which are resistant to high voltages.
The crash axes are put into brackets on board the aircraft.
CRASH AXE
NOC 07010 01063 0001

ALL
FIRE FIGHTING GLOVES
Fire-fighting gloves are kept in pockets on board of the aircraft. The gloves are
for use by crew member to grasp hot metal or burning parts. Placards are
pointing to the location of the part’s installation.
FIRE FIGHTING GLOVES
NOC 07010 01758 0001

HIGHLIGHTS
(1) New item ’Location - General Overview’ for ’ALL’
(2) New item ’Location in the Cabin - MID Area’ for ’ALL’

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL FIXED EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT SEP 13/07
FIXED EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
ALL
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER SYSTEM ELT SYSTEM
LOCATION OF THE ELT SYSTEM
One ELT system is on board of the aircraft and has these components:
1. Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) unit with an Aircraft Identification Module
(AIM):
The ELT unit and the AIM are installed in the AFT cabin area, above the RH
ceiling panel in a support assembly. The ELT unit and AIM are permanently
fixed to the aircraft.
2. Remote Control Panel (RCP):
The RCP is installed in the cockpit area on the cockpit overhead panel.
3. Antenna:
The antenna is installed on the upper external fuselage in the AFT aircraft
area, just forward of the vertical stabilizer.
Note: The ELT beacon does not replace the survival ELT. The existence of the
survival ELT is in addition necessary.

LOCATION OF THE EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT) SYSTEM
COCKPIT DOOR AFT R

A
DOOR AFT L
B
REMOTE CONTROL
PANEL
ANTENNA
BEHIND
A CEILING
PANEL
TRANSMITTER UNIT AIM

NOC 07020 02132 0001
DESCRIPTION OF THE EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT) SYSTEM
The ELT System transmits on 3 frequencies, 121.5 MHz (civil) and 243 MHz
(military) homing signals and with 406 MHz to the COSPAS-SARSAT satellite
system. The components of the ELT system are described as follow:
1. The ELT unit has these components:
-- An integrated G-switch.
-- An electronic assembly which transmits these emergency signals:
-- 406 MHz.
-- 121.5 MHz.
-- 121.5 MHz.
-- A battery pack.
-- Interfaces for connecting to the aircraft structure, antenna and RCP.
-- An LED.
-- A SWITCH.
2. The RCP is an enclosed box with:
-- A LIGHTED FRONT PANEL.
-- An ARMED/ON SWITCH.
-- An ON INDICATOR.
-- A BACK PANEL with:
-- A connector to connect the RCP to ELT unit.
-- An identification placard.
3. Antenna
The antenna transmits the three-frequencies when the ELT operates. The
antenna has these components:
-- A fiberglass radome on an aluminum-alloy base plate.
-- A radiating element placed in the fiberglass radome.
-- A connector for the coaxial cable.
The antenna is connected by coaxial cable to the ELT unit.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE EMERGENCY LOCATOR

TRANSMITTER (ELT)
REMOTE
CONTROL
PANEL
LIGHTED
FRONT
PANEL
ANTENNA
SWITCH
INDICATOR
CONNECTOR
A
A
1
2
TRANSMITTER UNIT AIM
4
NOC 07020 02133 0001
1 Antenna connection
2 RCP connection
3 LED
4 ARM/OFF/TX SWITCH
OPERATION OF THE EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT) SYSTEM
General
The ELT system operates in these configurations:

-- Automatically
or
-- Manually.
Automatic Operation
The switch of the ELT unit is in the ARM position. In this configuration the
unit is capable of detecting an activation signal from either the integrated
G-switch or the RCP. Receiving an activation signal, the ELT unit switches to
the transit mode and begins to transmit the 121.5/243 and 406 MHz signals.
The ELT-system can be activated manually either from the RCP or from the
transmitter unit.
Manual Operation from the RCP

--
Note: The toggle switch on the panel of the transmitter unit must be set to
the ARMED position.
The toggle switch on the RCP has to be set to the ON position.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL SUPPLEMENTARY MEDICAL EQUIPMENT SEP 13/07
ALL
SPECIAL MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
This chapter gives information about the location and description of the
supplementary medical equipment.
Medical Receptacle
Location
1. General
1 medical panel, integrated underneath the lateral hatracks (PSU channel) is
on board the aircraft. Each medical panel has 2 medical receptacles (referred
to receptacle).
2. Location of the Medical Panel:
-- AFT cabin area, LH in the PSU channel above AFT door.

MEDICAL RECEPTACLE
DOOR AFT R
B DOOR AFT L 40MF A

QUICK RELEASE FASTENER 42MF
B
NOC 07030 03048 0001
Description and Operation

1. Description
The receptacles are installed to supply medical equipment with electrical power.
The medical panel has these components:

-- Cover
The cover protects the receptacles.
The cover is held in the closed position with a quick-release fastener (push
to open/push to close).
-- Receptacle
The medical panel has the receptacles 40MF and 42MF.
The receptacle 40MF is supplied with 115V AC 400 Hz 1-phase.
The receptacle 42MF is supplied with 28V DC.
2. Operation
Putting into Operation

-- Open the cover of the medical panel by pushing the quick-release fastener.
-- Connect the medical equipment to the related receptacle.
Note: Only authorized persons who are familiar with operation of the
medical equipment may use this device.
Taking out of Operation

-- Switch off the medical equipment and disconnect it from the related
receptacle.
-- Close the cover of the medical panel by pushing the quick-release fastener
against the latch until it engages with a snap.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES 08.000
08.010 INTRODUCTION
-- GENERAL INFORMATION 1
-- PRESENTATION 2
08.015 PHASES OF FLIGHT

-- PHASES OF FLIGHT 1
-- STERILE COCKPIT 3
08.020 DOOR OPERATION

-- DOOR OPERATION FROM OUTSIDE 1
-- DOOR OPERATION FROM INSIDE 2
08.030 COCKPIT DOOR OPERATION

-- COCKPIT DOOR OPERATION 1
08.040 COCKPIT SLIDING WINDOW OPERATION

-- COCKPIT SLIDING WINDOWS OPERATION 1
08.045 PREFLIGHT BRIEFING

-- PREFLIGHT BRIEFING 1
08.050 GROUND CHECK

-- GROUND CHECK 1
08.060 DEPARTURE
-- DEPARTURE PROCEDURES 1
08.070 ARRIVAL
-- ARRIVAL PROCEDURES 1
08.080 CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES

-- CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES 1
PRE-PASSENGER BOARDING
-- CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING 2
BOARDING
-- CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES BEFORE PUSH 3
BACK
-- CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING TAXI 4

BEFORE TAKEOFF
TAKEOFF AND INITIAL CLIMB
-- CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING FINAL 7
CLIMB
CRUISE
-- CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES FROM TOP OF 9
DESCENT
APPROACH
-- CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING FINAL 11
APPROACH AND LANDING
-- CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING TAXI 12
AFTER LANDING
DISEMBARKATION
-- CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES AFTER LAST 14
PASSENGER DISEMBARKS
08.090 PASSENGER SAFETY BRIEFING

-- PASSENGER SAFETY BRIEFING 1
08.100 REFUELLING DEFUELING

-- REFUELING/DEFUELING PROCEDURE WITH 1
PASSENGERS ON BOARD
08.110 CABIN CREW BRIEFING

-- CABIN CREW BRIEFING 1
08.120 GSM ON BOARD SYSTEM

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL INTRODUCTION SEP 13/07
GENERAL INFORMATION
ALL
The CCOM’s Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) and Abnormal/Emergency

Procedures are those recommended by Airbus as operational guidelines.
Standard Operating Procedures should be developed in accordance with
Operator policies, procedures and local Aviation Authority requirements.
If an airline wishes to integrate its customized procedures, the airline can do so
by using the "XML version" of the CCOM.
SOPs are normal cabin crew procedures for standard aircraft operations.
Aviation Authorities do not certify the SOPs.
SOPs are continuously updated. Revisions take into account the feedback
received from all Operators, in addition to the results of continuous monitoring of
the aircraft’s in-service life.
SOPs are composed of inspections, cabin preparations, and normal procedures.

PRESENTATION
ALL
When inserted in the procedure, expanded information appears in italics. This

information :
-- Explains actions for which the reason is not evident.
-- Furnishes additional background info.
If an action depends on a precondition, a black dot identifies the precondition.
For example :
BLACK DOT
DOOR OPERATION FROM INSIDE

IF THE RED CABIN PRESSURE INDICATOR FLASHES :
DO NOT OPEN THE DOOR AND REPORT TO COCKPIT CREW.
NOC 08010 00228 0001

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL PHASES OF FLIGHT SEP 13/07
PHASES OF FLIGHT
ALL
The following flight phases are applicable to cabin operations:
PHASES OF FLIGHT
7: Top of Descent
2: Pushback
1 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12
CAPTION:
1: Boarding 7: Top of Descent
2: Pushback 8: Approach
3: Taxi Before Takeoff 9: Final Approach and Landing
4: Takeoff and Initial Climb 10: Taxi After Landing
5: Final Climb 11: Disembarkation
6: Cruise 12: After Passenger Disembarkation
NOC 08015 04344 0001

1. BOARDING: Begins when the first passenger enters the aircraft, and ends
when all the aircraft doors have been closed.
2. PUSHBACK: Begins when the jetway is removed, and ends when the aircraft
is pushed back.
3. TAXI BEFORE TAKEOFF: Begins with the pushback from the gate, and ends
when the aircraft begins the takeoff roll.
4. TAKEOFF AND INITIAL CLIMB: Begins when the takeoff roll starts, (all
people onboard are seated with their seat belts fastened) and ends when the
cabin crew are allowed to leave their seats.
5. FINAL CLIMB: Begins when the cabin crew leave their seats, and ends when
seat belt signs are switched off, after climb.
6. CRUISE: Begins when the seat belt signs are switched off and ends when
the seat belt signs are switched on before descent.
7. TOP OF DESCENT: Begins when the aircraft starts to descend, and ends
before the approach.

8. APPROACH: Begins at 10 000 ft (approximately 10 minutes before

touchdown), and ends with the cabin ready signal to the cockpit crew.
9. FINAL APPROACH AND LANDING: Begins when the cabin crew are required
to take their seats and to end when the aircraft leaves the active runway.
10. TAXI AFTER LANDING: Begins when the aircraft leaves the active runway,
and ends when the seat belts signs are switched off after the final parking
position is reached and the aircraft is at a complete stop.
11.DISEMBARKATION: Begins when the jetway is positioned, and ends when
the last passenger has left the aircraft.
12.AFTER PASSENGER DISEMBARKATION: Begins when all passengers have
disembarked, and ends either at the next boarding, or when the cabin crew
leaves the aircraft.
Note: The critical phases of flight are 3, 4, 9 and 10: Taxi before Takeoff, Takeoff
and Initial climb, Final Approach and Landing, Taxi after Landing.

ALL
STERILE COCKPIT
CABIN CREW TO FLIGHT CREW COMMUNICATION DURING CRITICAL

PHASES OF FLIGHT
The critical phases of flight, refers to all ground operations involving taxi, takeoff,
and landing and all flight operations when the aircraft is below 10 000 ft.
The aim of the sterile cockpit policy is to enable the flight crew focus on their
duties without being distracted by non-flight related matters.
During the critical phases of flight, the sterile cockpit policy is applied.
Therefore, calls from the cabin crew or entry into the cockpit are restricted to:
Safety and security related matters.
The following are some examples of safety-related situations:
-- Fire or smoke in the cabin
-- Abnormal noises or vibrations
-- Observation of fuel or other fluid leaks.
Note: In normal operations, the Purser communicates with the flight crew on
behalf of the cabin crew. In the case of an abnormal or emergency
situation being discovered, the first cabin crewmember to discover a
safety-related situation must report it the flight crew.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DOOR OPERATION SEP 13/07
DOOR OPERATION FROM OUTSIDE
ALL
OPENING
-- RED CABIN PRESSURE INDICATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK

The red cabin pressure indicator, seen through the observation window, must
not be flashing. If it is, do not open the door.
If cabin crew opens the door while the red cabin pressure indicator is flashing,
there is a risk that the cabin door will open violently due to the cabin not
being fully depressurized.
The RED INDICATOR LIGHT flashes in case of a cabin differential pressure
above 2.5 MBAR (0.0362 PSI), when all engines are shut down and the
related door is disarmed.
-- FLAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PUSH
-- HANDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GRASP AND LIFT UP FULLY

The handle must be fully lifted up to the horizontal green line.
-- DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PULL OUTWARDS and PUSH FORWARDS

Do not use the handle to move the door.
-- HANDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOWER INTO IT RECESS

Note: Doors automatically disarm, when opened from the outside.
CLOSING
-- Prior to closing, push the gust lock to unlock the door.
-- CONTROL HANDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIFT
-- DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOVE TOWARDS THE FRAME and PUSH IN

Do not use the handle to move the door.
-- CONTROL HANDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOWER

The door is locked when the handle is flush with the door surface.

DOOR OPERATION FROM INSIDE
ALL
OPENING
-- FRAME ASSIST HANDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GRASP

Assist handle is located on the frame.
-- SLIDE ARMING LEVER DISARMED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
-- SAFETY PIN INSTALLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
-- CABIN DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE WARNING INDICATOR . . . . . . . CHECK
• If the red cabin pressure indicator flashes
-- DO NOT FORCE THE HANDLE TO OPEN THE DOOR . . . REPORT TO

THE COCKPIT CREW
WARNING
If cabin crew opens the door while the red cabin pressure indicator is
flashing, there is a risk that the cabin door will open violently due to the
cabin not being fully depressurized.
The RED INDICATOR LIGHT flashes in case of a cabin differential
pressure above 2.5 MBAR (0.0362 PSI), when all engines are shut down
and the related door is disarmed.
-- OUTSIDE CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
-- DOOR CONTROL HANDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIFT UP FULLY
-- By using the door assist handle, push the door outwards, then move it
forwards until the door locks into its fully open position.
CLOSING
To unlock the door from its fully open position :

Assist handle is located on the frame.

-- GUST LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS

The gust lock, located on the support arm, must be pressed with the palm of
the hand.
-- SUPPORT ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PULL SIMULTANEOUSLY
-- By using the door assist handle, move the door backwards.

Do not use the control handle to move the door.
• When the door is in front of its frame :
-- DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PULL IN
-- DOOR CONTROL HANDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOWER
-- Check that the door locks correctly.

The door locking indicator, located on the upper part of the door, indicates
"LOCKED" (in green).

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL COCKPIT DOOR OPERATION SEP 13/07
COCKPIT DOOR OPERATION
ALL
DOOR OPENING FROM THE CABIN
-- CABIN CREW ROUTINE ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REQUEST ON KEYPAD
-- CABIN CREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS #, or N + #

"N" represents an Operator-defined figure between 0 and 7 digits.
-- CABIN CREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STAND IN COCKPIT DOOR AXIS

The cabin crew should stand in the axis of the cockpit door.
A buzzer sounds in cockpit.
• If entry is NOT authorized by the flight crew :

-- The flight crew locks the door via the DOOR LOCK switch.
-- The keypad’s red light comes on steady, and indicates that the door is
locked.
Emergency access, the buzzer, and the keypad are inhibited for a
preselected time between 5 and 20 minutes.
• If entry is authorized by the flight crew :

-- The flight crew unlocks the door via the DOOR LOCK switch.
-- The keypad’s green light comes on steady, and indicates that the door is
unlocked.
-- CABIN CREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PUSH THE DOOR TO OPEN
• If there is no reaction from the flight crew :
-- CABIN CREW SECOND ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REQUEST ON KEYPAD

Repeat the above procedure.
• If there is no reaction from the flight crew, after the second request :
-- CABIN CREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CALL THE COCKPIT

To establish contact with the flight crew and request access to the cockpit.
• If there is no reaction from the flight crew, after a cabin crew

interphone call :

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL COCKPIT DOOR OPERATION SEP 13/07
-- CABIN CREW . . . . APPLY THE FOLLOWING EMERGENCY ACCESS

PROCEDURE
-- EMERGENCY ENTRY CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENTER, AND PRESS #

The emergency entry code is an Operator-defined figure between 2 and
7 digits.
A buzzer will sound continuously in the cockpit and the keypad’s green
light flashes. After a preselected time between 15 and 120 seconds, the
keypad’s green light comes on steady, and the cabin crew can then
push the door open.
-- CABIN CREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PUSH DOOR TO OPEN

The cockpit door unlocks for 5 seconds.
The buzzer stops and indicates that the door is unlocked.
DOOR OPENING FROM THE COCKPIT
-- DOOR LOCK SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNLOCK

Unlock switch position must be maintained to unlock the door.
The green LED comes on, on the keypad.
-- COCKPIT DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PULL

The door can only be opened by pushing it during switch activation.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL COCKPIT SLIDING WINDOW OPERATION SEP 13/07
COCKPIT SLIDING WINDOWS OPERATION
ALL
OPENING
-- OPERATING LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS FULLY

This will disengage the locking pins from their latches. As soon as the
operating lever is pressed, a red indicator appears to show that the window is
unlocked.
-- OPERATING LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ROTATE AFT

This will release the window from its fixed structure.
-- Pull backwards to slide the window panel aft.
At the end of travel, the window is locked in the open position.
CLOSING
To unlock the window :
-- LOCKING PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNLOCK (PULL AFT)
-- OPERATING LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PUSH FORWARD

The operating lever must be pushed until the window panel is in its fixed frame.
-- OPERATING LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ROTATE FORWARD

This will move the window panel into its frame.
The window is closed and locked, when the red indicator on the handle is no
longer visible.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL PREFLIGHT BRIEFING SEP 13/07
PREFLIGHT BRIEFING
ALL
The Pre-Flight Briefing is the starting Block for a high-performance crew. The aim
of the briefing is to organize the crew activities, to ensure that the workload is
evenly distributed amongst the crew.
WHO -- The Purser conducts the Pre-Flight Briefing

-- The entire cabin crew attends the Pre-Flight Briefing
WHY -- To highlight:
. Safety and security standards
. Cabin crew performance expectations
. The chain of command
-- To encourage:
. A high level of safety
. Communication/Crew Resource Management (CRM)
. Teamwork
. Crew coordination
WHAT the -- Cabin crewmember introduction and welcome
Pre-Flight -- An introduction to the flight crew, if possible. (If it is not possible
Briefing to meet the flight crew during the cabin crew briefing, the
must Purser must brief with the flight crew on board the aircraft)
include -- Flight information (aircraft type, aircraft status, flight number,
flight destination, flight duration)
-- The allocation of cabin crewmember briefing areas and
responsibilities. The Purser should take into consideration the
rank and operating experience of the cabin crewmember.
-- The allocation of cabin crewmember commercial tasks (galleys,
I...)
-- Cabin crew cooperation aspects:
. Discipline, responsibilities, chain of command and reporting
. Importance of crew coordination and communication
-- An in-flight safety review includes
: Exit-row seating requirements / identifying Able-Bodied
Passengers (ABP)
. The need for constant situational awareness
. The importance of silent review
. Sterile cockpit rules and guidelines
. A reminder to report unusual occurrences
WHERE -- In a designated briefing room, or
-- On board the aircraft
WHEN -- At the beginning of each duty period
-- At a time that is specifically reserved for this purpose

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL PREFLIGHT BRIEFING SEP 13/07
HOW it -- The Purser must prepare the safety briefing in advance, the
must be briefing should be relevant, and appropriate to the flight.
done -- The Purser must welcome the crew
-- All cabin crewmembers should be able to see and hear the
Purser
-- The Purser should speak clearly
-- It is important that every cabin crewmember knows their
allocated work position, and their safety responsibilities.
-- The briefing should be understood by all the cabin crewmembers.
-- Give the cabin crewmembers the opportunity to ask question
-- The Purser must respect time constraints

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GROUND CHECK SEP 13/07
GROUND CHECK
ALL
The ground check procedures should be performed in accordance with Operator

policies, procedures and local Aviation Authority requirements.
The ground check procedures are usually performed before the departure of flights
from originating stations and transit stops when a crew change has taken place.
Cabin crew should check the operation of the different systems.
PANEL LIGHT TEST ON FAP
-- PNL LIGHT TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS

To check all the lights of the FAP panel.
EMERGENCY LIGHT ACTIVATION
This check should be performed with one cabin crew located at the FAP, and
the others located at each evacuation area :
-- FAP’s EMER PUSHBUTTON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS
-- The cabin crew should check whether the emergency lighting system is
properly operating in all of the different zones : exit signs, exit lights,
emergency ceiling lights and escape path marking system.
-- CABIN CREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPORT
-- FAP’s EMER PUSHBUTTON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS
SYSTEMS CHECK
The cabin crew should check the FAP CIDS caution button :
• If CIDS caution light is illuminated :
On PTP :
-- CABIN CREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK THE DISPLAYED SYSTEM PAGE

For more information about the failure, the cabin crew should check the
related system page.
-- CABIN CREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPORT TO MAINTENANCE

WATER/WASTE QUANTITY
The cabin crew should check the water/waste quantity before departure.
The water/waste quantity check is performed using the FAP.
WASTE QUANTITY
-- WASTE QUANTITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
The waste tank should be empty before the aircraft departure.
WATER QUANTITY
-- WATER QUANTITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
Ensure that the quantity of water available is sufficient for the amount of
passengers, and, the expected duration of flight.
Note: Any discrepancies or malfunctions (Blue cards) must be reported to the
flight crew and, maintenance as early as possible.
The water and, waste quantities must be confirmed to the flight crew as
correct before departure.
PASSENGER ADDRESS TEST
DIRECT PA FROM ANY STATION TO ALL LOUDSPEAKERS
This PA is addressed to all cabin zones, attendant stations.
-- HANDSET INTERPHONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOOK OFF
-- PTT PUSHBUTTON ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS

The "DIRECT PA" indication appears on the upper line of calling AIP.
-- ANNOUNCEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . START
On all other AIPs, the "DIRECT PA IN USE" message appears on the lower
line.
Note: This direct passenger announcement system should only be used for
urgent messages.
PASSENGER CALL TEST

RANDOM PASSENGER CALL TESTS SHOULD BE PERFORMED IN EACH

CABIN ZONE
-- On the PSU, CABIN CREW CALL BUTTON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS
-- On the PSU, check that the corresponding seat row numbering light
illuminates.
-- On the ACP of the corresponding zone, check that the blue light is on.
-- On the AIP of the corresponding zone, check that a "CALL SR XX

LH/RH" message appears on the AIP’s lower line.
-- At the cabin crew and all passengers loudspeakers of the applicable

zone, check that a HI1 tone audio chime is triggered.
-- Repeat this check at random in all of the cabin zones.
RANDOM PASSENGER CALL TESTS SHOULD BE PERFORMED IN LAVATORIES
-- In lavatory, on LSU, CABIN CREW CALL BUTTON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS
-- the amber light of the respective lavatory is on, located on the outside
wall-mounted PAX call indicator.
-- On the ACP of the corresponding zone, check that the amber light is on.
-- On the AIP of the corresponding zone, check that a "LAV XX" message
appears on the AIP’s lower line.
-- At the cabin crew and all passengers loudspeakers, check that a HI1
tone audio chime is triggered.
-- Repeat this check in other(s) lavatory(ies).
INTERPHONE CALL TEST - CABIN TO CABIN
PURSER CALLS TO ALL ATTENDANTS STATIONS
-- FWD L HANDSET INTERPHONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOOK OFF
-- INTPH+ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIAL
-- Check that the "ALL ATTND" indication appears on the upper line of the
FWD L AIP.

-- On the ACP of all cabin crew stations, check that the red light comes on
steady.
-- Check that a HI1-LO1 chime triggers at all cabin crew loudspeaker

stations as well as all passengers loudspeakers.
-- On the AIP of all cabin crew stations, check that a "CALL ATTND 1 L"
message appears, and that steady green indicator comes on.
-- ALL CABIN CREW STATION HANDSET INTERPHONES . . . . . . HOOK OFF
-- COMMUNICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . START
-- ALL CABIN CREWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPORT
INTERPHONE CALL TEST - CABIN TO COCKPIT
CABIN CREW CALLS TO THE COCKPIT
-- CAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIAL
Check that the "CAPTAIN" indication appears on the upper line of the calling
AIP
On the cockpit ACPs, the ATT lights flashes and a buzzer sounds (1x3 sec).
EMERGENCY CABIN CREW CALLS TO THE COCKPIT
-- EMER CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIAL
-- Check that the "EMER CALL" indication appears on the calling AIP.
The legend flashes on EMER pushbutton of the cockpit’s call panel.

On the cockpit ACPs, the ATT light flashes and a buzzer sounds (3x3 sec).
INTERPHONE CALL TEST - COCKPIT TO CABIN
COCKPIT CALLS TO THE PURSER
In the cockpit :

-- ACP FWD CALL BUTTON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS

In the cockpit, use the ACP to communicate.
In the cabin :
-- On the ACP of FWD cabin crew station, check that the red light comes
on steady.
-- Check that a HI1-LO1 chime triggers at all cabin crew loudspeaker

stations as well as all passengers loudspeakers.
-- On the AIP of the FWD station, check that a "CALL CAPTAIN" message
appears on the AIP’s upper line, and that a steady green indicator comes
on.
-- FWD CREW STATION HANDSET INTERPHONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOOK OFF
-- PURSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPORT

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DEPARTURE SEP 13/07
DEPARTURE PROCEDURES
ALL
-- PURSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CALL CABIN CREWS

Purser calls cabin crews via the PA.
-- ALL DOORS LOCKED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
-- SLIDE ARMED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ORDER
ARMING PROCEDURE
-- SAFETY PIN (with red flag) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVE AND STOW

Safety pin is stowed in a hole located on the support arm. The red flag must
be stowed (not hanging).
-- ARMING LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PUSH DOWN TO ARMED MODE

The arming lever is armed, when it is in the section labelled "ARMED".
Note: When the door is in the "ARMED" mode, the "cabin pressure warning
light" does not illuminate to indicate cabin differential pressure.
The door is now ready for flight.
DOOR/EXITS CHECK
Before each flight, the cabin crew must perform the following checks :
-- ALL DOORS LOCKED AND ARMED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
-- CROSSCHECK ALL DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONDUCT

Note: Emergency exits remain armed at all times.
DOORS/EXITS FAP CHECK
Purser checks the status of the doors/exits on the PTP :
-- SYSTEM STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SELECT
-- DOORS PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SELECT
-- ALL DOORS LOCKED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
-- SLIDES PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SELECT

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DEPARTURE SEP 13/07
-- ALL SLIDES ARMED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
CABIN READY NOTIFICATION
When the cabin is ready for departure, the purser must notify the cockpit crew.
-- CABIN READY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NOTIFY THE CAPTAIN
• On the FAP, if the CABIN READY function is available :
-- CABIN READY PUSHBUTTON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL ARRIVAL SEP 13/07
ARRIVAL PROCEDURES
ALL
-- PURSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CALL CABIN CREWS

Purser calls cabin crews via the PA.
-- SLIDE DISARMED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ORDER
DOORS DISARMING PROCEDURE
-- ARMING LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIFT IN DISARMED POSITION
Once the door is disarmed :
-- SAFETY PIN (with red flag hanging) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPLACE
DOORS/EXITS CHECK
At arrival, the cabin crew must perform the following checks :
-- ALL DOORS DISARMED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
-- CROSSCHECK ALL DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONDUCT

Note: Emergency exits remain armed at all times.
DOORS/EXITS FAP CHECK
Purser check the status of the slides on the PTP.
-- SYSTEM STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SELECT
-- SLIDES PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SELECT
-- SLIDES DISARMED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES SEP 13/07
ALL
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES PRE-PASSENGER BOARDING
PURSER CABIN CREWMEMBERS

Pre-flight check of emergency Pre-flight check of emergency
equipment equipment
Perform security checks, if required. Perform security checks, if required.
-- Report to Purser: Emergency -- Report to Purser: Emergency
equipment discrepancies found equipment discrepancies found
during the pre-flight checks. during the pre-flight checks.
End of Pre-Passenger Boarding End of Pre-Passenger Boarding

CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING BOARDING
ALL

-- Go to assigned boarding station -- Go to assigned boarding stations
-- Brief Passengers -- Assist unaccompanied minors,
handicapped persons, families
-- Monitor the amount of baggage and
ensure correct stowage (overhead
bins, under seats)
-- Check that exits and escape paths
are clear of obstructions
-- Check that aisles and cross-aisles
are clear of obstructions
-- Distribute extension and /or baby
seatbelts, if necessary
-- Manage the passenger flow
-- Ensure that passengers comply with
"No smoking" regulations, as
applicable
-- Ensure that passenger seating
complies with seating regulations, as
applicable
-- Check that Able-Bodied Passengers
(ABPs) that are seated at exits.
Report to Captain : Any unusual or Report to Purser : Any unusual or
abnormal situations abnormal situations
End of BOARDING End of BOARDING

CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES BEFORE PUSH BACK
ALL

-- Go to assigned door -- Go to assigned door, or boarding
-- Perform the Door Arming Procedure, stations
and cross check the opposite door -- Perform the Door Arming Procedure,
and crosscheck the opposite door
-- Acknowledge that door checks have -- Report to purser: Confirm that doors
been received are armed and crosschecked
-- Check FAP DOOR page
Check that :
-- Passengers are seated with seat
belts fastened
-- Stowage of passengers and crew
baggage complies with regulations,
-- lavatories are vacant and secured
-- Social areas are vacant and secured
-- Crew rest areas are vacant and
doors are closed and locked
-- Galley are secured, all catering items
are correctly stowed and latched
-- Exit and escape paths are clear of
obstructions
-- Cabin curtains are open and secured
Report to Captain: Confirm passenger Report to Purser: Confirm passenger
count count

CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING TAXI BEFORE TAKEOFF
ALL

-- Go to assigned boarding station -- Go to assigned boarding station
-- Request crewmembers to take their -- Take "Passenger Safety Briefing"
"Passenger Safety Briefing" position position
-- Perform the "Passenger Safety -- Perform the "Passenger Safety
Briefing" announcement Briefing"
Check that :
-- Passengers are seated with their
seat belts fastened
-- Stowage of passenger and crew
-- All pre-departure service items are
removed
-- Tray tables are in upright and locked
position and cup holders are stowed
-- Seat backs are in upright position,
armrests and footrests are correctly
stowed
-- Lavatories are vacant and secured
-- Infant life vests are distributed
-- Social areas are vacant and
secured
-- Crew rest areas are vacant, crew
rest doors are closed and locked
-- Galleys are secured, and all catering
items are correctly stowed
-- TV monitors and In-Flight
Entertainment (IFE) equipment are
stowed
-- Passengers comply with Portable
Electronic Devices (PED) restrictions
-- Any equipment items are stowed as
required
-- Exits and escape paths are clear of
obstructions
-- Aisles and cross-aisles are clear of
obstructions


-- Report to Captain "Cabin ready for -- Report to Purser "Cabin ready for
takeoff" . Press the CABIN READY takeoff"
on the FAP, if installed Take designated crew seat and
secure harness for takeoff
-- Adjust the cabin lighting
-- Take crew seat and secure harness
for takeoff
-- Perform the silent review -- Perform the silent review

CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING TAKEOFF AND INITIAL CLIMB
ALL

-- Remain seated until instructed by -- Check that passengers are seated,
the cockpit crew to leave seats with seat belts fastened
-- Remain seated until instructed by
the cockpit crew to leave seats

CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING FINAL CLIMB
ALL

-- Adjust cabin lighting -- Check lavatories
-- Close cabin curtains
-- Report to Purser -- Report to Purser

CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING CRUISE
ALL

-- Purser may decide, in the absence -- Frequently monitor lavatories, galleys
of instructions from the cockpit crew, and cabin (at least every 15
to discontinue non-safety related minutes)
tasks during turbulence -- Check that the fire detection
-- Check regularly FAP systems have not been disabled or
tampered with
-- Regularly report to Purser
-- Ensure passenger and crew
compliance with all lighted signs,
placards and crewmembers
instructions
-- Ensure that passengers use only
permitted electronic devices
-- Maintain communication with cockpit -- Maintain communication with Purser
crew, Purser and cabin -- Inform purser of cabin maintenance
crewmembers items or use of any emergency
-- Enter cabin maintenance items and equipment that should be entered in
any emergency equipment use into the cabin logbook
the cabin logbook.
-- Report to cockpit crew : Any -- Report to Purser: Any unusual or
unusual or abnormal situations abnormal situations

CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES FROM TOP OF DESCENT
ALL

-- Make preliminary announcement to -- Open cabin curtains
start securing the cabin Check that:
-- Passengers are seated with seat
belts fastened
-- Stowage of passengers and crew
as applicable
-- Social areas are vacant and secured
-- Crew rests areas are vacant and
door closed
-- Any equipment items are stowed, as
required
-- Commercial electrical equipments is
off
obstructions
obstructions
-- Complete and close the cabin -- Report to Purser: Any cabin
Logbook. maintenance items and use of any
emergency equipment.
-- Ask for any special ground
assistance
-- Request all updated arrival
information

CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING APPROACH
ALL

When the Fasten Seat Belt signs When the Fasten Seat Belt signs
come on: come on, ensure that:
-- Perform the Cabin Preparation for -- Passengers are seated with seat
Landing announcement. belts fastened
-- Stowage of passenger and crew
complies with regulations
-- Ensure passenger and crew
compliance with all lighted signs,
placards and crewmember
instructions
-- Tray tables are in the in upright
position and cup holders are stowed
-- Seat backs are in the upright
position, armrests and foot-rests are
correctly stowed.
-- Lavatories are vacant and secured
-- Social areas are vacant and
secured
-- TV monitors and In-Flight
Entertainment (IFE) equipment are
stowed
-- Passengers comply with Portable
Electronic Devices (PED) restrictions
-- Any equipment items are stowed, as
required
obstructions
obstructions
-- Report to the cockpit crew "Cabin -- Report to Purser "Cabin ready for
ready for landing". Press the CABIN landing" Take designated crew seat
READY FAP pushbutton, if installed and secure harness for landing.
-- Adjust the cabin lighting
-- Take designated crew seat and
secure harness for landing.
-- Perform silent review -- Perform silent review

ALL
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING FINAL APPROACH AND LANDING

-- Remain seated until instructed by -- Remain seated until instructed by
the cockpit crew to leave seats the cockpit crew to leave seats
-- Perform the silent review -- Perform the silent review

ALL
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING TAXI AFTER LANDING
CAUTION
The cabin crew must remain seated (except to perform a safety related duty)
until:
-- The aircraft arrives on to the stand.

-- Remain seated at designated crew -- Remain seated at designated crew
station station
Perform the Door Disarming procedure Perform the Door Disarming procedure
and cross check with the opposite door. and cross check with the opposite door.
-- Acknowledge doors checks when -- Report to Purser: Confirm that doors
received are disarmed and crossed checked.
-- Check the FAP to verify all doors
are disarmed.

CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING DISEMBARKATION
ALL

-- Go to disembarking station -- Go to assigned disembarking station
-- Manage the flow of passengers
-- Ensure that passengers comply with
"No Smoking" regulations, as
applicable
-- Disembarkation. of disabled
passengers

CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES AFTER LAST PASSENGER DISEMBARKS
ALL

-- perform general cabin check
(galleys, lavatories)
-- Report to Captain -- Report to Purser

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL PASSENGER SAFETY BRIEFING SEP 13/07
PASSENGER SAFETY BRIEFING
ALL
The safety briefing will prepare passengers for an emergency by providing them
with information regarding the location and operation of emergency equipment
that they may have to operate in the case of en emergency.
Passengers who are well briefed are better prepared for an emergency.
HOW -- A verbal announcement made by the Purser and a

demonstration performed by the cabin crewmembers or,
-- By an audio visual presentation
WHAT the The Passenger Safety Briefing should include the following:
Passenger -- Smoking regulations
Safety -- Back of the seat to be in the upright position and the tray table
Briefing stowed
must -- Location of the emergency exits
include -- Location and the use of floor proximity escape path markings
-- Stowage of hand baggage
-- Restrictions on the use of portable electronic devices
-- The location and contents of the safety briefing card
Passengers must receive a demonstration of the following:
-- The use of safety belts and/or safety harnesses, including how
to fasten and unfasten the seat belts and/or safety harnesses
-- The location and use of oxygen equipment. Passengers must
also be briefed to extinguish all smoking materials when
oxygen is used.
-- The location and use of life vests, if required.
Individual safety briefings
An individual safety briefing must be provided to a passenger who
is unable to receive information contained in the standard safety
briefing. These passengers may be:
-- Visually impaired
-- Hearing impaired
WHERE When the cabin crewmembers perform a demonstration, they
should stand in their assigned brief and secure areas, in the cabin.
When an audio visual presentation is provided cabin
crewmembers should stand in their assigned brief and secure
area in the cabin and point to the exits.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL PASSENGER SAFETY BRIEFING SEP 13/07
WHEN After takeoff

Passengers are reminded of the following:
-- Smoking regulations
-- The use of seat belts including the safety benefits of keeping
seat belts fastened irrespective of the Fasten Seat Belt sign
status.
In-flight
Due to turbulence passengers must be instructed to return to
their seats and fasten their seat belts.
In an emergency in-flight, passengers are instructed in the
emergency action that is appropriate to the circumstances.
Before landing
-- Use of seat belts and/or safety harnesses
-- Back of the seat to be in the upright position and tray table
stowed
-- Restrictions on the use of portable electronic devices
-- Restore and secure hand baggage in the correct locations
After landing
-- To remain seated with seat belts securely fastened until the
aircraft has come to a complete stop and the Fasten Seat Belt
signs have been switched off.
HOW it Passenger briefings and safety demonstrations must be performed
must be in a standardized manner:
done -- The speaker must clearly enunciate passenger briefings, and
should pause between sentences
-- Cabin crewmembers must simultaneously perform the safety
demonstration, and their gestures should reflect the speaker’s
step-by-step instructions in real time.
To clearly point out areas or safety items within the aircraft:
The cabin crewmember should ensure that their fingers (on
both hands) are together, and point towards the indicated area.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL REFUELLING DEFUELING SEP 13/07
REFUELING/DEFUELING PROCEDURE WITH PASSENGERS ON BOARD
ALL
CAUTION
The ground area beneath the exits intended for emergency evacuation and
slide deployment must be kept clear. Operators will need to designate such
exits, taking into account their ground servicing and catering operations.
The cockpit crew must notify the cabin crew before beginning to refuel/defuel.
CABIN PREPARATION BEFORE REFUELING/DEFUELING
The cabin crew must coordinate actions with the cockpit crew to ensure that:
captain
-- FASTEN SEAT BELT SIGNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
-- NO SMOKING SIGNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Purser
-- CABIN LIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
The cabin lighting must be on to enable identification of the emergency exits.
The cabin crew must check the following:

Cabin crewmembers
-- CABIN CURTAINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN AND SECURED
-- EXITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR OF ANY OBSTRUCTIONS
-- AISLES AND CROSS-AISLES . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR OF ANY OBSTRUCTIONS
PASSENGER BRIEFING BEFORE REFUELING/DEFUELING
Purser
-- PASSENGER BRIEFING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERFORM

Ladies and Gentlemen, (Pause)
We are about to refuel.
While refueling is in progress, for safety reasons, please:
-- Unfasten your seat belts

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL REFUELLING DEFUELING SEP 13/07
-- Smoking is prohibited
-- Use of cigarette lighters and matches is prohibited.
-- Individual items of electronic equipment must not be used while
Refuelling/Defuelling is in progress.
Please, remain seated.
Thank you.
Cabin crewmembers
-- PASSENGER COMPLIANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
DOOR AND EXIT PREPARATION DURING REFUELING/DEFUELING
Cabin crewmembers
-- AT DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMAIN
At least one cabin crewmember must be stationed at each door, and must be
prepared for an emergency, if required.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL Cabin Crew Briefing SEP 13/07
CABIN CREW BRIEFING
ALL
-- EMERGENCY EXIT DEMONSTRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANNOUNCE

Note: As an example, The announcement could be performed as follows:
-- Ladies and gentlemen
-- (pause)
-- We would like to request your attention for a few moments:
-- Your cabin crewmembers are now going to provide you with the safety
briefing of this Airbus aircraft.
-- ASSIGNED BRIEFING AREAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GO TO AND PREPARE
-- EMERGENCY EXIT ANNOUNCEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESUME

Note: As an example, The announcement could be performed as follows:
-- The emergency exits are clearly marked by an "exit" sign
-- The exits are located on both sides of the cabin:
. At the front
. (pause)
. At the center
. (pause) and
. At the rear of the cabin.
. (pause)
-- EMERGENCY EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INDICATE

Note: Depending on their Assigned Briefing Area, the Cabin Crewmember
performs the applicable gesture.

NOC 08110 04497 0001

NOC 08110 04498 0001

NOC 08110 04499 0001

NOC 08110 04500 0001
All gestures should be repeated twice, in order to perform that will attract the
passengers’ attention.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GSM ON BOARD SYSTEM SEP 13/07
NOT APPLICABLE

ABNORMAL/EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 09.000
09.010 INTRODUCTION
-- GENERAL INFORMATION 1
-- PRESENTATION 2
09.020 FIRE PROTECTION

-- GUIDELINES FOR IN-FLIGHT SMOKE AND FIRE 1
MANAGEMENT
-- CLASSES OF FIRE 3
-- AWARENESS TO SMOKE IN HIDDEN AREAS 6
-- AREA SPECIFIC FIRES 8
-- FIRE FIGHTING ROLE DEFINITION 11
-- BASIC FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE 13
-- CABIN SMOKE/FIRE PROCEDURE ’HIDDEN AREA’ OR 15
’UNKNOWN SOURCE’
-- LAVATORY SMOKE/FIRE PROCEDURE 16
-- PAX SEAT SMOKE 19
-- GALLEY SMOKE 20
-- OVEN SMOKE 21
-- OVERHEAD BIN SMOKE/FIRE PROCEDURE 22
09.025 EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS

-- EMERGENCY CALLS 1
-- PLANNED EMERGENCY LANDING 2
-- UNPLANNED EMERGENCY LANDING 7
09.030 EMERGENCY CABIN EVACUATION

-- EVACUATION GUIDELINES 1
-- COCKPIT-ASSIGNED DUTIES FOR EVACUATION 7
-- CABIN CREW-ASSIGNED AREAS FOR EVACUATION 8
-- EMERGENCY PASSENGER DOOR OPERATION 9
-- TO OPEN THE OVERWING EXIT 11
-- CABIN PREPARATION FOR PLANNED ON GROUND 12
EVACUATION
-- ON GROUND EVACUATION 14
-- PRECAUTIONARY EVACUATION 16

-- CABIN PREPARATION FOR DITCHING 18

-- EVACUATION ON WATER 20
09.040 EMERGENCY COCKPIT EVACUATION

-- COCKPIT EVACUATION THROUGH WINDOW 1
-- COCKPIT EVACUATION THROUGH COCKPIT DOOR 2
09.050 DEPRESSURIZATION
-- CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION 1
09.055 TURBULENCE MANAGEMENT

-- TURBULENCE MANAGEMENT 1
-- CABIN CREW PROCEDURES 3
-- ANTICIPATED TURBULENCE PROCEDURES 5
-- UNANTICIPATED TURBULENCE PROCEDURES 7
-- POST TURBULENCE DUTIES 8
09.070 MISCELLANEOUS
-- FLIGHT CREWMEMBER INCAPACITATION 1
-- FLIGHT CREWMEMBER’S CHECK-LIST USE 3
-- BOMB ON BOARD 4
-- SINGLE BLADE LAVATORY DOOR EMERGENCY 10
OPERATION
-- BI-FOLDING LAVATORY DOOR EMERGENCY OPERATION 11
-- REJECTED TAKEOFF 12

GENERAL INFORMATION
ALL
Abnormal/Emergency procedures are actions that must be taken by the cabin

crew after a failure.
The CCOM’s Abnormal/Emergency procedures are those recommended by Airbus
as operational guidelines.
Standard operating procedures and Abnormal/Emergency procedures should be
developed in accordance with Operator policies, procedures and local Aviation
Authority requirements.
Abnormal/Emergency procedures are synchronized with the FCOM 3.02 (Flight
Crew Operating Manual) procedures, requiring flight and cabin crews to
communicate and cooperate.
Abnormal/Emergency procedures, specific to the cabin crew, concern smoke/fire
fighting, depressurization, etc.
Aviation Authorities do not certify the Abnormal/Emergency procedures.
They are continuously updated. Revisions take into account the feedback
received from all Operators, in addition to the results of continuous monitoring of
the aircraft’s in-service life.
Each Abnormal/Emergency Procedure is considered to be a separate DU, which
is updated according to its validity criteria.

PRESENTATION
ALL
Emergency procedure titles are displayed within a rectangle, that has two black
squares on each side.
Abnormal procedure titles are displayed within a rectangle, but there are no
black square on each side.
PROCEDURE TITLES
TITLE FOR ABNORMAL PROCEDURE
TITLE FOR EMERGENCY PROCEDURE

NOC 09010 00229 0001
When inserted in the procedure, expanded information appears in italics. This

information :
-- Identifies the failure.
-- Explains actions for which the reason is not evident.
-- Furnishes additional background info.
When several procedures appear under the same title, a black square indicates
the beginning of each procedure.
Only one procedure is applicable at a time. For example :
BLACK SQUARE
GALLEY SMOKE
SMOKE SOURCE IS IDENTIFIED
A PROCEDURE TO BE APPLIED
SMOKE SOURCE IS NOT

B A OR B
IDENTIFIED
NOC 09010 00230 0001
Black squares also indicate various possible procedures, among which only one
is applicable. For example :

BLACK SQUARES
ON GROUND EMER/EVACUATION
OUTSIDE CONDITIONS . . . . . CHECK A PROCEDURE TO BE APPLIED
IF OUTSIDE CONDITIONS ARE UNSAFE
B (A + B) OR (A + C)
IF OUTSIDE CONDITIONS ARE UNSAFE C
NOC 09010 00231 0001
If an action depends on a precondition, a black dot identifies the precondition.

For example :
BLACK DOT
ABNORMAL SLIDERAFT DEPLOYMENT

SLIDE RAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DEPLOY
IF THE SLIDERAFT DOES NOT AUTOMATICALLY INFLATE :
RED, MANUAL INFLATION HANDLE . . . . . . PULL
NOC 09010 00232 0001

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL FIRE PROTECTION SEP 13/07
ALL
GUIDELINES FOR IN-FLIGHT SMOKE AND FIRE

MANAGEMENT
The cabin crew is responsible for effectively dealing with in-flight emergencies
that involve smoke and fire. The following factors are important to enable cabin
crew to correctly manage a smoke or fire event in-flight.
FIGHT THE FIRE
The cabin crew must be aware of the importance of taking immediate and
aggressive action to determine the source of the smoke/fire.
The cabin crew must take action to:
-- Rapidly evaluate the situation
-- Determine the source of the smoke/fire
-- Access the fire, if necessary
-- Fight the fire, using firefighting equipment, and/or any other appropriate item
that is rapidly available (e.g. non-alcoholic beverages, including carbonated
drinks, coffee, tea, juice)
-- Smother the fire by using wet pillows, or wet blankets, in order to stop the fire
from igniting again.
COMMUNICATE AND COORDINATE
The cabin crew must be aware of the importance for the need for on effective
crew communication and coordination. When smoke/fire is detected, the cabin
crew must immediately inform:
-- The flight crew
-- The Purser

ALL
GUIDELINES FOR IN-FLIGHT SMOKE AND FIRE

MANAGEMENT (CONT’D)
FIRE PREVENTION
The cabin crew must be vigilant and pay attention to any unusual odors, noises,
unusual system behavior that may be an indication of a possible fire.
-- Lavatories, including the associated smoke detector and wastebin fire
extinguisher.
-- Galleys, ensuring that no flammable materials, such as paper napkins, and
towels are not left near or in heated galley equipment. The cabin crew monitor
the galley electrical panels for fault indications and tripped circuit breakers.
-- The cabin must regularly monitored for fire hazards.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Circuit breakers are designed to provide protection from overheating, due to an

abnormal electrical load on a piece of equipment. The circuit breaker will trip
automatically when a predetermined electrical load is detected. When the circuit
breaker trips this will result in the total or partial deactivation of the affected
electrical installation.
WARNING
-- Do not reset a tripped circuit breaker, because this may cause more
damage to the equipment, may affect other electrical equipment, may cause
an overheat and/or smoke.
-- Only use circuit breakers to perform approved procedures.
Cabin reports of tripped circuit breakers should be reported to the flight crew
immediately, and entered in the maintenance logbook.

ALL
CLASSES OF FIRE
Class A fires involve the following types of material:
-- Wood
-- Cloth
-- Paper
-- Rubber
-- Plastic
Fires from these materials require the cooling effects
of quantities of water. Use a water extinguisher or
liquids containing a large quantity of water, (e.g. tea,
coffee, juice).
WARNING
Do not use liquids that have alcohol.
Class B fires involve flammable liquids, for example:

-- Oils
-- Grease
-- Aircraft fuel
-- Hydraulic fluid
-- Tar
-- Oil -based paints
-- Lacquers
-- Flammable gases
Fires from these materials require an extinguishing
agent that have a blanketing effect.
WARNING
Do not use a water extinguisher for class B fires.
Use a halon extinguisher.

ALL
CLASSES OF FIRE (CONT’D)

Class C fires involve electrical equipment, for
example:
-- Coffeemakers,
-- Ovens
-- Wiring
-- Circuit breakers
WARNING
Do not use a water extinguisher on electrical
fires, because this may cause electric shock and
damage other electrical circuits. Use a halon
extinguisher.
A halon extinguisher would be required.
Class D fires involve combustible metals, for

example:
-- Magnesium
-- Titanium
-- Zirconium
-- Sodium
-- Lithium
WARNING
Do not use a halon extinguisher or water for a
class D fire.
Special dry powder extinguishers are used on these

types of fire, because of the possible chemical
reaction between the extinguishing agent and the
burning metal.

ALL
CLASSES OF FIRE (CONT’D)
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS APPLICABLE TO EACH THE CLASS OF FIRE
The cabin crew should select the appropriate fire extinguisher according to the
type of fire, class A, B, C or D:
1. Carbon Dioxide Extinguisher - For class B or C fires
2. Water Extinguisher - For class A fires
3. Dry Chemical Extinguishers - For class A, B, or C fires
4. Halogenated Hydrocarbons (Halon or BCF) - For class A, B, or C
WARNING
When a halon extinguisher is used on a class A fire, the affected area
must be dampened with water afterward to prevent the fire from re-ignition.
5. Specialized Dry Powder Extinguishers - For class D fires.

ALL
AWARENESS TO SMOKE IN HIDDEN AREAS
It is important for cabin crew to be aware of the potential sources of smoke

onboard the aircraft, and to familiarize themselves with these areas. This enables
crewmembers to determine the source of the smoke, and take immediate action:
-- Crown Area: This area is above the ceiling panels. This overhead area
includes wiring bundles, control surface cables, passenger emergency oxygen
system, parts of the air conditioning system, and components of the aircraft
In-Flight Entertainment System (IFE).
-- Dado Panels: These are the vents that are at the foot of the sidewall panels,
on each side of the passenger cabin. Most aircraft air conditioning systems
supply conditioned air from the cabin ceiling. This conditioned air then flows
from the top of the cabin to the bottom, exits via the return grills, and finally
leaves the aircraft via the outflow valves.
-- Triangle Area: This area is below the floor outboard of the cargo area. This
area hosts hydraulic lines, electrical components and wiring bundles.

ALL
AWARENESS TO SMOKE IN HIDDEN AREAS

(CONT’D)
AIR DISTRIBUTION
EXTRACTED AIR
INLET AIR
CROWN AREA
DADO PANELS DADO PANELS
TRIANGLE AREA TRIANGLE AREA
NOC 09020 04297 0001

ALL
AREA SPECIFIC FIRES

Firefighting methods are different depending on the location and the source of
the fire.
However, there are some general guidelines that the cabin crew should be
observe.
FIRES IN HIDDEN AREAS
Smoke emissions from sidewall panels and ceiling panels may indicate a hidden
fire. In some cases, smoke may appear some distance from the source.
When the cabin crew suspects a fire in a hidden area, for example, behind a
panel, they should try to locate a "hot spot". A "hot spot" is an abnormally warm
area. A "hot spot" is usually a good indicator as to where the source of the fire is.
Note: To find the "hot spot", the cabin crew should move the back of their hand
along the panels to find the hottest area.
This is because, the skin on the back of the hand is thinner and, is more
sensitive to temperature changes than the palm.
It may be necessary to remove or lever panels to insert the nozzle of the fire
extinguisher. Use a crash axe that has an insulated handle to lever panels.
CAUTION
Be very careful when removing, or levering panels, because some of these
areas may contain essential wiring or aircraft systems.
FIRES IN ENCLOSED AREAS
When a fire occurs in an enclosed area such as, a lavatory, an overhead bin, a
closet or a crew rest area, before opening the door, always check the door
panel for heat.
Note: The cabin crew should check for heat using the back of the hand.

ALL
AREA SPECIFIC FIRES (CONT’D)
• If the cabin crew suspects a fire in an enclosed area, they must:

-- Open the door or the overhead bin slightly (just enough to pass the nozzle
of the fire extinguisher).
• If the fire is visible, the cabin crew must:

-- Discharge the fire extinguisher at the base of the fire in a sweeping motion.
• If the source of the fire has not been located, do not randomly
discharge the fire extinguisher into an enclosed area:
-- The cabin crew must actively search the entire area to locate the source of
the fire.
GALLEY SMOKE/FIRE
GALLEY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
The source of smoke/fire in the galley areas is usually due to the malfunction of
electrical equipment, such as, coffee makers, water boilers, ovens etc.
When the source of the smoke/fire has been identified as coming from a piece
of electrical equipment, the cabin crew must:
-- Switch off the power
-- Pull the associated circuit breaker, that is located on the galley electrical panel.
OVEN FIRES
In the case of an oven fire, the cabin crew must:

-- Keep the oven door closed, to deprive the fire of oxygen. In many cases the
fire will extinguish by itself
-- Switch off the power to the oven
-- Pull the associated circuit breaker, on the galley electrical panel.

ALL
AREA SPECIFIC FIRES (CONT’D)
• If the situation worsens, the cabin crew must:

-- Don a PBE and fire gloves for protection
-- Open the oven door slightly, just enough to insert the nozzle of the fire
extinguisher
-- Insert the nozzle of the fire extinguisher, and discharge the fire extinguisher
-- Close the oven door
-- Repeat the procedure as necessary.

ALL
FIRE FIGHTING ROLE DEFINITION

The firefighting procedures require a team of at least three cabin crewmembers.
A team effort is the most effective way to combat an onboard fire. The roles are
defined as follows:
. the Firefighter
. the Communicator
. the Assistant Firefighter
Crew communication and coordination is important, and the roles of these three
cabin crewmembers complement each other, because their tasks are performed
simultaneously, in order to optimize the firefighting effort.
THE FIREFIGHTER
The first crewmember that finds the fire will take the role of the Firefighter.
This cabin crewmember:
-- Alerts other cabin crewmembers
-- Obtains the nearest fire extinguisher (consider the use of a PBE)
-- Immediately locates the source of the fire
-- Fights the fire.
THE COMMUNICATOR
The second cabin crewmember on the scene.

The communicator:
-- Informs the flight crew of the fire/smoke:
. Location
. Source
. Severity/Density (color of smoke/odor)
. Firefighting progress
. Number of fire extinguishers used
. Time firefighting action started.
-- Maintains the communication link between the cabin and the flight crew, via
an interphone that is near the firefighting scene
-- Provides the flight crew with an accurate description of the firefighting effort,
and of the situation in the cabin.

ALL
FIRE FIGHTING ROLE DEFINITION (CONT’D)
THE ASSISTANT FIREFIGHTER
The third cabin crewmember on the scene.

The Assistant Firefighter:
-- Supplies extra firefighting equipment
-- Supports the firefighting effort
-- Removes flammable material from the area
-- The Assistant Firefighter must be prepared to replace the Firefighter, and
exchange roles with the Firefighter, as required.
SUPPORT CREWMEMBERS
These crewmembers are not directly involved in the firefighting effort, but will be
required provide assistance (e.g. to relocate passengers, administer first-aid, calm
and reassure passengers).
After any fire or smoke occurrence, one crewmember should be responsible for
monitoring the affected area for the remainder of the flight, and should regularly
report to the Purser.

ALL
BASIC FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE

The Firefighter, the Communicator and the Assistant Firefighter perform their
roles and actions SIMULTANEOUSLY.
FIREFIGHTER
-- OTHER CREWMEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALERT
-- FIREFIGHTING EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EQUIP

Take the nearest appropriate fire extinguisher. Consider the use of a PBE.
-- SOURCE OF THE FIRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOCATE
-- FIRE EXTINGUISHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISCHARGE AT BASE OF FIRE

-- FIREFIGHTING EFFORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAINTAIN UNTIL THE FIRE IS OUT
• When the fire is out:
-- AFFECTED AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DAMPEN

The affected area should be dampened to prevent the fire from re-ignition.
WARNING
Do not dampen electrical equipment.
COMMUNICATOR
-- FLIGHT CREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NOTIFY IMMEDIATELY VIA INTERPHONE

Use the interphone, to prevent smoke from contaminating the cockpit. Give
the following information:

ALL
BASIC FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE (CONT’D)

. Location
. Source
. Severity/Density (color of smoke/odor)
. Firefighting progress
. Number of fire extinguishers used
. Time firefighting action started.
-- COMMUNICATION WITH FLIGHT CREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAINTAIN

-- INSTRUCTIONS FROM FLIGHT CREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMMUNICATE TO
CREWMEMBERS
ASSISTANT FIREFIGHTER
-- FIREFIGHTING EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SUPPLY
• If necessary:
-- REPLACE FIREFIGHTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PREPARE

-- PBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DON
SUPPORT CREWMEMBERS
-- PASSENGERS AND PORTABLE OXYGEN . MOVE FROM IMMEDIATE AREA

-- FIREFIGHTING EFFORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASSIST AND SUPPORT
-- PASSENGERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CALM AND REASSURE
• When the fire is out:
-- DEDICATED CREWMEMBER . . . MONITOR FOR THE REMAINDER OF

THE FLIGHT
The affected area must be monitored for the remainder of the flight.
Regular reports must be made to the Chief Purser.

ALL
CABIN SMOKE/FIRE PROCEDURE "HIDDEN

AREA" OR "UNKNOWN SOURCE"
Smoke emissions from sidewall panels, ceiling panels and vents may indicate a
hidden fire. In some cases, smoke may appear some distance away from it’s
actual source.
-- BASIC FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPLY
FIREFIGHTER
-- SOURCE OF SMOKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOCATE

-- REASON FOR SMOKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INVESTIGATE AND DETERMINE
Note: To determine the source of a potential fire, crewmembers should check for
"hot spots" on panels. Use the back of the hand along the panels to feel
for the presence of unusually hot areas.
• WHEN "HOT SPOT" IS LOCATED:
-- AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACCESS WITH CARE

CAUTION
When gaining access behind panels, be aware of the presence of wiring
bundles. Make a careful incision in the panel to pass extinguisher nozzle,
or lever the panel to gain access.
-- FIRE EXTINGUISHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISCHARGE

ALL
LAVATORY SMOKE/FIRE PROCEDURE

Lavatory smoke/fires can be caused by electrical system malfunctions for
example, the water heater, toilet vacuum, or may be caused by burning materials
usually caused by a carelessly discarded cigarette in the lavatory waste bin.
COCKPIT CREW
-- SMOKE LAVATORY SMOKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CREW AWARENESS

Maintain contact with the cabin crew to follow up on the status of the fire.
CABIN CREW PROCEDURE
On the FAP, and/or related AAP, the SMOKE warning indication comes on, with
an associated triple chime, repeated every 30 seconds (optionally 10 seconds).
-- AFFECTED LAVATORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOCATE

On all AIPs, the affected lavatory is clearly indicated and a red indicator
flashes.
The amber light, on the respective ACPs, and the outside Smoke/Pax call
indicator of the affected lavatory flashes.
Affected lavatory is also shown on the FAP Smoke page.
WARNING
Do not open the lavatory door. First, check the door for heat. Using the back
of the hand, feel the panel of the lavatory door, to determine temperature and
presence of fire.
-- LAVATORY DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK FOR HEAT
• If the door lavatory panel is cool:
-- LAVATORY DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN SLOWLY WITH CAUTION

-- SOURCE OF SMOKE/FIRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOCATE

ALL
LAVATORY SMOKE/FIRE PROCEDURE (CONT’D)
• If fire is present:
-- BASIC FIREFIGHTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPLY

Note: There is an automatic fire extinguisher installed, above the wastebin
in each lavatory.
-- FIRE EXTINGUISHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISCHARGE AT BASE OF FIRE

-- SMOKE PUSHBUTTON (ON THE FAP or AAP IN YOUR ZONE) . . RESET
To silence the chime, and reset all visual warnings on the ACPs, the AIPs.
Note: The amber Smoke indicator of the affected lavatory, the SMOKE RESET
pushbutton on the FAP and respective AAP and the indication on the
FAP Smoke page remain ON until all smoke has dissipated.
• If door panel is hot
Note: If the door is hot, the fire is at a critical stage. Have extra fire fighting
equipment available and ready to use.
-- PBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DON
-- FIREFIGHTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROTECT SELF
Stay low and crouch down, using the door panel as protection against
smoke and heat.
-- (*)LAVATORY DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN SLIGHTLY
Just enough to pass the nozzle of the extinguisher.
-- (*)FIRE EXTINGUISHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISCHARGE
-- (*)LAVATORY DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSE
-- FIREFIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPEAT AS NECESSARY

(*)Repeat last four steps of the procedure, as necessary.

ALL
LAVATORY SMOKE/FIRE PROCEDURE (CONT’D)
• If situation is cleared :
-- AFFECTED LAVATORY . . . . MONITOR FOR THE REMAINDER OF THE

FLIGHT
To ensure that the lavatory remains clear of smoke.

ALL
PAX SEAT SMOKE

The class of fire will determine how a passenger seat smoke/fire event is dealt
with. The source of smoke/fire may come the IFE screen, ISPSS outlet, or from
the seat boxes located under the passenger seats.
• If passenger seat smoke is suspected :
-- CABIN CREW . . . . INFORM AND COORDINATE WITH COCKPIT CREW

-- BASIC FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . APPLY IF NECESSARY

ALL
GALLEY SMOKE
Galley smoke/fire occurrences can be caused by electrical equipment malfunction
for example, coffee makers, ovens, water boilers etc.
• If the source of the smoke/fire is identified from a piece of electrical

equipment:
-- ELECTRICAL POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

-- APPLICABLE CIRCUIT BREAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PULL
Circuit breakers are located on the galley’s centralized electrical panel.
Pulling the applicable circuit breaker should stop the smoke/fire.
• If the smoke/electrical smell source cannot be identified:
GALLEY SHUTOFF
-- MAIN GALLEY POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

-- ALL CIRCUIT BREAKERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PULL
• If the smoke/fire continues:
-- BASIC FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPLY

ALL
OVEN SMOKE
Oven smoke/fires occurrences may be caused by the oven contents, such as,
food or grease deposits. Electrical malfunctions may be another source.
-- OVEN DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KEEP CLOSED

Note: By keeping the oven door closed, the fire will usually extinguish itself.
-- OVEN POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

-- CIRCUIT BREAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PULL
The applicable oven circuit breaker is located on the galley’s centralized
electrical panel.
• IF SMOKE OR FIRE IS STILL PRESENT:
-- PBE AND FIRE GLOVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DON
-- OVEN DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN SLIGHTLY

Note: Open the oven door slightly, just enough to insert the nozzle of the
fire extinguisher into the oven.
-- (*)FIRE EXTINGUISHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISCHARGE
-- (*)OVEN DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSE
-- (*)FIREFIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPEAT AS NECESSARY
(*)Repeat last three steps of the procedure, as necessary.

ALL
OVERHEAD BIN SMOKE/FIRE PROCEDURE
Smoke/fire in overhead bins may be caused by the contents or a possible

electrical malfunction in the Passenger Service Unit (PSU).
• If smoke is visibly emitting from an overhead bin:
-- BASIC FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPLY
FIREFIGHTER
-- OVERHEAD BIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK FOR HEAT

Check for heat. Using the back of the hand, feel the overhead bin to
determine the temperature and presence of fire.
-- (*)OVERHEAD BIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN SLIGHTLY

Enough to pass the nozzle of the fire extinguisher.
CAUTION
Opening the overhead bin more than is necessary risks contaminating the
cabin with smoke, and puts occupants at risk of smoke inhalation.
-- (*)FIRE EXTINGUISHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISCHARGE

Note: The fire extinguisher must be discharged into the overhead bin, away
from the seat, to prevent debris from contaminating the cabin.
-- (*)OVERHEAD BIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSE AND LATCH
-- FIREFIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPEAT AS NECESSARY

(*)Repeat last 3 steps of the procedure, as necessary.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SEP 13/07
ALL
EMERGENCY CALLS
In the event if an abnormal or an emergency situation in the cabin, any cabin
crewmember may make this call.
EMERGENCY CALLS TO FLIGHT CREW
CABIN CREW FLIGHT CREW

In the event if an abnormal or an The flight crew must reply
emergency situation in the cabin:
-- Press the PRIO then CAPT
-- Wait for the flight crew to reply

ALL
PLANNED EMERGENCY LANDING
EMERGENCY ALERT
CAPTAIN PURSER CABIN CREW

-- Using the PA -- Go immediately to the -- Stop all activities,
announce "Purser to cockpit to be briefed secure any equipment
Cockpit, please!" by the captain that is being used
-- Go to designated crew
station and standby
the interphone ready
for Purser’s briefing.

ALL
PLANNED EMERGENCY LANDING (CONT’D)

CAPTAIN PURSER CABIN CREW
Brief the Purser Ask the captain for the
following information:
-- Nature of the
emergency and
intentions
-- Time available to
prepare the cabin
(synchronize watches)
-- Signal to brace
-- Signal to remain
seated (if no
evacuation is required.
On ground emergency
only)
-- Special instructions (for
example, exits that
may be unusable)
-- Acknowledge the
captains briefing
-- Ask the captain who
will make the initial
announcement and
when.
-- Brief the cabin crew -- Acknowledge Purser’s
Note: The captain should, using the PRIO CONF briefing.
if time permits, Call function on the
allow the Purser interphone handset.
time to brief the
cabin crew.

ALL
PASSENGER PREPARATION
FLIGHT CREW PURSER

-- Turn on the NO SMOKING/FASTEN
SEAT BELT signs If the captain’s duties permit, the
-- If duties permit, make a PA captain will make the initial
announcement to the passengers of announcement.
the nature of the emergency If this is not possible for the captain to
make the announcement, the Purser
Note: For psychological reasons, the will make the initial announcement to
flight crew should make the the passengers stating:
initial announcement to the -- The nature of the emergency and
passengers. the captains intentions
-- The need to prepare the cabin
-- Follow the instructions of cabin crew
member.
Make the Emergency Announcement
containing the following:
-- Brace positions
-- Locations of exits
-- Loose items
-- ABPs
-- Safety card review
-- Flotation devices (Ditching Only).
Note: The Purser must monitor the

time during the cabin preparation
announcements. Allow time for
task to be accomplished, when
the allocated time is up, inform
the cabin crew by announcing.
"Cabin crew return to
demonstration positions"
"Finish preparations".

ALL
BRACE FOR IMPACT
FLIGHT CREW CABIN CREW

-- Announce using the PA system -- Shout "BRACE, BRACE , BRACE"
"BRACE FOR IMPACT" until aircraft comes to complete stop.
Note: The flight crew will make the
"Brace for impact" command
approximately 1 minute before
landing.
INITIATING THE EVACUATION

-- Using the PA system announce Shout evacuation commands:
"EVACUATE, EVACUATE" -- "EVACUATE, EVACUATE" "SEAT
-- Press the EVAC CMD pb to sound BELTS OFF"
the evacuation horn. -- "LEAVE EVERYTHING"
-- "GET OUT".
• If there is no communication from the flight crew and, a catastrophic

situation exists in the cabin, the cabin crew should initiate the evacuation.
PURSER/CABIN CREWMEMBER
To initiate an evacuation use whatever means are available:
-- Use the PA system, megaphone or shout the evacuation commands
"EVACUATE, EVACUATE" "SEAT BELTS OFF"
-- Press the EVAC CMD pb on the FAP
Note: The evacuation horn will sound in the cabin only if the switch in the
cockpit is set to CAPT/PURS.

ALL
EVACUATION NOT REQUIRED
In the case of a planned emergency landing, when the passengers have been
prepared to anticipate evacuating the aircraft. If no evacuation is required after
the aircraft has landed it will be necessary for the flight crew to inform the cabin
crew and passengers as soon as possible in order to prevent an unnecessary
evacuation from being initiated.

When an evacuation is not required The Purser should reinforce this
the flight crew must make an message using the PA to announce to
immediate announcement passengers that an evacuation of the
-- Using the PA system announce aircraft is not necessary, and ask
"REMAIN SEATED". passengers to remain in their seats

ALL
UNPLANNED EMERGENCY LANDING

In the case of an abnormal or emergency situation during the takeoff or landing
such as:
-- Imminent impact or,
-- Aircraft damage.
The command to brace for impact should be given as a minimum warning to
passengers.
The brace command can be initiated by the flight crew or the cabin crew.
BRACE COMMANDS - UNPLANNED EMERGENCY LANDING

If the flight crew are aware of If the cabin crew are aware of
imminent impact: imminent impact, or on the command
-- Using PA announce "BRACE FOR of the flight crew:
IMPACT" -- Cabin crew must adopt their brace
position and shout "HEADS DOWN,
STAY DOWN"
-- Repeat the brace commands until
the aircraft has come to a complete
stop.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL EMERGENCY CABIN EVACUATION JAN 08/08
ALL
EVACUATION GUIDELINES
There are many factors that contribute to the successful evacuation of an aircraft:
-- The procedural knowledge of the cabin crew: This includes training,
experience and behavior,
-- The aircraft configuration, the layout of the cabin,
-- The environment inside and outside the aircraft (e.g., the presence of smoke,
fire, the cabin lighting, and outside conditions),
-- The behavior of the passengers, their age, level of fitness and motivation.
During an emergency, it is essential for the cabin crew to be able to apply their
knowledge of procedures, and rapidly adapt to the situation.
In the case of a life threatening situation onboard the aircraft, it is essential that
the aircraft is evacuated quickly and efficiently to increase the occupants chances
of survival.

ALL
EVACUATION GUIDELINES (CONT’D)
CROWD CONTROL
One of the key elements to a efficient evacuation is effective crowd control and
cabin management by the cabin crew. The actions and commands of the cabin
crew will influence the performance of the passengers during the evacuation.
1. The objectives for the cabin crewmembers are:
-- To quickly establish the passenger flow at each usable exit,
-- To evacuate the aircraft as quickly as possible.
2. The cabin crew must use positive verbal commands and physical gestures, in
order to efficiently direct passengers towards the exits and assist them down
the slides.
Note: Cabin crew must also be prepared to use some physical force, if
necessary, to evacuate some passengers from the aircraft.
The commands used by the cabin crew should be:
-- Assertive
-- Positive
-- Short
-- Loud
-- Clear
Note: The cabin crew must be assertive and be in complete control of the
evacuation.
3. Situational awareness will play a large part in the evacuation process. The
cabin crew must be able to assess not only what is happening at their exit,
but also what is happening inside the cabin.
The cabin crewmembers must be able to:
-- Assess the flow of passengers from the exits and be aware to changes in
the passenger flow rate,
-- Be aware of the status of the other exits, especially when redirecting the
passengers,
-- To adapt their actions and commands when the cabin is congested or an
exit is dried up, in order to keep the evacuation flowing and maximize the
use of all exits.

ALL
MANAGING EXITS DURING AN EVACUATION
ASSESSING THE OUTSIDE CONDITIONS
Before opening the door the cabin crew must assess the outside conditions. Use
the observation window to check that the slide deployment area is clear of:
-- Smoke
-- Fire
-- Obstacles and
-- Debris.
CABIN CREW ACTIONS AT USABLE EXITS
Once the exit has been opened, the cabin crew must visually check that the
slide is fully deployed and inflated.
Note: In dark of night conditions, the cabin crewmember should visually check
that the slide deployment area is clear of fire, obstacles or debris, to
ensure that the area is safe before starting to evacuate passengers.
The cabin crewmember must stand clear of the exit in the frame assist space,
and hold on to the frame assist handle.
The cabin crew must monitor the evacuation, and maintain an even flow of
passengers from each exit, the cabin crew should use commands, such as:
-- "Jump, jump"
-- "Hurry"
Some passengers may try to sit on the door sill before going down the slide.
This must be avoided, as it will delay the flow of passengers from the exit.
The cabin crew must be aware of what is happening inside the cabin, and
outside the aircraft. The cabin crew must:
-- Keep shouting their commands to bring passengers to the exits
-- Be aware of any developments that would render the exit unusable, for
example:
-- Slide damage,
-- Fire in the area,
-- External hazard.

ALL
CABIN CREW ACTIONS AT UNUSABLE EXITS
An exit may be unusable at the beginning of an evacuation or may become

unusable during the evacuation.
1. An exit may be unusable at the beginning of the evacuation, for one of the
following reasons:
-- The exit is jammed, and will not open,
-- Slide does not deploy correctly or the slide is damaged,
-- There are external hazards.
The cabin crewmember who is responsible for the unusable exit must inform the
passengers that the exit is blocked, and redirect the passengers to the nearest
usable exit.
Note: The cabin crewmember must guard the exit to prevent the exit from being
used.
When redirecting passengers, the cabin crewmember should listen for the other
crewmembers giving the command to "Come this way" or "Jump" for confirmation
that another exit is usable.
Redirect passengers to the nearest usable exit with the appropriate positive
commands and gestures, such as:
-- "Go ahead, go straight"
-- "Go that way" with the appropriate gesture
-- "Go across"
-- "Quick, quick"
-- "Hurry up, hurry up"

ALL

2. An exit becomes unusable during the evacuation:
The cabin crew must be aware of the environment inside and outside the cabin.
If the situation changes during the evacuation, for example:
-- The slide becomes damaged,
-- A fire develops in the area,
-- There are other external hazards.
Then the cabin crewmember at the unusable exit must perform the following
actions:
-- Stop the evacuation,
-- Block the exit and redirect passengers to the nearest usable exit,
-- Guard the exit.
PRE-CABIN CREW EVACUATION
When the flow of passengers to the exit begins to slow down, the cabin crew
should check the cabin and call remaining all remaining passengers to the exits.
When the flow of passengers has stopped, the cabin crew should check their
assigned area for any remaining passengers.
When the cabin crewmember’s assigned area is empty, or it is no longer safe to
remain onboard the aircraft, the cabin crewmember should evacuate through the
first usable exit.
If an evacuation occurs away from an airfield, the cabin crew should take their
assigned emergency equipment from the aircraft, if the situation permits.

ALL
POST EVACUATION DUTIES
The cabin crew will be responsible for a large number of passengers until they
are assisted by the rescue and emergency services personnel.
When the cabin crew have evacuated the aircraft they must manage the
passengers on the ground, by:
-- Assisting passengers away from the slides
-- Directing passengers upwind and away from the aircraft
-- Keeping passengers away from, fuel , fire and vehicles
-- Assembling the passengers and keeping them together
-- Enforcing no smoking and prohibiting the use of mobile phones
-- Assisting passengers and giving first aid, when necessary
-- Making a passenger headcount, if possible.
Note: Cabin crewmembers seated near a megaphone should consider taking it
from the aircraft to assist with crowd management post evacuation.

ALL
COCKPIT-ASSIGNED DUTIES FOR EVACUATION
• If it is NOT POSSIBLE to reach the passenger cabin :
The cockpit crew should evacuate the aircraft via the cockpit clearview
windows, by using the escape ropes.
On ground, each crewmember must help passengers, and direct them away
from the aircraft.
• If it is POSSIBLE to reach the passenger cabin :
-- Is the last person to leave the cockpit : Proceeds to the cabin

and, helps with passenger evacuation, as necessary.
-- Is the last person to leave the aircraft : Checks that all persons
have evacuated the aircraft.
CAPT
-- Evacuates the aircraft, via the rear door, or any other available
exit, if he/she cannot reach the rear door.
-- On ground, he/she takes command of operations until rescue
units arrive.
-- Proceeds to the cabin, and takes the emergency equipment.
-- Evacuates the aircraft, using any available exit.
F/O
-- Helps passengers on ground, and directs them away from the
aircraft.

ALL
CABIN CREW-ASSIGNED AREAS FOR

EVACUATION
CABIN CREW ASSIGNED ASSIGNED ASSIGNED AREA

DESIGNATION JUMPSEAT AND JUMPSEAT
DOOR
1 PURSER DOOR 1 LH FWD OUTBOARD FWD/MID
1 CABIN CREW DOOR 1 LH FWD INBOARD FWD/MID
1 CABIN CREW DOOR 2 RH AFT CENTER MID/AFT
1 CABIN CREW DOOR 2 LH REARWARD MID/AFT
Note: These procedures are established for the minimum required number of 4
cabin crews.
At least, one crewmember must be seated on the center swivel cabin
attendant seat (if installed).

ALL
EMERGENCY PASSENGER DOOR OPERATION

-- SLIDE ARMED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
-- OUTSIDE CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK SAFE
Use the door window to ensure that slide deployment area is clear of:
-- Fire
-- Smoke
-- Obstacle
• If outside conditions are safe:
-- DOOR CONTROL HANDLE . . RAPIDLY LIFT FULLY UP AND RELEASE

WARNING
When the door is in the "ARMED" mode, the "Cabin Pressure Warning Light"
does not illuminate to indicate cabin differential pressure.
Indications of cabin differential pressure may be:
-- Resistance in the Door Control Handle when it is being lifted to the open
position, using normal force, and/or
-- A Hissing noise around the immediate door area,
If circumstances permit, fully lower the door control handle to the closed
position. Notify the flight crew immediately.
• If the door power assist fails the door will not open automatically:
-- DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PUSH TO OPEN

-- GUST LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK ENGAGED
-- SLIDE DEPLOYED AND INFLATED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VISUAL CHECK

ALL
EMERGENCY PASSENGER DOOR OPERATION

(CONT’D)
• If the slide is not inflated:
-- RED, MANUAL INFLATION HANDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PULL

This red, manual inflation handle is located on the right-hand side of the
slide’s girt extension.

ALL
TO OPEN THE OVERWING EXIT

-- OVERWING EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIT DOWN NEXT TO THE EXIT
Note: The emergency overwing exits are always in armed mode.
-- OVERWING EXIT COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PULL AND DISCARD

Note: The slide armed indicator illuminates.
-- OVERWING EXIT LOWER HANDLE RECESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOLD FIRMLY
-- OVERWING EXIT UPPER HATCH HANDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PULL DOWN
-- OVERWING EXIT HATCH . . REMOVE AND THROW OUTSIDE AIRCRAFT
Note: The slide automatically deploys and inflates.
• If the slide does not automatically inflate:
• In the event of ditching, and if lifeline on board the aircraft:
-- LIFELINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALL
The lifelines are stowed in overhead stowage above the RH and LH
overwing exit.
-- ONE LIFELINE SNAPHOOK . . ATTACH TO THE YELLOW DOOR-STOP

The door-stop fitting is on the upper rear corner of the overwing exit.
-- SECOND LIFELINE SNAPHOOK . . . . ATTACH TO THE YELLOW WING

HOOK
The hook is on the center of the wing surface.
-- LIFELINE PULL TABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PULL FIRMLY TO ADJUST

ALL
CABIN PREPARATION FOR PLANNED ON

GROUND EVACUATION
-- CAPTAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BRIEF PURSER

1. Nature of the emergency and intentions
2. Time available to prepare the cabin
Note: Synchronize watches, to assist with time management
3. The signal to brace
4. Signal to remain seated (if, an evacuation is not required)
5. Special instructions
-- PURSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACKNOWLEDGE CAPTAIN’S BRIEFING

-- PURSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BRIEF ALL CABIN CREWMEMBERS
-- DEMONSTRATION POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TAKE
-- PURSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERFORM EMERGENCY ANNOUNCEMENT
The Purser will brief passengers using the PA.
Note: When reading the announcement, the Purser should pause at key points
in order to allow the cabin crewmembers time to demonstrate, and
check passenger compliance.
The emergency announcement contains the following information:
-- Brace positions
-- The location of exits
-- Removal of sharp objects
-- Review of the safety information card
-- Passenger assistance, able bodied passengers.
-- DEMONSTRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERFORM
-- Demonstrate the information to the passengers as it is being read
-- Demonstrate the brace positions
-- Use the safety information card to illustrate the information.

ALL
CABIN PREPARATION FOR PLANNED ON

GROUND EVACUATION (CONT’D)
-- CABIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE
The cabin secure must also include the following items:
-- Removal of all service equipment (cups, pillows, headsets etc.) from the
cabin
-- Secure all galleys (trolleys and containers stowed and latched)
-- Switch off galley power
-- Lock all lavatory doors.
-- PASSENGERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASSIST
-- Move and reseat passengers as required.
-- Brief ABPS (Able Bodied Passengers)
-- Brief passengers assisting unaccompanied minors, elderly and disabled
passengers.
-- SLIDE IN ARMED POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK

Ensure that the area around the exits are free from all obstructions.
-- CABIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK SECURE
-- CABIN SECURE COMPLETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INFORM PURSER
-- DESIGNATED CREW SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TAKE AND SECURE HARNESS
-- CABIN READY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INFORM CAPTAIN

When the cabin is secured, the purser must notify the captain.
-- PURSER CREW SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TAKE AND SECURE HARNESS
-- SILENT REVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERFORM

Review evacuation commands, actions, and responsibilities.
-- BRACE POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADOPT ON CAPTAIN’S COMMAND

ALL
ON GROUND EVACUATION
Note: The order to evacuate is usually given by the flight crew, however, in
clearly catastrophic circumstances any cabin crewmember may initiate an
evacuation.
-- EVACUATION ORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RECEIVED
-- "EVACUATE, EVACUATE, SEAT BELTS OFF" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHOUT
-- "LEAVE EVERYTHING, HIGH HEELS OFF" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHOUT

-- SLIDE ARMED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
-- OUTSIDE CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK SAFE

Check through the observation window to ensure that the slide deployment
are is clear of:
-- Fire
-- Smoke
-- Obstacles
• If outside conditions are unsafe:
-- PASSENGERS TO NEAREST USABLE EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REDIRECT
-- EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GUARD
• If outside conditions are safe:
-- FRAME ASSIST HANDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GRASP
-- DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN
• If the door power assist fails the door will not open automatically:
-- DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PUSH TO OPEN MANUALLY
-- GUST LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK ENGAGED

ALL
ON GROUND EVACUATION (CONT’D)

-- SLIDE DEPLOYED AND INFLATED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VISUAL CHECK
Also ensure that the slide deployment area is clear of all obstructions.
• If the slide (or slideraft) does not automatically inflate:

The red, manual inflation handle is located on the right-hand side of the
slide girt extension.
-- ASSIST SPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OCCUPY

-- PASSENGER EVACUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXPEDITE
-- "COME THIS WAY, HURRY, JUMP, JUMP" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHOUT
• If the slide (or slideraft) becomes unserviceable:
-- PASSENGER EVACUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STOP

-- PASSENGERS TO ANOTHER USABLE EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REDIRECT
-- ASSIGNED AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK FULLY EVACUATED
-- EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TAKE

Time permitting, each cabin crewmember takes their designated safety and
survival equipment before leaving the aircraft.
-- CABIN CREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EVACUATE
-- PASSENGERS AWAY FROM THE AIRCRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIRECT

-- ON GROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONDUCT POST EVACUATION DUTIES

ALL
CABIN PREPARATION FOR DITCHING

-- CAPTAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BRIEF PURSER
1. Nature of the emergency and intentions
2. Time available to prepare the cabin
Note: Synchronize watches, to assist with time management
3. The signal to brace
4. Special instructions
-- PURSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACKNOWLEDGE CAPTAIN’S BRIEFING

-- PURSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BRIEF ALL CABIN CREWMEMBERS
-- DEMONSTRATION POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TAKE

Cabin crewmembers must take their own lifevests. The cabin crewmembers
will don their lifevests during the demonstration.
-- PURSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERFORM EMERGENCY ANNOUNCEMENT

The Purser will brief passengers using the PA.
Note: When reading the announcement, the Purser should pause at key points
in order to allow the cabin crewmembers time to demonstrate, and
check passenger compliance.
The emergency announcement contains the following information:
-- Lifevests (location and use)
-- Brace positions
-- The location of exits
-- Removal of sharp objects
-- Review of the safety information card
-- Passenger assistance, able bodied passengers, and assistance in fitting
infant lifevests.
-- DEMONSTRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERFORM
-- Demonstrate the information to the passengers as it is being read
-- Demonstrate the brace positions
-- Use the safety information card to illustrate the information.

ALL
CABIN PREPARATION FOR DITCHING (CONT’D)

-- CABIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK SECURE
The cabin secure must also include the following items:
-- Remove all service equipment (cups, pillows, headsets etc.) from the cabin
-- Secure all galleys (trolleys and containers stowed and latched)
-- Switch off galley power
-- Lock all lavatory doors.
-- PASSENGERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASSIST
-- Move and reseat passengers as required
-- Brief ABPS (Able Bodied Passengers)
-- Brief passengers assisting unaccompanied minors, elderly and disabled
passengers.
-- SLIDE IN ARMED POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK

Ensure that the area around the exits are free from all obstructions.
-- ABLE BODIED PASSENGERS (ABPS) SEATED AT EXIT . . . . . . . . . . BRIEF
The Able Bodied Passengers (ABPS) seated at the exit will assist the cabin
crewmember during the evacuation.
-- CABIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK SECURE

-- CABIN SECURE COMPLETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INFORM PURSER
-- DESIGNATED CREW SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TAKE AND SECURE HARNESS

-- CABIN READY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INFORM CAPTAIN
When the cabin is secured, the purser must notify the captain.
-- PURSER CREW SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TAKE AND SECURE HARNESS

-- SILENT REVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERFORM
Review evacuation commands, actions, and responsibilities.
-- BRACE POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADOPT ON CAPTAIN’S COMMAND

ALL
EVACUATION ON WATER
CABIN CREW RESPONSIBLE FOR TYPE "I" DOORS
When the cabin receives the order to evacuate, each cabin crewmember must
proceed as follows :
-- STAND UP AND SHOUT . . . . . "UNFASTEN SEATBELTS - PUT ON YOUR

LIFEVEST"
Inflate the lifevest, only once outside the aircraft.
-- ORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "REMOVE SHOES"
• If the Type I door is usable :
-- DOOR IN ARMED POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN

-- SLIDERAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DEPLOY
Do not wait for automatic inflation of the slideraft.
• If the water level is close to the door sill :
The slideraft inflates on the water.

-- SLIDERAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEAVE ATTACHED TO CABIN FLOOR
-- PASSENGERS EVACUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXPEDITE
-- COME THIS WAY, HURRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHOUT

Note: Instruct passengers to "Inflate lifevests" when passengers are leaving
the aircraft.
-- NUMBER OF PASSENGERS BOARDING THE SLIDERAFT . . . MONITOR
Ensure that the slideraft is not overloaded.

ALL
EVACUATION ON WATER (CONT’D)

-- LAST CREWMEMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BOARD SLIDERAFT
-- SLIDERAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SEPARATE FROM DOOR SILL
The last crewmember must separate the slideraft from the door sill, and board
with all the necessary safety equipment.
-- MOORING LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUT

-- SURVIVAL KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RETRIEVE
The survival kit is attached to the slideraft via a lanyard.
• If the water level is too far away from the door sill :
-- SLIDERAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISCONNECT FROM DOOR SILL

The slideraft remains tied to the aircraft by a 6-meters (20 feet) mooring line.
-- MOORING LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOLD

To keep the slideraft close to the exit, hold the mooring line.

-- PASSENGERS EVACUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXPEDITE
-- COME THIS WAY, HURRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHOUT
Note: Instruct passengers to "Inflate lifevests" when passengers are leaving
the aircraft.
-- NUMBER OF PASSENGERS BOARDING THE SLIDERAFT . . . MONITOR
Ensure that the slideraft is not overloaded.
-- LAST CREWMEMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BOARD SLIDERAFT
The last crewmember must board with all the necessary safety equipment.

ALL

-- MOORING LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUT
-- SURVIVAL KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RETRIEVE
The survival kit is attached to the slideraft via a lanyard.
Evacuation is usually done through the passenger doors. However, if one of the
passenger doors is not usable, the overwing exit may be used for evacuation.
The cabin crew should install the lifeline to help passenger to stay on the wing.
These passengers will, however, be obliged to wait on the wing until the slideraft
arrives, and until all other passengers have evacuated from the passenger door
exits, and have finished boarding the sliderafts.
R (1)
• If the aircraft is equipped with portable raft:
Before using a portable raft at a passenger door, ensure that all usable
sliderafts have been boarded to their maximum capacity and detached from
the doorsill.
-- Locate and open the portable raft compartment located in the
overhead bin; remove the raft pack.
-- Carry the raft pack to the exit.
-- Place it on the floor near exit.

-- Firmly tie the end of the mooring line to a fixed part of the aircraft (a
passenger seat, or one of the frame assist handles).
-- Throw the portable raft out of the aircraft the raft will inflate
automatically.
• If the portable raft does not inflate automatically:
-- Pull on the mooring line to inflate the portable raft

ALL

-- Pull the portable raft near to the aircraft using the mooring line, and
board passengers.
Note: Passengers should be distributed evenly to prevent the raft from
capsizing.
-- When all passengers have boarded the portable raft, the crewmember
must board.
-- Separate the portable raft from the aircraft by cutting the mooring line.
R (2)

HIGHLIGHTS
(1) New item ’If the aircraft is equipped with portable raft:’
(2) Deleted item ’If the aircraft is equipped with portable raft:’

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL EMERGENCY COCKPIT EVACUATION SEP 13/07
ALL
COCKPIT EVACUATION THROUGH WINDOW
OPENING THE SLIDING WINDOW
-- HANDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PUSH DOWN AND PULL BACK

Pulling the handle backwards, opens the sliding window.
COCKPIT EVACUATION WITH ESCAPE ROPE
-- ESCAPE ROPE STOWAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN

The escape rope stowage is located above the sliding window, on either side
of the overhead panel.
-- ESCAPE ROPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNROLL

Unroll the escape rope until the red flag appears, and throw it through the
window.
-- SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STEP ON
-- ESCAPE ROPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GRASP
Grasp the escape rope firmly with both hands, and slide down along the rope.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL EMERGENCY COCKPIT EVACUATION SEP 13/07
ALL
COCKPIT EVACUATION THROUGH COCKPIT

DOOR
-- QUICK RELEASE PINS . . PULL TOWARDS THE CENTER OF THE FLAP
-- ESCAPE PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KICK TOWARDS CABIN

-- THROUGH ESCAPE PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EVACUATE
-- ON HANDS AND KNEES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOVE TOWARDS CABIN

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DEPRESSURIZATION SEP 13/07
ALL
CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION
-- NEAREST OXYGEN MASK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DON
WARNING
Do not remove your oxygen mask until it is safe to do so. Removing your
oxygen during a depressurization may lead to total incapacitation caused by
hypoxia.
-- NEAREST SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIT DOWN

-- SEATBELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FASTEN
In case of cabin depressurization, the lavatory return to seat" signs do not
come on. For passengers located in the lavatories, 2 masks will immediately
drop down from the lavatory ceiling. Passengers should apply the mask over
their nose and mouth.
• If no seat is available:
-- FIXED OBJECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GRASP AND HOLD ON

When no seat is available, the cabin crew should wedge themselves
between passengers and hold on.
-- DON OXYGEN MASKS - FASTEN SEATBELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTRUCT

PASSENGERS
From your location, speak through your mask, or use gestures to
demonstrate the donning of masks.
-- ANNOUNCEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAKE, IF POSSIBLE

Although the bag does not inflate, oxygen is flowing to the mask.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DEPRESSURIZATION SEP 13/07
ALL
CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION (CONT’D)
• When notified by the flight crew (PA) that a safe flight level has been
reached:
-- CABIN CREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRANSFER TO PORTABLE OXYGEN

Note: To prevent crew incapacitation due to hypoxia, the cabin crew must
transfer to portable oxygen, and consider their post decompression
oxygen needs. When deciding to remove oxygen masks, the cabin
crew must use good judgement, and must be alert to any signs of
hypoxia.
-- FLIGHT CREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK

The cabin crewmember nearest to the cockpit should check on the flight
crew in case assistance is needed.
-- PASSENGERS AND CABIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
The cabin crew should check for passenger injuries and, damage to the
cabin.
-- FIRST AID AND OXYGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GIVE AS REQUIRED
-- CABIN STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPORT TO FLIGHT CREW

Report the nature of injuries, and the cabin damage to the flight crew.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL TURBULENCE MANAGEMENT SEP 13/07
ALL
TURBULENCE MANAGEMENT
The following levels of turbulence can be encountered during a flight:
-- Light turbulence
-- Moderate turbulence
-- Severe turbulence.
The cabin crew should always use these terms when communicating turbulent
conditions to the flight crew or other cabin crewmembers.
The following table provides the definition and the cabin conditions associated
with each of the three levels of turbulence.
LIGHT TURBULENCE MODERATE SEVERE TURBULENCE
TURBULENCE
Light turbulence Moderate turbulence, Severe turbulence causes
momentarily causes causes rapid bumps or large abrupt changes in
slight, rapid, and rhythmic jolts. the aircraft altitude and
bumpiness without attitude.
noticeable changes in the
aircraft altitude or attitude.
Cabin Conditions Cabin Conditions Cabin Conditions
. Liquids are shaking . Liquids are shaking . Items falling or lifting
but are not splashing but are not splashing off the floor
out of cups out of cups . Loose items are
. Trolleys can be . Trolleys difficult to tossed about the cabin
maneuvered with little manoeuvre . Impossible to walk
difficulty . Difficult to walk in the . Passengers are forced
. Passengers may feel a cabin violently against their
slight strain against . Difficult to stand seat belts
their seat belts. without holding on to
something
. Passengers feel
definite strain against
their seat belts.

ALL
TURBULENCE MANAGEMENT (CONT’D)
CABIN GUIDELINES
It is important that the cabin crew perform frequent cabin checks and correctly
manage the galleys to ensure safety and reduce the probability of injuries.
Therefore, the cabin crew should:
-- Check the cabin frequently and ensure that the cabin is kept tidy
-- Minimize the amount of service equipment left on galley and bar (when
installed) surfaces. When items must remain available they should be placed
inside draws that are easily accessible
-- Ensure that galleys are correctly secured and latched after each service/use
-- Ensure that trolleys and equipment should be correctly stowed after use.

ALL
CABIN CREW PROCEDURES
SECURING THE CABIN AND PASSENGER COMPLIANCE
The table below provides the cabin crew procedures in the case of turbulence.
TURBULENCE
-- Visually check that all -- When the cabin crew -- The cabin crew must
passengers are seated are returning to their not attempt to visually
with their seat belts crew seats, check that check passenger
fastened and hand all passengers are compliance
baggage is stowed seated with their seat -- If trolleys are in the
-- Infants must be belts securely fastened cabin, set the brakes
removed from and hand baggage is on all trolleys that are
bassinets and secured stowed in use in the current
with an infant seat belt -- Infants must be location
(if applicable) on the removed from -- Place jugs/pots of hot
guardians lap, or bassinets and beverages on the floor
secured in an secured with an -- The cabin crew must
approved car seat infant seat belt (if immediately sit down.
-- Give the "cabin applicable) on the Take the nearest seat
secure" to the Purser guardians lap, or (including passenger
-- Purser informs the secured in an seat ) and fasten
flight crew that the approved car seat seatbelt/harness.
cabin is secure. -- Prohibit the use of
the forward and
rear stairs WARNING
-- Give the "cabin Cabin crew must not
secure" to the risk personal injury by
Purser continuing service
-- Purser informs the during turbulent
flight crew that the conditions. The
cabin is secure. personal safety of the
cabin crew is the
priority

ALL
CABIN CREW PROCEDURES (CONT’D)
GALLEY AREAS

TURBULENCE
-- Ensure that trolleys -- Ensure that trolleys -- Set the brakes on all
and galley equipment and galley equipment trolleys that are in use
that is not in use are that is not in use are in their current location
correctly stowed and correctly stowed and -- Place jugs/pots of hot
secured. secured beverages on the floor
-- If the turbulence is -- The cabin crew must
expected for a long immediately sit down.
duration, stow and Fasten seat
secure galley items belt/harness.
-- Cabin crewmembers
working in the galley
areas must take their WARNING
seats when the galley Cabin crew must not
is secured. risk personal injury by
continuing service
during turbulent
conditions. The
personal safety of the
cabin crew is the
priority.

ALL
ANTICIPATED TURBULENCE PROCEDURES
When turbulence is anticipated the cabin crew will have a certain amount of time
before the turbulence is encountered to secure the cabin and themselves.

ALL
ANTICIPATED TURBULENCE PROCEDURES

(CONT’D)
FLIGHT CREW PURSER PREFLIGHT CABIN CREW
PREFLIGHT PREFLIGHT
-- Include as part of the -- Inform all the cabin -- Acknowledge
pre-flight briefing with crew of any turbulence information from
Purser, expected areas information received Purser.
of turbulence during from the flight crew
the flight. during the pre-flight
briefing
FLIGHT CREW PURSER IN-FLIGHT CABIN CREW IN-FLIGHT
IN-FLIGHT
-- When turbulence is -- When the service is -- Once the cabin crew
expected during the interrupted as a are advised of
flight, the flight crew precautionary measure, anticipated turbulence,
must advise the cabin a PA announcement the cabin crew should
crew how much time should be made to the prioritize their duties
is available to secure passengers explaining based on the time
the cabin, the level WHY the service is available before the
and expected duration interrupted turbulence encounter.
of the turbulence -- Ensure that all -- Stow and secure large
encounter passengers and cabin items first, such as,
-- The captain or first crew are secured trolleys
officer will make a PA -- Inform the flight crew -- Remove bottles from
announcement to the that all passengers the cabin and galley
passengers instructing and cabin crew are surfaces. Throw away
them to return to their secured. any hot liquids
seats and fasten their -- Secure the cabin,
seatbelts. ensure that the
lavatories are
unoccupied
-- Secure the galleys
-- The cabin crew should
then secure
themselves
-- Inform Purser that
passengers and cabin
crew are secured.

ALL
UNANTICIPATED TURBULENCE PROCEDURES
FLIGHT CREW PURSER CABIN CREW

-- Switch on the Fasten -- The Purser must -- The cabin crew must
Seatbelt signs and Immediately sit down. immediately sit down.
make a PA to Take the nearest seat Take the nearest seat
passengers and cabin (including passenger (including passenger
crew to "Fasten seat) and fasten seat) and fasten
Seatbelts Immediately". seatbelt and harness. seatbelt/harness.
WARNING
Cabin crew must not
risk personal injury by
continuing service
during turbulent
conditions. The
personal safety of the
cabin crew is the
priority.

ALL
POST TURBULENCE DUTIES

FLIGHT CREW PURSER CABIN CREW
-- Advise cabin crew -- Resume duties -- Check for passenger
when it is safe to -- Report any passenger injuries, give first aid if
resume duties. injuries and/or cabin necessary
damage to the flight -- Calm and reassure
crew. passengers
-- Check for cabin
damage
-- Report to Purser any
passenger injuries
and/or cabin damage.

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL MISCELLANEOUS SEP 13/07
ALL
FLIGHT CREWMEMBER INCAPACITATION
• If a flight crewmember becomes incapacitated:
The remaining flight crewmember will as soon as practicable call for help from
cabin crewmembers.
The simplest and most effective way to summon help is via the PA system:
"CABIN CREWMEMBER TO COCKPIT"
The nearest cabin crewmember, must immediately proceed to the cockpit. The
cabin crewmember must carry out the following actions:
-- FLIGHT CREW SHOULDER HARNESS . . . . TIGHTEN AND MANUALLY

LOCK
-- FLIGHT CREW SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PUSH THE SEAT FULLY AFT
-- FLIGHT CREW SEAT BACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RECLINE
• If the incapacitated flight crewmember is unconscious or has difficulty

breathing:
-- OXYGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADMINISTER IMMEDIATELY
-- INSTRUCTIONS FROM THE PILOT FLYING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FOLLOW

CAUTION
It takes two people to move an unconscious body from a flight crew seat,
in order to prevent damage or interference to the cockpit controls.
• If it is not possible to move the incapacitated flight crewmember:
-- CABIN CREWMEMBER IN THE COCKPIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMAIN

One cabin crewmember should remain in the cockpit to take care of, and
observe the incapacitated flight crewmember.

ALL
FLIGHT CREWMEMBER INCAPACITATION (CONT’D)

-- MEDICAL ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REQUEST
Make a PA announcement to request assistance from any medically
qualified passenger onboard.
-- COMPANY QUALIFIED PILOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REQUEST ASSISTANCE

Request the assistance of a type qualified company pilot onboard to
replace the incapacitated flight crewmember.

ALL
FLIGHT CREWMEMBER’S CHECK-LIST USE
The minimum certified number of flight crewmembers on the A320 is two. To

comply with Jar-Ops 1.1010 (g), for a practical demonstration by cabin
crewmembers in the use of flight crewmember’s checklists.
• If one of the flight crewmembers becomes incapacitated when only the

minimum required flight crew is onboard, a cabin crewmember may be
required by the remaining pilot to assist by reading the landing checklists.
At the request of the remaining flight crewmember the cabin crewmember
who will read the checklist should proceed as follows:
-- CABIN CREWMEMBER . . . . . . . . . . READ CHECKLIST ALOUD CLEARLY

-- RESPONSE FROM FLIGHT CREWMEMBER . . . WAIT UNTIL RECEIVED
Note: The cabin crewmember must wait for the response of the flight
crewmember , before moving onto the next item on the checklist.
Continue to the last item of the checklist, after the flight crewmember gives
the response to the last checklist item.
-- CABIN CREWMEMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPLY "CHECKLIST COMPLETE"

This reply is given only after the final checklist response from flight
crewmember has been received.

ALL
BOMB ON BOARD
CABIN PROCEDURES
If a suspect device is found in the cabin:
WARNING
do not cut or disconnect any wires and do not open or attempt to gain entry
to internal components of a closed or concealed suspect device. any attempt
may result in an explosion. booby-trapped closed devices have been used on
aircraft in the past.
WARNING
alternate locations must not be used without consulting with an aviation
explosives security specialist. never take a suspect device to the flight deck.
CAUTION
The least risk bomb location for aircraft structure and systems is center of the
RH aft cabin door.
-- EOD PERSONNEL ON BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK

Announce : "Is there any EOD personnel on board ?". By using the initials,
only persons familiar with EOD (Explosive Ordnance Disposal) will be made
aware of the problem.
-- BOMB . . . . . . . DO NOT OPEN, DO NOT CUT WIRES, SECURE AGAINST

SLIPPING, AVOID SHOCKS
Secure in the attitude found and do not lift before having checked for an
anti-lift ignition device.

ALL
BOMB ON BOARD (CONT’D)

-- PASSENGERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEAD AWAY FROM BOMB
Move passengers at least 4 seat rows away the bomb location. On full flights,
it may be necessary to double up passengers to achieve standoff from the
suspect device.
Passengers near the bomb should protect their heads with pillows, blankets.
All passengers must remain seated with seatbelts on and, if possible, head
below the top of the head rest. Seat backs and tray tables must be in their
full upright position.
Service items may need to be collected in order to secure tray tables.
-- PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SWITCH OFF

The cabin crews must command passengers to switch off all portable
electronic devices.
-- BOMB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK NO ANTI-LIFT DEVICE
To check for an anti-lift switch or lever, slide a string or stiff card (such as the
emergency information card) under the bomb, without disturbing the bomb.
If the string or card cannot be slipped under the bomb, it may indicate that an
anti-lift switch or lever is present and that the bomb cannot be moved.
If a card is used and can be slid under the bomb, leave it under the bomb
and move together with the bomb.
If it is not possible to move the bomb, then it should be surrounded with a
single thin sheet of plastic (e.g. trash bag), then with wetted materials, and
other blast attenuation materials such as seat cushions and soft carry-on
baggage. Move personnel as far away from the bomb location as possible.
-- EMERGENCY EQUIPMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVE AND STOW

Emergency equipments (PBE, fire extinguisher, ...) located close to the LRBL
must be removed and stowed in alternate location.
-- GALLEY/IFE POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
All galley and IFE equipments located close to the LRBL must be switched off.
• If the bomb can be moved :
-- RH AFT CABIN DOOR SLIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISARM

ALL

-- LEAST RISK BOMB LOCATION (LRBL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PREPARE
Build up a platform of solid baggage against the door up to about 25 cm
(10 in) below the middle of the door.
On top of this, build up at least 25 cm (10 in) of wetted material such as
blankets and pillows.
Place a single thin sheet of plastic (e.g. trash bag) on top of the wetted
materials. This prevents any possible short circuit.
CAUTION
DO NOT OMIT THE PLASTIC SHEETS, AS THE SUSPECT DEVICE
COULD GET WET AND POSSIBLY SHORT CIRCUIT ELECTRONIC
COMPONENTS CAUSING INADVERTENT DEVICE ACTIVATION.
-- BOMB INDICATION LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POSITION

Note: A bomb location indicator line is a 6- to 8- foot (1.8 to 2.4 m) line
(e.g. neckties, headset cord, or belts connected together) preferably
of constrating color, that helps the responding bomb squad find the
precise location of the suspect device within the LRBL stack once
constructed.
Position the bomb indication line from the location on the platform where
you will place the suspect device, EXTENDING outward into the aisle.
-- BOMB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOVE TO LRBL

Carefully carry in the attitude found and place on top of the wetted materials
in the same attitude and as close to the door structure as possible.
CAUTION
Ensure that the suspect device, when placed on the stack against the door,
is above the slide pack but not against the door handle, and if possible,
avoid placement in the view port.

ALL

-- LEAST RISK BOMB LOCATION (LRBL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETE
Place an additional single thin sheet of plastic over the bomb.
CAUTION
DO NOT OMIT THE PLASTIC SHEETS, AS THE SUSPECT DEVICE
COULD GET WET AND POSSIBLY SHORT CIRCUIT ELECTRONIC
COMPONENTS CAUSING INADVERTENT DEVICE ACTIVATION.
Build up at 25 cm (10 in) of wetted material around the sides and on top
of the bomb.
DO NOT PLACE ANYTHING BETWEEN THE BOMB AND THE DOOR,
AND MINIMIZE AIRSPACE AROUND THE BOMB.
The idea is to build up a protective surrounding of the bomb so that the
explosive force is directed in the only unprotected area into the door
structure.
Fill the area around the bomb with seat cushions and other soft materials
such as hand luggage (saturated with water or any other nonflammable
liquid) up to the cabin ceiling, compressing as much as possible. Secure
the LRBL stack in place using belt, ties or other appropriate materials. The
more material stacked around the bomb, the less the damage will be.
USE ONLY SOFT MATERIAL. AVOID USING MATERIALS CONTAINING
ANY INFLAMMABLE LIQUID AND ANY METAL OBJECTS WHICH COULD
BECOME DANGEROUS PROJECTILES.

ALL

LRBL STACK
Second Layer of Wet Material
Bomb Location Indicator Line
Soft
Baggage,
Seat
Cushions
BOMB
SLIDE
First Layer of Wet Material
Container
Hard Baggage
NOC 09070 00484 0001

ALL

-- PASSENGERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOVE/ADVISE
Move passengers at least 4 seat rows away from the least risk bomb
location (RH aft cabin door). On full flights, it may be necessary to double
up passengers to achieve standoff from the suspect device.
Passengers near the bomb should protect their heads with pillows, blankets.
All passengers must remain seated with seatbelts on and, if possible, head
below the top of the head rest. Seat backs and tray tables must be in their
full upright position.
-- CABIN CREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NOTIFY COCKPIT CREW

Cabin crew notify the flight crew that the bomb is secured at the LRBL.
-- EVACUATION/DISEMBARKATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXECUTE
Evacuate through normal and emergency exits on the opposite side of the
"bomb" location. Do not use the door just opposite the "bomb".
Use all available airport facilities to disembark without delay.

ALL
SINGLE BLADE LAVATORY DOOR EMERGENCY

OPERATION
In case of an emergency, the single-blade lavatory door may be unlocked from

the cabin.
-- LAVATORY SIGN COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIFT
The spring-loaded lavatory sign cover is located above the door’s
VACANT/OCCUPIED indicator.
-- KNOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLIDE TO THE SIDE
Sliding the knob to the side will unlock the lavatory door, and the indicator will
show: "VACANT".
-- LAVATORY DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PULL OPEN
• If the lavatory door still does not open:
-- UPPER AND LOWER OUTSIDE LATCHES OF THE DOOR . . . UNLOCK

-- LAVATORY DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PULL OPEN
WARNING
After releasing the lavatory door:
Hold on to the lavatory door to prevent injury .

ALL
BI-FOLDING LAVATORY DOOR EMERGENCY

OPERATION
In case of an emergency, the bi-folding lavatory door may be unlocked from the
cabin.
-- LAVATORY SIGN COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIFT
The spring-loaded lavatory sign cover is located above the door’s
VACANT/OCCUPIED indicator.
-- KNOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLIDE TO THE SIDE
Sliding the knob to the side will unlock the lavatory door, and the indicator will
show: "VACANT".
-- LAVATORY DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PULL OPEN
• If the lavatory door still does not open:
-- UPPER AND LOWER OUTSIDE LATCHES OF THE DOOR . . . UNLOCK

-- LAVATORY DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PULL OPEN
WARNING
After releasing the lavatory door:
Hold on to the lavatory door to prevent injury .

ALL
REJECTED TAKEOFF
In the event of a rejected takeoff, the cabin crew should proceed as follows:
-- CABIN CREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMAIN SEATED WITH HARNESS SECURED

The cabin crew must remain seated in their jump seats, until the aircraft
comes to a complete stop.
-- COCKPIT CREW INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WAIT FOR AND FOLLOW
• If the cabin crew suspects or notices the development of an emergency

situation (based on passenger reactions, smoke, noises, odors, aircraft
attitude...):
-- CABIN CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASSESS

When the aircraft comes to a complete stop, and if necessary, the cabin
crew can leave their jump seats to further assess any conditions and/or
passenger reactions.
• If the cabin crew determines that there is an emergency situation:
-- CABIN CREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY COCKPIT CREW

The cabin crew must immediately notify the cockpit crew of the cabin
conditions, and of the nature of the emergency.
-- COCKPIT CREW INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FOLLOW

A320 Generic Training CCOM PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A320 Generic Training CCOM PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

A320 Generic Training CCOM PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the generic A320 CCOM?

What is the purpose of the generic A320 CCOM?

What should the cabin crew do in the event of a rejected takeoff?

What should the cabin crew do in the event of a rejected takeoff?

It is the operator’s responsibility to ensure that their cabin crew operating

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS JAN 08/08

00.010 GENERAL INTRODUCTION

00.030 AIRCRAFT ALLOCATION TABLE

00.040 LIST OF SECTIONS

00.050 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

00.060 UNITS CONVERSION TABLE

00.070 LIST OF MODIFICATIONS

TR1 A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET CCOM Page 1 of 1

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GENERAL INTRODUCTION OCT 27/07

TR1 A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET CCOM Page 1 of 12

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GENERAL INTRODUCTION OCT 27/07

The CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL (CCOM) provides descriptive

TR1 A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET CCOM Page 2 of 12

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GENERAL INTRODUCTION OCT 27/07

COMMENTS AND ENQUIRY

TR1 A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET CCOM Page 3 of 12

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GENERAL INTRODUCTION OCT 27/07

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS AND NOTES

WARNING : An operating procedure, technique, etc., which may result in

CAUTION : An operating procedure, technique, etc., which may result in

NOTE : An operating procedure, technique, etc., considered essential

TR1 A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET CCOM Page 4 of 12

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GENERAL INTRODUCTION OCT 27/07

TR1 A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET CCOM Page 5 of 12

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GENERAL INTRODUCTION OCT 27/07

Chapter 10 : CABIN CREW BULLETINS (CCB)

TR1 A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET CCOM Page 6 of 12

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GENERAL INTRODUCTION OCT 27/07

The "PDF" CCOM is designed with the following paper layout :

The header is composed of the following three parts :

NOC 00010 00201 0001

TR1 A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET CCOM Page 7 of 12

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GENERAL INTRODUCTION OCT 27/07

EXAMPLE : FLEET CCOM

AFR A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET CCOM PAGE 1 OF 5

NOC 00010 00202 0001

TR1 A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET CCOM Page 8 of 12

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GENERAL INTRODUCTION OCT 27/07

In the List Of Sections (LOS), each line (section) will have :

-- The revision date.

TR1 A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET CCOM Page 9 of 12

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GENERAL INTRODUCTION OCT 27/07

LIST OF MODIFICATIONS (LOM)

Each DU is assigned an effectivity :

TR1 A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET CCOM Page 11 of 12

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GENERAL INTRODUCTION OCT 27/07

(1) New item ’GENERAL GUIDELINES’ for ’ALL’

(2) Update of the description to be in accordance with the A380 CCOM.

TR1 A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET CCOM Highlights 1 of 1

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL LIST OF SECTIONS JAN 08/08

Section Date Section Date

TR1 A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET CCOM Page 1 of 1

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS OCT 27/07

TR1 A318/A319/A320/A321 FLEET CCOM Page 1 of 13